Legacy ControlEdge HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide ... provides a clear view of the configuration operation allowing quick ...
Added Warning Instructions during Hot-Start : Rev.24 . April 2019 : Upgraded to R700 . Rev.25 : November 2019 . Revision 25 ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide v November 2019 Support & Contact Information . For Europe, Asia Pacific, North and South America contact details, refer to the back page of this manual
Added Warning Instructions during Hot-Start : Rev.24 . April 2019 : Upgraded to R700 . Rev.25 : November 2019 . Revision 25 ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User ...
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer Software User Guide
Doc. No.:51-52-25-110 Revision: 25
Revision Date: November 2019
Honeywell Process Solutions
Notices and Trademarks
Copyright 2019 by Honeywell Revision 25, November 2019
WARRANTY/REMEDY Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship. Contact your local sales office for warranty information. If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective. The foregoing is Buyer's sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use. While we provide application assistance personally, through our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application.
Honeywell Process Solutions 1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S
Houston, TX 77042
ControlEdge HC900 is a U.S. trademark of Honeywell Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
ii
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
License Agreement
Read this agreement before opening the software. Once you have removed the software from its envelope, you have accepted the agreement. USAGE RIGHTS Your rights, with respect to the Software, are non-exclusive. The software may only be used by one user, on one computer at a time. The software may be transferred to another computer, as long as it is only used by one user at a time. The Software and its documentation may not be copied or distributed to others. You may not create, modify, alter, adapt, merge, de-compile or reverse-engineer the Software, and you may not remove or obscure Honeywell or other included copyright or trademark notices.
TERM OF LICENSE This agreement is effective unit terminated. Terminate the Agreement by destroying the Software, documentation and all backup copies.
BACKUP COPIES You may make backup copies of the Software. The copyright notice(s) must be included on each backup copy.
COPYRIGHTS The Software accompanying this manual is protected by United States copyright law. The Software documentation is copyrighted. You may only copy the Software and the Software documentation for backup or to load the Software onto your computer as part of program execution.
TITLE TO SOFTWARE AND CONFIDENTIALITY The Software and all copies thereof are proprietary to Honeywell and title thereto remains in Honeywell. All applicable rights to patents, copyrights, trademarks and trade secrets in the Software are and shall remain in Honeywell. You may not sell, transfer, publish, or otherwise make available any software copies thereof to others. You acknowledge that the Software is a trade secret of Honeywell. You agree to secure and protect each program, software product and copies thereof in a manner consistent with the maintenance of Honeywell's rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or agreement within your organization to satisfy your obligations hereunder. Violation of these provisions shall be a basis for immediate termination of this license. Termination of the license shall be in addition to and not in lieu of any other legal or equitable remedies available in Honeywell.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
iii
November 2019
About This Document
Abstract
The Designer program operates on a PC with WindowsTM 7, 8 and 10. It enables you create, edit, view and monitor ControlEdge HC900 Control strategy configurations as well as your Operator Interface menu, screen and button configurations. It uses graphic symbols and line drawing connections to represent control strategies. Completed configurations are loaded into the control system using a dedicated communication port in the controller.
References
The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this publication.
Document Title ControlEdge HC900 Controller Technical Overview Legacy ControlEdge HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide ControlEdge HC900 Operator Interface User Guide ControlEdge HC900 Function Block Reference Guide ControlEdge HC900 Communications User Guide ControlEdge HC900 Process & Safety Controller User & Installation Manual ControlEdge HC900 Controller Safety Manual
Doc ID 51-52-03-31 51-52-25-107 51-52-25-108 51-52-25-109 51-52-25-111 51-52-25-154 51-52-25-153
Revision Information
Document Name This manual ... 51-52-25-110 ControlEdge HC900 Control
Designer Software User Guide Mandarin Language, performance Improvement and
capacity expansion Set Point Type Parameter included Added Warning Instructions during Hot-Start
Upgraded to R700
Revision Number
Rev.22 Rev.23 Rev.24 Rev.25
Publication Date
September 2018 December 2018
April 2019 November 2019
iv
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Support & Contact Information
For Europe, Asia Pacific, North and South America contact details, refer to the back page of this manual or the appropriate Honeywell Solution Support web site:
Honeywell Organization Corporate Honeywell Process Solutions HPS Technical tips
Training
WWW Address (URL)
http://www.honeywell.com
http://www.hpsweb.honewell.com/ps
http://hpsweb.honeywell.com/Cultures/enUS/Products/Instrumentation/hybrid/hc900/TechnicalTips/d ocuments.htm http://www.honeywellprocess.com/en-US/training
Telephone and Email Contacts
Area United States and Canada
Global Email Support
Organization Honeywell Inc.
Honeywell Process Solutions
Phone Number
1-800-343-0228 Customer Service 1-800-423-9883 Global Technical Support Email: (Sales) FP-Sales-Apps@Honeywell.com or (TAC) hfs-tac-support@honeywell.com
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
v
November 2019
Symbol Definitions
The following table lists those symbols that may be used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol
Definition
This DANGER symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
This WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
This CAUTION symbol may be present on Control Product instrumentation and literature. If present on a product, the user must consult the appropriate part of the accompanying product literature for more information.
This CAUTION symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
WARNING PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury.
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements.
Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements.
vi
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Table of Contents
1. SOFTWARE INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW ................................................. 1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1 Features.......................................................................................................................... 1
2. HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS.............................................. 5
What to Know Before You Start ...................................................................................... 5 Rack, Module, and Channel Assignments....................................................................... 5
3. IMPLEMENTATION .............................................................................................. 7
Starting the Application ................................................................................................... 7 Connecting the PC to the Controller................................................................................ 8
4. USER INTERFACE ............................................................................................... 9
User Interface Overview.................................................................................................. 9 General Terminology..................................................................................................... 10 File Browser Window .................................................................................................... 11 Worksheet Toolbox Window.......................................................................................... 12 Traceback Window ....................................................................................................... 15 Watch Summary Window.............................................................................................. 16 Status Bar ..................................................................................................................... 17 Menu Conventions ........................................................................................................ 17 Selecting a Menu .......................................................................................................... 18 Closing a Menu ............................................................................................................. 18 Main Menu .................................................................................................................... 18 File Menu ...................................................................................................................... 19 Edit Menu...................................................................................................................... 21 View Menu .................................................................................................................... 23 Options Menu ............................................................................................................... 24 Monitor Menu ................................................................................................................ 24 Recipes Menu ............................................................................................................... 25 Window Menu ............................................................................................................... 26 Help Menu .................................................................................................................... 26 Main Toolbar Functions................................................................................................. 27 Navigational Tools ........................................................................................................ 29 Right Mouse Click ......................................................................................................... 29 Keyboard Navigation..................................................................................................... 31
5. FILE MANAGEMENT.......................................................................................... 33
Opening an Existing File ............................................................................................... 33 Creating a New Configuration File................................................................................. 33 Saving A Configuration File........................................................................................... 33 Creating Other File Types ............................................................................................. 35 Converting ControlEdge HC900 Configurations ............................................................ 36 Uploading a File from the Controller.............................................................................. 37 Downloading a File to the Controller ............................................................................. 38 Downloading Firmware ................................................................................................. 41 Download Firmware Error Messages ............................................................................ 43 File Properties............................................................................................................... 45
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
vii
November 2019
How to Add Worksheet Protection................................................................................. 46 File Read Protection ..................................................................................................... 49 Write Protect a File ....................................................................................................... 50
6. PC COMM PORTS AND CONNECTIONS .......................................................... 51
How to Manage PC Comm Ports and Connections ....................................................... 51 PC Network Port Set Up For Controller Access............................................................. 51 PC Serial Com Port Setup ............................................................................................ 53 PC to Controller Connection Settings............................................................................ 55 Remote Loopback Test ................................................................................................. 56 Remote Access............................................................................................................. 56 Select the Number to Call ............................................................................................. 57 Communications Statistics ............................................................................................ 57
7. WORKSHEETS OVERVIEW............................................................................... 59
What is a Worksheet? ................................................................................................... 59 Worksheet Category Tabs ............................................................................................ 60
8. CONTROLLER WORKSHEET ........................................................................... 61
Controller Worksheet Overview..................................................................................... 61 Controller Configuration Toolbar ................................................................................... 62 E-Mail Notification ......................................................................................................... 63 Unlock the Worksheets ................................................................................................. 64
9. DISPLAY WORKSHEET..................................................................................... 65
Operator Panel Worksheet Overview ............................................................................ 65 Operator Panel Configuration Toolbar........................................................................... 65 Operator Interface Displays........................................................................................... 66 Display Buttons Configuration ....................................................................................... 66 Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups.................................................................. 68 Alarm Details ................................................................................................................ 72 Event List Configuration ................................................................................................ 73 Event Details................................................................................................................. 74 E-Mail Notification ......................................................................................................... 74 Operator Interface Settings ........................................................................................... 75 O/I File Names for Disk Storage.................................................................................... 77 Start Up Display Configuration ...................................................................................... 77 Message Display Configuration..................................................................................... 78 Unlock the Worksheets ................................................................................................. 78
10. DATA STORAGE................................................................................................ 79
Data Storage Overview ................................................................................................. 79 Data Storage Conventions ............................................................................................ 79 Data Storage Enable Conditions ................................................................................... 82 Data Storage Configuration Access .............................................................................. 85 Create/Edit Data Storage File ....................................................................................... 86 Trend Storage Configuration ......................................................................................... 86 Point Log Storage Configuration ................................................................................... 88 Alarm/Event Storage Configuration ............................................................................... 90
viii
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
11. FUNCTION BLOCK DIAGRAM (FBD) WORKSHEET ........................................ 91
FB Worksheet Overview ............................................................................................... 91 FBD Configuration Toolbar ........................................................................................... 92 How to Add a New FBD Worksheet .............................................................................. 93 How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets ................................................................. 93 Keyboard Navigation..................................................................................................... 95 Traceback Window ....................................................................................................... 96 Resolve Dangling Soft Wires......................................................................................... 97 How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet ................................................................. 99 ................................................................................................................................... 100 How To Find and Replace Item on the FDB Worksheet .............................................. 100 How to Change a FBD's Worksheet Properties........................................................... 102 How to Change the Worksheet Order ......................................................................... 102 How to Delete a FBD Worksheet ................................................................................ 102 How to Add Worksheet Protection............................................................................... 103 Alarm Group Configuration.......................................................................................... 105 Alarm Details .............................................................................................................. 106 Event List Configuration .............................................................................................. 107 Execution Order .......................................................................................................... 107 Event Details............................................................................................................... 113 E-Mail Notification ....................................................................................................... 114 Unlock the Worksheets ............................................................................................... 114
12. LIBRARY FUNCTIONALITY............................................................................. 115
Change Item Name ..................................................................................................... 116
13. FUNCTION BLOCKS OVERVIEW.................................................................... 119
Function Block Definition............................................................................................. 119 Function Block Identification........................................................................................ 119 Function Block Inputs and Outputs.............................................................................. 119 Types of Function Blocks ............................................................................................ 121 Function Block Attributes ............................................................................................ 121 Fast Scan Indicator ..................................................................................................... 122
14. USING FUNCTION BLOCKS TO BUILD A CONTROL /SAFETY STRATEGY 123
Before You Start ......................................................................................................... 123 General Steps to Build a Control /Safety Strategy....................................................... 123 Adding, Moving, Deleting Function Blocks to a FBD ................................................... 124 Connecting/Disconnecting Blocks ............................................................................... 125 Adding a Variable........................................................................................................ 127 Adding a Numeric Constant ........................................................................................ 131 Adding a Connector .................................................................................................... 132 Variables..................................................................................................................... 132 Wire Nodes ................................................................................................................. 133 Signal Tags................................................................................................................. 134 Page Connectors ........................................................................................................ 137 Boundary Item............................................................................................................. 139 Text String .................................................................................................................. 140 Changing the Default Annotation Attributes................................................................. 141 Auto Save Functionality .............................................................................................. 141
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
ix
November 2019
15. CONVENTIONS ................................................................................................ 142
Drag and Drop ............................................................................................................ 142 Accessing Context Sensitive Help............................................................................... 142 Right Mouse Click ....................................................................................................... 142
16. HOW TO CONFIGURE FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETERS ........................... 143
Accessing Block Details .............................................................................................. 143 Function Block Address .............................................................................................. 143 User Assigned Tag Names ......................................................................................... 143 Function Block Parameters ......................................................................................... 143
17. FUNCTION BLOCK DIAGRAMS ...................................................................... 145
Overview..................................................................................................................... 145 Function Block Diagram Rules .................................................................................... 145 Saving A Configuration File......................................................................................... 145
18. UTILITIES WORKSHEET ................................................................................. 147
Overview..................................................................................................................... 147 Controller Utility Functions .......................................................................................... 147 Uploading a File from the Controller............................................................................ 148 Download a File to the Controller ................................................................................ 148 Set Controller Serial Ports........................................................................................... 149 Modbus RTU Master - Advanced Setup ...................................................................... 150 Calibrate Controller ..................................................................................................... 152 Set Controller Mode .................................................................................................... 152 Set Controller Network Parameters............................................................................. 152 Set Controller Time ..................................................................................................... 155 Data Storage Utility ..................................................................................................... 158 Back Up Controller Information ................................................................................... 159 Restore Controller Information .................................................................................... 160 Manually Write Database to Flash............................................................................... 162 Configure Modbus/Peer Write Access......................................................................... 163 Password Configuration .............................................................................................. 166 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 168 Calibrate Modules ....................................................................................................... 169 PPO Block Calibration................................................................................................. 171
19. SET POINT PROGRAMMING........................................................................... 175
Terms and Definitions ................................................................................................. 175 What is a Setpoint Program? ...................................................................................... 177 Setpoint Program Configuration Overview .................................................................. 177
20. SETPOINT SCHEDULERS ............................................................................... 178
Setpoint Scheduler Overview ...................................................................................... 178 Setpoint Schedule Overview ....................................................................................... 178
21. SEQUENCERS ................................................................................................. 180
What is Sequence Control?......................................................................................... 180 Sequence Configuration Overview .............................................................................. 180
x
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
22. RECIPES .......................................................................................................... 181
Recipe Overview......................................................................................................... 181 Recipes Menu ............................................................................................................. 182
23. RECIPE (VARIABLES) ..................................................................................... 183
Introduction ................................................................................................................. 183 Recipe (Variables) Configuration ................................................................................ 183 Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles ............................................................. 184 Create/Edit Recipe (Variables) File ............................................................................. 185 Recipe Pool ................................................................................................................ 186 Setup/Edit a Recipe in Pool......................................................................................... 187 Recipe Properties ....................................................................................................... 187
24. SETPOINT PROFILES...................................................................................... 188
Create/Edit Setpoint Profile File .................................................................................. 188 Setpoint Profile Properties .......................................................................................... 190
25. SETPOINT SCHEDULES ................................................................................. 192
Create/Edit Setpoint Schedule file............................................................................... 192 Setpoint Schedule Pool............................................................................................... 193 Setup/Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool .......................................................................... 194 Setpoint Schedule Properties...................................................................................... 196
26. SEQUENCES.................................................................................................... 197
Create/Edit Sequence File .......................................................................................... 197 Sequence Pool............................................................................................................ 199 Setup/Edit Sequence in Pool....................................................................................... 199 Sequence Properties................................................................................................... 201
27. ON-LINE MONITORING ................................................................................... 203
Overview..................................................................................................................... 203 Enter Monitor Mode .................................................................................................... 204 Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode .............................................................................. 205 Monitor Update Rate ................................................................................................... 206 Monitor Toolbar........................................................................................................... 206 How Do I Start Monitoring ........................................................................................... 208 Right Click Procedure in Monitor Mode ....................................................................... 209 Function Block Monitor Window .................................................................................. 210 Forcing/Unforcing an Output ....................................................................................... 211 Forced Blocks Window................................................................................................ 213 How Do I Stop Monitoring ........................................................................................... 216 Logic Flow................................................................................................................... 216
28. WATCH SUMMARY WINDOW ......................................................................... 223
Overview..................................................................................................................... 223 Find Feature ............................................................................................................... 225 Sort Function .............................................................................................................. 225 Watch Summary - User Defined.................................................................................. 225 Watch Summary - Signals........................................................................................... 227 Watch Summary - Variables........................................................................................ 229 Watch Summary - Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................... 230
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
xi
November 2019
Watch Summary - Display Groups .............................................................................. 231
29. DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................................. 232
Controller Diagnostics ................................................................................................. 232 Controller Diagnostics Status Indications .................................................................... 234 Rack Diagnostics ........................................................................................................ 240 Rack Diagnostics: Power Supply ................................................................................ 243 I/O Module Diagnostics Status Indications .................................................................. 244 I/O Channel/Sensor Status ......................................................................................... 246 Controller Ports Diagnostics........................................................................................ 249 Modbus Master (Serial) Port Diagnostics .................................................................... 262 Modbus Initiator (TCP) Port Diagnostics ..................................................................... 265
30. REPORTS ......................................................................................................... 267
Print Report................................................................................................................. 267 Print Report Preview ................................................................................................... 274 Export Report.............................................................................................................. 275
31. MODBUS REGISTER ADDRESSES ................................................................ 277
Modbus Map Overview ............................................................................................... 277 Configure Modbus Map Method .................................................................................. 277 Modbus addressability of principal function blocks ...................................................... 279 Fixed Modbus Map ..................................................................................................... 280 Custom Modbus Map .................................................................................................. 283 Adding function block parameters to custom map ....................................................... 288 Adding system parameters to custom map ................................................................. 291
32. REDUNDANCY................................................................................................. 292
Redundancy System Status Indicators........................................................................ 292 Redundancy Link Status Indicators ............................................................................. 293 Lead CPU Status Indicators ........................................................................................ 294 Reserve CPU Status Indicators................................................................................... 297 Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators................................................................................. 298
33. VERSION CONTROL........................................................................................ 300
General Guidelines ..................................................................................................... 301 Manage Repository ..................................................................................................... 302 Checkin operations ..................................................................................................... 304 Version Control Explorer ............................................................................................. 305 Version History............................................................................................................ 307
34. COMPARE FUNCTIONALITY .......................................................................... 308
Compare Settings ....................................................................................................... 308 Compare Two Revisions ............................................................................................. 309 Compare with Controller ............................................................................................. 309 Compare with File Selection........................................................................................ 309 Report Summary......................................................................................................... 310
INDEX......................................................................................................................... 313
xii
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Software Introduction and Overview Introduction
1. Software Introduction and Overview
Introduction
The Controller and Operator Interface configurations are performed using ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer software on a PC operating with Windows.
Easy-to-use WindowsTM-based software, operable over Ethernet or via an USB to RS 485 adapter or modem connection, simplifies controller and operator interface configuration. It provides advanced monitoring functions for debug, uploads the complete, annotated graphic controller and operator interface configuration, and supplies an array of printouts for enhanced documentation.
In some instances, an On-line configuration download capability allows configuration changes such as block additions or block substitutions to be made without switching the controller to program mode, avoiding initialization.
Once a configuration is installed into the controller and operator interface, the software may be used to develop or change recipes, edit data storage schedules, monitor areas of the configuration to verify proper operation, or perform calibration functions.
Features
· Graphic drag and drop, soft-wire configuration · Supports on-line configuration changes · Configuration upload that includes graphic configuration to recreate the function block diagram
and OI assignments · Configures Controller and Operator Interface in an integrated environment · Configures View OI data storage, e-mail alarms · Configures recipes (Variables only), SP profiles, SP schedules, and sequences with on-line
operation, provides easy file generation for media transfer to ControlEdge HC900 OI's locally and file management. · Configuration partitioning using "Worksheets" · Monitoring tools including watch windows, concurrent detailed block parameter windows, digital/logic power flow via color coding, live data at block pins, and a signal traceback facility · Use Ethernet or RS-485 to access controller
Note: In the new HCD (6.6 and greater), there will be a difference in number of non ASCII characters supported in the Name and Description fields (like tag name, tag description). The field length remain same as previous HCD versions but each non ASCII character takes more than a byte to store where as ASCII character takes only 1 byte.
Worksheets
Worksheets are a logical partition of a configuration and selected by tabs that appear on the Main Window. A configuration is built using four main elements (or Worksheets) of configuration.
The user-friendly graphic development environment allows partitioning of the control strategy into "worksheets". This allows the configuration to be organized according to process function, allows faster configuration access, and improves documentation.
The configuration originator may apply additional security to specific worksheets to prohibit access to proprietary operations while allowing other users to modify unprotected worksheets or generate recipe and data storage files.
Blocks are simply selected from a categorized list, dropped on a selected worksheet page, and softwired to other blocks directly or via tag references. Editing tools such as box copy and paste speed development.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
1
November 2019
Software Introduction and Overview Features
With Controller Rev 6.0 and higher, there is also the concept of "Safety" function-block-diagram worksheets (vs. the regular "Process" function-block-diagram worksheets) for controllers that support it. The Safety worksheets allow definition of "Safety-enabled" configurations to run on SIL-compliant controller models. Within Safety worksheets, certain restrictions at both configuration and run-time are enforced to ensure safety compliance is achieved (See below section on Function Block Configuration development). Note that a reference to a "Safety block" refers to a function block that is placed on a Safety worksheet.
Monitoring
On-line monitoring tools allow quick analysis of execution problems. These include: · Multiple function blocks monitor access on a single display from multiple worksheets. Most internal parameters are available for read/write plus block outputs may be forced including I/O and logic blocks. Major blocks such as PID, Setpoint Programmer and Sequencers have dialog boxes to allow operation and test. Stored profiles or sequences may also be selected on-line. · User-selected Watch Window lists allow access to digital and analog I/O, Signal Tags, Variables (for write actions), and custom display data groups by tab selection. A user-defined watch window provides custom association of parameters for a debug session. Watch windows also allow write (or force) capability. · Logic power flow indication using color-coded soft wiring for digital connections to and between block pins including signal tags and connectors · Live data at block pins (analog floating point or digital status) on a complete block or pin basis. · Signal Trace-back, for any input to a block, for finding the signal sources for quick identification of potential errors. · A Forced Blocks window shows all forced outputs and allows release of force conditions individually. · Data update selection as fast as 250 ms. · Retention of monitoring setup when moving back and forth between editing and monitoring modes.
The user-selected, dockable Watch Window lists and Signal Trace-back finds the signal sources and provides a clear view of the configuration operation allowing quick identification of potential faults.
Read/write interaction is provided for most blocks including PID, Setpoint Programmer and Sequencers.
A FIND function allows location of multiple instances of specific tags, variables, and function blocks across all worksheets. A right click on any signal tag also allows selection of a "Find Where Used" listing for fast access to tag destinations and return to the tag source.
Configuration Download
Configuration download capability (Hot Start) allows configuration changes such as block additions or block substitutions to be made, with restrictions, without switching the controller to program mode, avoiding initialization (Cold Start). Corrections or additions are executed shortly after download within 3 normal scan cycles. For scan information, refer to the ControlEdge HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide.
Note: Controller may lose configuration if it is powered off within 5min and do not have good battery as it will take 5min time to save new configuration into flash
Operator Interface Configuration (for Legacy 559/1042 OI)
Configuration of the Operator Interface is an integral part of the controller configuration. Controllers that have been configured with Operator interface data provide the necessary display format data. This unique attribute guarantees compatibility of the controller and user interface databases and greatly simplifies product maintenance.
Designer configuration software uses the database of the function block control strategy to develop operating displays for the Operator Interface. A large selection of display templates is provided that may be assigned quickly and easily to the Operator Interface.
2
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Software Introduction and Overview Features
Additional Software Functions
In addition to creating displays and defining display access, Designer software allows users to set up data archiving schedules, develop recipes, create alarm grouping, establish operator security and define a number of other operator interface attributes.
Documenting your configuration is supported through a variety printable presentation formats. A few of these include a summary of the controller I/O, the graphic configuration diagram, function block properties, recipe groups, setpoint profile groups, Operator Interface display and point selections, among others.
Recipe/Data Storage File Generation
Recipes and data schedules may be defined within the configuration and/or created as files (via File New) for external file transfer to ControlEdge HC900 operator interfaces or for file management.
Reports
Documenting your configuration is supported through a variety of report formats. Each can be printpreviewed. A few of these include a summary of the controller I/O used, function block worksheet selection (each page of diagram worksheet printed as 8.5 x 11" sheet), function block properties, variable and tag parameters, Modbus addresses, Data Storage Settings, recipe listings, setpoint profile listings, sequencer listings, setpoint scheduler listings, OI display groups, Alarm and Event Groups, and controller setup.
Function Block Configuration development
Function Block configuration development is performed using "Drag and Drop " techniques for positioning graphic icons on a FBD Worksheet from a list of available functions. Once dragged and dropped from the Item list onto any FBD worksheet, you can double-click on a block and open a Properties page in which you can configure the specific parameters of that block.
Signal flow connections from icon to icon form the flow of the control strategy by using either softwire connections or named tags to complete the controller configuration.
Depending on controller model, you can create up to 20/40 graphic diagrams, 1 page high by 20 pages wide. The completed diagram may be printed on pages of 8.5" x 11" paper.
With Controller Rev 6.0 and higher, there is also the concept of "Safety" worksheets (vs. the regular "Process" worksheets) for controllers that support it. The Safety worksheets allow definition of "Safetyenabled" configurations to run on SIL-compliant controller models. On a Safety worksheet, certain restrictions related to safety may be active:
-
Only the function block types that are supported by the SIL-compliant controllers may be placed
on Safety worksheets. Others will be grayed out in the Toolbox when a Safety worksheet is active.
-
There will be strict data-flow restrictions. Generally, the restriction is that data can flow from
items on a Safety worksheet to items on Process worksheet, but not vice-versa. This means that
setting up data-flows using Connectors, Page-Connectors, and Signals will be restricted to allow only
one-way data flows.
-
For some function block types, their functionality will become restricted to adhere to the above
mentioned data-flow rule. An example is the Write Constant block, which, if placed on a Process
worksheet, will not be allowed to be configured to write to a block on a Safety worksheet.
-
The data flow restrictions will not only be applied at configuration time, but will be applied at run-
time as well (in the controller). For example, SIL-compliant controllers will not allow other controllers to
write into blocks in the Safety worksheets using the Peer Data function blocks.
Note: During configuration development, if Chinese/Mandarin characters used for name, description or any fields in configuration they will not be displayed correctly in CS900 and Historian tool as they will not support Chinese text.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
3
November 2019
Software Introduction and Overview Features
This page has been intentionally left blank
4
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Hardware and Software requirements What to Know Before You Start
2. Hardware and Software requirements
Please refer to Designer Specification manual "51-52-03-43"
What to Know Before You Start
Rack, Module, and Channel Assignments
The controller contains one or more racks. Each rack may contain one or more I/O modules of various types and each I/O module contains a number of channels. Each rack, module and channel is assigned a number in the configuration that corresponds to a physical location in the installed racks.
Before starting, determine the I/O content of the controller racks. Although configurations can be constructed using default I/O locations, the recommended configuration approach is to first verify that the proper I/O is available to execute the desired configuration, and to record the location of each I/O Rack, Module, and Channel so that they may be properly entered during configuration file development.
Please note that expansion racks ARE NOT permitted on the ControlEdge HC900-C30 controller.
To allow for and facilitate future expansions and modifications, it is usually a good idea to leave some I/O module slots vacant in each rack, since in software configuration of the I/O, the identification of each I/O point depends on the physical position of the I/O hardware (Rack #, Module #, and Channel #). If all module slots in a rack are full, addition of one I/O module to a given rack could require hardware and software modifications for one or more other I/O Racks in the system.
The function blocks that deal with reading input channels and/or writing to output channels are categorized as I/O Function Blocks (with the exception of the Three-Position Step Control block which is considered a Loop Function Block). These function blocks all have one or more I/O address properties that must be configured through the block's properties dialog. The rack, module and channel numbers assigned to the block's I/O address properties are displayed on the block's graphic as a series of 3 two-digit numbers separated by decimals, as shown below.
In the above diagram, the AI148 Analog Input function block has a single input channel configured as: Rack 01 Module 03 Channel 04
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
5
November 2019
Hardware and Software requirements Rack, Module, and Channel Assignments
The PPO150 Position Proportional Output function block has 1 analog input and 2 digital output channels configured as:
Feedback
Forward Relay
Reverse Relay
Rack 01 Module 04 Channel 12
Rack 01 Module 02 Channel 05
Rack 01 Module 02 Channel 06
6
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Implementation Starting the Application
3. Implementation
Starting the Application
When the application is started, the only viewable parts are the File Browser and the Worksheet Toolbox. Go to the Main Toolbar or the File Menu and select:
or NEW - Displays a "Choose a New File Type" dialog box with three tabs. New Configuration: Select the "Configuration" tab. From the drop-down menus, select Controller and Revision. Click OK and a new Designer Configuration file is listed in the File Browser and a new diagram is placed in the Main Window area. New Recipes: Select the "Recipe" tab. On the tab, click on a radio button to select one of the following: Recipes (Variables) Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence Click OK. The associated "Editor" dialog box will appear and a new "Opened Recipe File" is listed in the File Browser. Refer to the specific Recipe type for specifics. New Data Storage (Legacy feature for 559/1042 OI): Select the "Data Storage" tab. On the tab, click on a radio button to create a new Data Storage File or
or OPEN - Displays the "Open" dialog box. From the "Files of Type" drop-down menu, select a file type.
Navigate to folder where the file is stored. Click on the desired file name, then click "OPEN". or
or Upload (Configuration) - The Upload File dialog box will appear. A temporary file name will be place in the "File Name" box. Check the current connection. This will indicate over which communications port the upload will occur. Change the current connection, if necessary, prior to beginning the upload. Press "START". The dialog box will show "Percent Complete". The Uploaded Configuration File (.cde) will appear with a temporary file name. From the "File" menu, select Save or Save As and enter a file name and path in the appropriate fields.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
7
November 2019
Implementation Connecting the PC to the Controller
Connecting the PC to the Controller
The PC can be connected to the Controller by: Direct Serial connection Modem connection via Remote Access. Direct Ethernet connection Networked Ethernet connection
For details refer to the ControlEdge HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide, document 51-52-25154, section "Connecting the ControlEdge HC900 Controller to a PC with the Designer Software."
8
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
4. User Interface
User Interface Overview
The main components of the User Interface are: Main Menu
Main Toolbar Worksheet Window(s) File Browser Worksheet Toolbox Window Status Bar
User Interface User Interface Overview
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
9
November 2019
General Terminology
User Interface General Terminology
Term Browser Configuration Files Recipe File Data Storage File Function Blocks
Main Window Menu
Status Bar
Tab
Toolbox
Trace Window Watch Summary Window
Definition
Defaults to the top left side of the Worksheet is a dockable window listing opened files. It allows you to move quickly between files and worksheets.
A Configuration File contains a Control Strategy that you have created best suited for your application. All Open Configuration Files appear in the Browser Window
A Recipe File refers to one of 4 types of user files a "Recipe" file consisting of Variables only, a Setpoint Profile, a Setpoint Schedule, or a Sequence.
A Data Storage File contains a data storage schedule for loading at the operator interface via storage media.
A Function Block is a unit of software that performs a set of operations on its Input Signals and Function Block parameters and produces Output Signals. These output signals can be configured as inputs to other blocks, whose output parameters can be configured as inputs to other function blocks, and so on.
The Main Window contains Menus, toolbars and worksheet window plus other items that help you navigate through the application.
The Main Menu is a top-level menu for this application. You select (highlight) a menu and then choose a command from the drop-down menu. Choosing the command carries out the action.
The status bar is located along the bottom of the window. It indicates information about the current window, the time, the date, download, upload, monitoring and network information. This status bar can be displayed or not displayed from the "View" menu.
A configuration is built using three main worksheet types: Controller, Display, and Function Blocks. Select the desired tab, located at the bottom of the configuration window for type of worksheet. There are also Tabs in the Function Block Diagrams that allow you to navigate around the multiple FBD Worksheets.
The Worksheet Toolbox, located on the lower left side of the Worksheet, is a dockable window and lists all the function block by category separated by fast and normal scan tabs at the base of the toolbox. You can drag and drop function blocks onto FBD worksheets. A Configuration Tab lists all configured items. Click on any item to jump to it.
Helps you find problems with soft-wire and signal connections between Function Blocks.
The Watch Summary window lets you monitor the following groups of data from the controller: Signal, Variables, I/O. OI Display Groups.
Worksheet
A Worksheet is a logical partition of a configuration. A configuration is built using three main Worksheet) types: Controller, Display (for Legacy 559/1042 I/O configuration), and Function Blocks. A fourth worksheet type (Utilities) included Maintenance functions for the controller. A fifth worksheet is visible when user configures Custom Modbus Map.
10
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface File Browser Window
File Browser Window
The File Browser Window is a dockable window listing open Configuration Files, Recipe Files, Data Storage Files and Backup Files, as show below. It allows you to move quickly between open files and individual worksheets within configuration files. You can collapse or expand the tree branches and you can enlarge or shrink the size of the window.
· Right-click on any open file name to make it the active document in the Worksheet Window.
· Right-click on any open file and select Close File from the con menu to close it.
· Right-click on a Configuration or Backup file name and select Properties from the context menu to view the file properties.
· Expand the branches under any Configuration or Backup file name to display the currently configured worksheets. A red lock displayed in the worksheet icon indicates that the worksheet is write-protected.
· Double-click on a worksheet in the browser to make it the active view in the Worksheet Window.
· Right-click on a worksheet to view its context menu. The options available on the context menu will depend on the type of worksheet and the current protection status but may include:
o Worksheet Properties o Unlock Worksheets o Print Worksheet o Append New Worksheet o Delete Worksheet o Reorder Worksheets
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
11
November 2019
User Interface Worksheet Toolbox Window
The File Browser Window can be undocked from its default location to the top-left of the Worksheet Window and moved to another location by dragging and dropping on the bar above the tree view. It can also be hidden or made visible by toggling the state of the File Browser option available from:
· The Main View menu · The Main Toolbar · The worksheet context menu View sub-menu
Worksheet Toolbox Window
The Worksheet Toolbox is a dockable window which provides two main functions: · Categorized library of available function blocks and other items that may be placed on function block worksheets. · Categorized library of all function blocks, variables and signal tags currently in use on all worksheets, providing easy access to properties and navigation to the containing worksheet.
You can collapse or expand the tree and you can enlarge or shrink the size of the window. This toolbox applies to the current active document and the name of the active configuration appears on a button at the top of the window. Click on this button to view the active configuration's file statistics. The Worksheet Toolbox contains a tab control with either 3 or 4 tabs. The first two tabs contain the library of available function blocks grouped by the rate that they will be executed at, either Normal Scan or Fast Scan, as shown below.
12
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface Worksheet Toolbox Window
· Click on a tab to display the function block categories available for that scan rate.
· Expand each category to display the available function blocks. For Safety Enabled SIL-compliant configurations some function blocks are not compatible with Safety Worksheets and will be disabled and grayed-out if the current active worksheet is a Safety Worksheet.
· If the current active worksheet is a Function Block Worksheet, drag and drop any enabled function block to place it on the worksheet.
· Right-click on a function block and select Help from the context menu to display a help file page with the details of that block.
The third and optional fourth tabs contain the library of function blocks currently in use, grouped by the type of function block worksheet, either Process or Safety, as shown below. (The Safety tab will only be available in SIL-compliant configurations.)
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
13
November 2019
User Interface Worksheet Toolbox Window
· Click on a tab to display the function block categories available for that worksheet type.
· Expand each category to display the function blocks used. The blocks will be identified by the Function Block ID and the assigned Block Number rather than function block type. The icon indicates a Normal Scan rate block and the icon indicates a Fast Scan rate block.
· If the configuration is using a Custom Modbus Map, items can be dragged and dropped on to the corresponding Custom Modbus Map configuration dialog.
· Right-click on an item to display its context menu and select from the following options:
o Properties... to open the item's properties dialog
o Block Execution Order... to change the relative execution order of function blocks
o Find to navigate to the item's location on the worksheet
o Help to display a help file page with the details of that item
The Worksheet Toolbox can be undocked from its default location to the bottom-left of the Worksheet Window and moved to another location by dragging and dropping on the bar above the tree view. It can also be hidden or made visible by toggling the state of the Worksheet Toolbox option available from:
· The Main View menu · The Main Toolbar · The worksheet context menu View sub-menu
14
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface Traceback Window
Traceback Window
Overview This feature helps you find problems with soft-wire and signal connections between Function Blocks. For Example: If you are testing a configuration that you've built and want to know why a Digital Output is ON when it should be OFF, you can search for the source of the Input Signal. Traceback is useful for finding the analog or digital source signal. Trace Window
Access the Trace Window from the Main Menu Toolbar Or, from the View Menu on the main menu.
It is a dockable, sizeable window. The Trace Window provides a list of all blocks/pins you have traced and lists :
Block ID Tag Name I/O Pin Name Worksheet name
Trace Window Update Each time you perform a Trace, the window will update with a new pair of block/pins. The first item is the signal source, the second item is the signal destination. Select any of the rows in the Traceback window to recall the diagram to display the selected block. The last trace is on the top of the list.
Right Mouse Click Procedure to Trace Signals Select a Function Block of interest. Right Mouse click on any INPUT pin. Select "TRACE". Traceback will "find" the source of the connection you selected and refresh the FBD
view with that block visible (Highlighted) - even if the other side of the connection is on a different worksheet. The Output pin of the block (the signal source) will be displayed in RED. From that block, repeat the traceback to another block and another block, etc. Use the Traceback list to view your Traceback history. You can clear the Trace List by pressing the bar at the top of the window.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
15
November 2019
Watch Summary Window
Overview
User Interface Watch Summary Window
accesses the Watch Summary Window from the Monitor Toolbar Or, the menu item "Watch Summary" from the Monitor Menu on the main menu. This is a view of the Watch Summary Window. It is a Dockable (movable), sizable window. [Press and hold the CTRL key down to prevent Docking when moving the window]
There are five tabs at the bottom of the window that lets you monitor the following groups of data from the controller. Click on any of the tab titles below to view an example of the selected data for that tab. All parameter listings may be sorted by column.
User Defined (Customized list of Variables, Signal Tags, Page Connectors) Signals (can be filtered by type - All, Analog, Digital) Page Connectors (can be filtered by type - All, Analog, Digital) Variables (can be filtered by type - All, Analog, Digital) I/O (can be filtered by type - AI, AO, DI, DO) OI Display groups (Overviews, Panel Meters, Alarms, Trends, etc)
Docking and Undocking the Window Double clicking in the Title Bar area of the Watch Summary Window will toggle its docked state. If the window is docked, double clicking in the title bar area will undock the window. If the window is Undocked - double-clicking in the title bar area will dock the window at it last docked position - Dragging the window to the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the main viewing area of the application will dock the window at that location [Press and hold the CTRL key down to prevent Docking when moving the window]
Hot Links You can click on any I/O function block or Signal on the Controller Worksheet or any I/O function block, Signal, or Variable in the Watch Window and that item will be located on the Function Block Diagram. As you move the mouse over a HOT LINK, the text changes to Underlined Blue and the cursor
changes to a Hand.
Writes or Forces By clicking on the item in the Value column, you may write a value such as for a Variable or force a value for an analog input or digital input. For I/O, a Forced column will indicate that the I/O point is forced.
16
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface Status Bar
Status Bar
The status bar is located along the bottom of the application's window. It indicates information about the current window. It can be turned on or off in the "View" Menu. Menu Item Description - The text string at the far left on the status bar gives a brief description of the menu item in focus. If you pull down a menu list and position the cursor on a menu item this field will describe the menu item.
Connected Field - To the left of the Page Number indicator are two fields that are visible when you are in Monitor Mode. One indicates "Connected" and the other is a green LED that flashes when communications is active between the PC and controller.
Worksheet Page Number -To the left of the Zoom indicator is a page number field. This will display the page number of the current FBD Worksheet. It is blank for other worksheet types (Display, Controller, and Utilities). There are scroll buttons to navigate through pages of the worksheet.
Zoom Level indicates the level of Zoom active on the worksheet. (i.e. 100%)
Active Keyboard Keys - Toward the far right, you will see indicators to alert the user that the Caps Lock key on the keyboard is active , the NUM lock on the keyboard is active, or the SCRL (Scroll Lock) key is active.
Menu Conventions
The following menu conventions are used. Menu Convention
Meaning
Dimmed command
You will not be able to use this command at the current time. (For example: You may need to select another item before using this command.)
An ellipsis (...) following a command
A dialog box will appear when you choose this command. The dialog box contains options you need to select before the command can be completed.
A check mark next to a command
The command is in effect. When you remove the check mark (by selecting the command), the command is no longer in effect.
A key combination next to a command
The key combination is a keyboard accelerator shortcut for this command. You can use this key combination to choose this command.
A triangle next to a command
When you choose this command, a cascading menu appears, listing additional commands.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
17
November 2019
User Interface Selecting a Menu
Selecting a Menu
In this application, you select (highlight) a menu and then choose a command from that menu. Choosing the command carries out the action. To choose an item from a selected menu: Mouse Using the mouse pointer, point to the name of the menu on the menu bar, and click the left mouse button. This opens the menu. To move directly to a menu item, drag the selection cursor down the menu until the desired item is highlighted, then release the button. UP/Down Arrow Keys Press the "ALT" key to highlight the menu bar then use the UP/Down arrow keys on the keyboard to select the item, and then press "Enter". Underlined Letter If a name in the menu bar has an underlined letter you can press ALT and then type the letter that's underlined to open the menu.
For example: to open the FILE menu in the Designer main window, press ALT+F.
Closing a Menu
To close a menu: Click the menu name or anywhere outside the menu, or Press ESC to close the menu but remain on the menu bar so that you can make another selection
Main Menu
The Main Menu is located across the top of the User Interface. The menus are: File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Monitor Menu Recipes Menu Window Menu Help Menu
18
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Menu
Menu Selection New Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+N
Open ... Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+O
User Interface File Menu
Function
Displays a "Choose a New File Type" dialog box with these tabs: New Configuration: Select the "Configuration" tab. From the drop-down menus, select Controller and Revision. Click OK and a new Configuration file is listed in the File Browser and a new diagram is placed in the Main Window area. New Recipes: Select the "Recipe" tab. On the tab, click on a radio button to select one of the following: Recipes (Variables) Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence Click OK. The associated "Editor" dialog box will appear and a new "Opened Recipe File" is listed in the File Browser. Refer to the specific Recipe type for specifics.
New Data Storage: Select the "Data Storage" tab. On the tab, click on a radio button to create a new Data Storage File
Displays the "Open" dialog box. From the "Files of Type" drop-down menu, select a file type.
Close Save
Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+S Save As ...
Download
Navigate to folder where the file is stored. Click on the desired file name, then click "OPEN". Opens files and converts UMC800 (*.FBD) configuration files. Closes the active document window. It will also close a minimized window if active. [It will not close an active dialog box.] Saves the active configuration. First time save displays the "Save As" dialog box.
Displays the "Save As" dialog box. Prompts user to name the active configuration and select the file in which the file is to be stored. Configuration Download transfers a saved configuration FROM the PC TO the controller. The Controller may be in either RUN or PROGRAM mode.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
19
November 2019
Menu Selection Upload Configuration
Upload...
Back up Controller...
Hang Up Modem Properties ... Write Protect File ... Print Report Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+P Print Report Preview
Export Report Print Setup ... Most Recent Files Exit
User Interface File Menu
Function
Configuration Upload transfers a configuration FROM the controller TO the PC including graphic function block pages, text annotations, stored recipes/profiles/schedules/sequences, OI display assignments, OI data storage setup. The uploaded file name, as a default, will include the controller name, alias name (if assigned) and network name (if assigned).
The Controller may be in ANY mode.
No configuration file is required to be opened prior to the Upload Request
Opens the "Upload" dialog box that lists the type of recipes available to upload. Click on a radio button to select one of the following:
Recipes (Variables) Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence Data Storage. Upload transfers a recipe FROM the controller TO the software.
Saves a controller's active configuration as a backup file with .cbk extension. Similar to saving an uploaded configuration except that the configuration and port settings are saved. You are prompted to specify the comm. link settings for the controller to be backed up. Backup files are read-only; to edit you must first save as .cde. See Back Up Controller Information for more details.
When communicating with a controller via a Modem, select this to disconnect the Modem from the controller.
Displays the "File Properties " dialog box. Tabs allow user to fill in Configuration File properties, read Configuration File Statistics (capacity usage), read protection, and worksheet protection (password access to individual worksheets)
Displays the "Add Write Protection" dialog box. Can enter and confirm a password for the selected file. Use the check box to turn "Write Protect" on or off.
Displays the "Print Report" Dialog box.
Let's you choose reports for printing from 5 different categories: Controllers Function Block Diagrams Displays Recipes Alarms and Events
Let's you choose a report preview (Print Preview) for printing from the 5 categories:
Controllers Function Block Diagrams Displays Recipes Alarms and Events
The selected report is displayed on the screen as it will look when printed.
Let's you export reports as files in comma or tab separated format.
Displays "Print Setup" dialog box. Allows user to select printer, paper type, and orientation.
Lists the most recent files that were open.
Exits the application.
20
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Edit Menu
Menu Selection Undo Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+Z
Redo Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+Y
Cut Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+X Copy Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+C Paste Toolbar: Shortcut: CTRL+V
Paste Special Toolbar:
Shortcut: CTRL+ALT+V
User Interface Edit Menu
Function
Click once to undo the last action. Click on the down arrow to see all previous actions. To undo several actions, move mouse to an earlier action and click on it: all actions from that action forward are undone. If you accidentally undo an action, use redo. You can only undo actions that affect the contents of the configuration; you can't undo actions that affect the display of the configuration (such as zoom).
Click once to redo the last Undone action. Click on the down arrow to see all Undone actions. To redo several actions, move mouse to earliest desired action and click on it: all actions from that action forward are redone. If you accidentally redo an action, use undo. You can redo only actions that affect the contents of the configuration; you can't redo actions that affect the display of the configuration (such as zoom).
Moves the currently selected Process or Safety block diagram items from the current diagram and places them on the clipboard. Indicated by a red dotted line. Upon pasting the items, all links to them (e.g., display references, Modbus address, recipes) are preserved as if they were moved; they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy. The only exception to this is if the item is pasted into a diagram on a different configuration.
Copies the currently selected Process or Safety block diagram items from the current diagram, and place it on the clipboard. Indicated by a blue dotted line.
Places the contents of the clipboard containing Process or Safety block diagram items onto the Process or Safety block diagram at the location determined by the blinking insertion point caret. This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty. Cut and pasted items maintain their links (e.g., display references, Modbus addresses, recipes); they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy. The only exception to this is if the item is pasted into a diagram on a different configuration. If you paste a cut (not copied) function block and soft wires to the same or different worksheet in the same configuration, the soft wires will be dangling (unconnected) and you are asked to specify how you want to resolve dangling soft wires. (See "Resolve Dangling Soft Wires" section in the HCD help file).
Places the content of the clipboard containing Process or Safety block diagram items onto the Process or Safety block diagram as the Paste option. This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty. Cut and pasted items maintain their links (e.g., display references, Modbus addresses, recipes); they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy. The only exception to this is if the item is pasted into a diagram on a different configuration. If you paste a cut (not copied) function block and soft wires to the same or different worksheet in the same configuration, the soft wires will be dangling (unconnected) and you are asked to specify how you want to resolve dangling soft wires. (See section "Resolve Dangling Soft Wires" in the HCD help file). While pasting the items, the Change Item Name window appears if the tags contain names. NOTE: The paste special functionality does not inherit the properties such as channel numbers and signal tags.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
21
November 2019
User Interface Edit Menu
Delete
Deletes the currently selected item on the function block diagram.
Append Process Worksheet / Append Safety Worksheet
Adds a new Process or Safety block diagram. You will see "Append Process Worksheet" or "Append Safety Worksheet" depending on which tab is currently active. If the Controller or Utilities tab is currently active, this command will be grayed out. If selected when enabled, a new worksheet will be created and a new sub-tab for it will appear at the bottom of the diagram window. The new diagram reference will be placed in the File Browser. Click on the diagram name in the File Browser to edit the name.
Delete Process Worksheet / Deletes the selected Function Block Diagram and its reference in the File
Delete Safety Worksheet
Browser.
Reorder Process Worksheets... / Reorder Safety Worksheets...
Opens the Worksheet order dialog box. Allows you to change the order of the worksheets as they appear at the bottom of the Worksheet area. Click on worksheet name and use the increment-decrement buttons at the top of the dialog box to change the worksheet order.
Worksheet Properties...
Opens the "Worksheet Properties" dialog box. Allows you to enter or edit the Title and Description of the worksheet. Type in a title (24 characters) and description (32 characters) for your Worksheet -.
Unlock Worksheets
Displays "Unlock Worksheets" dialog box. Enter password to unlock all protected worksheets. Click on "Unlock".
Block and Tag Order
Opens the "Execution Order" dialog box to let you re-arrange block execution order. Also available from the Process or Safety worksheet toolbar.
Select "Tag Order" to re-arrange the tags order for: Alternator Operates Device Controls HOA Switches Loops Ramp Operates Sequencers SP Programmers SP Schedulers Stage Operates
Loop Mode Priority
Opens the "Loop Mode Priority" dialog box. Let's you select which has priority: Manual Mode or Tracking Mode.
Alarms
Opens the "Alarm Group Configuration" dialog box. See section "Alarm Group Configuration" in the help manual. Also available from the Process or Safety worksheet toolbar.
Events
Opens the "Configure Event List" dialog box. See section "Event List Configuration" in the help manual. Also available from the Process or Safety worksheet toolbar.
Configure Modbus Map Type Available for configuration revision 4.0 or higher. Selects a method for configuring the Modbus register map: fixed or custom. See section "Configure Modbus Map Method" in the help manual.
Modbus Register Map...
Available for configuration revision 2.0 or higher. See section "Fixed Modbus Map" in the help manual.
Trend Backfill Log Point Selection
Available for configuration revision 4.4 or higher. Let's you select method for configuring points to be saved in the trend history buffer either via signal tag name or Modbus address.
22
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface View Menu
Defragment Function Block List
Find Shortcut: CTRL+F
Go To Shortcut: CTRL+G Select All Shortcut: CTRL+A
Frees up memory occupied by previously deleted function blocks. After defragmentation is complete, downloading the configuration to the controller requires a cold start. When configuration memory is 100% full but includes fragmented space from deleted blocks, the defragment window appears automatically. To avoid untimely cold starts, we recommended you defragment before configuration memory is full. (See section "File Properties" in the help manual)
Searches for an item on the "Find Item" dialog box. Select an item type from the "Show" drop-down menu to search, then select an Item from the "Item" drop down menu. The Tag, Variable, or Function Block will be highlighted on the Function Block Diagram.
Displays the "Enter Page Number" dialog box and allows you to enter the page number to which you want to go (1-20).
Selects all items present in the worksheet.
View Menu
Menu Selection Toolbar Status Bar File Browser Worksheet Toolbox
Trace Window Localization Phone Book Network Device List PC Serial Port Setup Grid Zoom Out
Zoom In
Function
Displays or hides the toolbar in the top of the Main window. Gray box with mark indicates display.
Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the Main window. Gray box with mark indicates display.
Displays or hides the File Browser at the top left of the Main window. Gray box with icon indicates display.
Displays or hides the Worksheet Toolbox at the bottom left of the Main window. Gray box with icon indicates display. Tabs separate fast scan and normal scan function block types.
Allows you to view the Traceback list.
Allows to select any one of supported language for HCD
Opens the "Select the Number to Call" dialog box. Let you add and delete phone number on the list.
Let you setup a PC Network Port for interface to a specific controller. See PC Network Port Set Up.
Let you setup up to 8 PC Serial Comm ports for interface to a specific controller. See PC Serial Com Port Setup.
Displays or hides a Grid on the FBD Worksheet
Let you Zoom in out to see more of a document. Zoom levels of 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, and 150%. Also available from FBD worksheet toolbar.
Let you zoom in to return items to normal size. Zoom levels of 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, and 150%. Also available from FBD worksheet toolbar.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
23
November 2019
User Interface Options Menu
Options Menu
Menu Selection
Function
Options
Options are: Warning Level Allows enable/disable of Open Input and Unassigned I/O warnings. Click on Box to select. Default Annotation Attributes Allows the setting of default font characteristics for Text Annotations. Export Delimiter Allows setting of export report's default format (comma delimited or tab delimited). Auto Save Allows saving cde files automatically at regular intervals. See Auto Save Functionality. Improve PCD Performance (Disables Undo and Redo) Disables the undo and redo functionality for improving the performance. By default, the undo and redo is available to the user. The status is displayed in the status bar.
Monitor Menu
Menu Selection
Function
Monitor Mode
Enters or exits monitor mode. While in monitor mode, edits to the configuration cannot be made. If entering monitor mode, selecting this menu item opens the "Enter Monitor Mode" dialog box.
Monitor Toolbar
The Monitor Toolbar toggles each monitor window listed below:
Set Update Rate
You can specify the monitor update rate that determines how often data is collected from the controller during monitoring.
Set Logic State Colors
You can select a color scheme for indicating the on/off status of digital wires, digital signal tags, page connectors, and logic inversion.
Watch Summary Window
Toggles the Watch Summary Window that lets you view groups of related data such as I/O and Signal Tags.
Controller Diagnostics
Toggles the Controller Diagnostics Window that lets you view the controller parameters and values.
Rack Diagnostics
Toggles the Rack Diagnostics window that lets you view the Rack Diagnostics, Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics (except C30 CPU) and the I/O Module parameters and indicators.
Controller Ports Diagnostics
Toggles the Configuration Port Diagnostics window that lets you view the Configuration Port parameters and values.
Serial Port S1 Serial Port S2 Network Port Expansion I/O Comm (except C30 CPU) Host Connections Peer to Peer Connections
Modbus Master Ports Diagnostics
Displays Modbus ports diagnostics.
Modbus Master (Serial) Port Diagnostics Modbus/TCP Initiator Port Diagnostics
Monitor Function Block Shortcut: CTRL+M
Toggles the Function Block Monitor Windows that lets you monitor all the parameters of the selected Function Block.
24
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface Recipes Menu
Menu Selection Forced Blocks
All Function Block Windows All Pins
All Monitor Windows Redundancy...
Function Toggles the Forced Block Summary Window that lets you see all the outputs that are being forced and permits release of the force condition for a selected output. Allows you toggle the function block windows that are open - On/Off.
Let you toggle monitoring values (numeric or On/Off state) at any input or output pin Display or Hide. Allows you toggle the Monitor windows that are open - On/Off.
Accesses Redundancy diagnostics. Redundancy System Redundancy Link Lead CPU Reserve CPU Scanner 2 Link
Recipes Menu
Accesses all recipe pools. To learn about the different recipe types read Recipe Overview.
Menu Selection Allocate Recipe Memory
Recipes (Variables)...
Setpoint Profiles...
Setpoint Schedules...
Sequences...
Function
Allocates the controller's memory for the four recipe types. This is the number of recipes that can be stored in the controller's four recipe pools. Recipes in these pools can be loaded and run by Recipe Selection Blocks, Programmers, Schedulers, and Sequencers. As recipe memory usage increases, less memory is available for other parts of your configuration (such as function blocks).
A recipe (variables) is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingredients needed to make a product or run a particular batch. This selection opens the Recipe Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Recipe details. You can save the selected recipe item to a file; open a recipe file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected recipe item to a controller's recipe pool.
Setpoint Program (Profile) configuration provides a quick and easy way to create, edit, and save different ramp/soak (setpoint) profiles for the Setpoint Programmer (SPP) control blocks in the configuration. This selection opens the Setpoint Profile Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Setpoint Profile details. You can save the selected SPP item to a file; open a SPP file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected SPP item to a controller's Setpoint Profiles pool.
Setpoint Schedule configuration provides a quick and easy way to create, edit, and save different Setpoint Schedules for the Setpoint Scheduler (SPS) control blocks in the configuration. This selection opens the Setpoint Schedule Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Setpoint Schedules details. You can save the selected SPS item to a file; open a SPS file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected SPS item to a controller's Setpoint Schedule pool.
Sequence configuration provides a series of inter-related events used to start-up or shutdown a unit process, or a series of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to produce a final product. This selection opens the Sequence Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Sequence details. You can save the selected SEQ item to a file; open a SEQ file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected SEQ item to a controller's Sequence pool.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
25
November 2019
Window Menu
Menu Selection Cascade
Tile Horizontally
Tile Vertically
Arrange All
(Open window designations)
User Interface Window Menu
Function Arranges windows so that they overlap making it easy to select a window.
Arranges windows side by side. Each window is visible and none overlap.
Arranges windows over and under each other. Each window is visible and none overlap. Arranges configuration Icons when configurations are minimized.
Lists all Function Block Diagrams, recipes, and data storage files that are open and checks the one that is active. Click any file to display it.
Help Menu
MENU SELECTIONS Help Topics Calls up the top level Helps Contents page. Selecting a Topic displays information about that topic. If the information about a topic exceeds the height of the window, a vertical scrollbar will be displayed. Selecting the Index tab lets you type in the first few letters of the word you are looking for. Selecting the Find tab lets you search for specific words and phrases in Help topics, instead of searching for information by category. About Help Displays copyright and software version, and user name and company name entered during software's installation.
ADDITIONAL HELP ACCESS Right-click Help for Help Topics Right-click on any Function Block to access topic help for that particular Block Hotspots When the cursor is over a hotspot area on an image, it turns to a hand indicating that when clicked some sort of action occurs.
Note: In Mandarin Help Topic, Index, and Find contents are in English only.
26
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface Main Toolbar Functions
Main Toolbar Functions
Click on ICON to open a dialog box.
ICON
Function
Dialog Box Comments
New Open
Displays a "Choose a New File Type" dialog box with these tabs.
New Configuration: Select the "Configuration" tab. From the drop-down menus, select Controller and Revision. Click OK and a new Designer Configuration file is listed in the Designer Browser and a new diagram is placed in the Main Window area.
New Recipes: Select the "Recipe" tab. On the tab, click on a radio button to select one of the following: Recipes (Variables) Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence
Click OK. The associated "Editor" dialog box will appear and a new "Opened Recipe File" is listed in the File Browser. Refer to the specific Recipe type for specifics.
New Data Storage: Select the "Data Storage" tab. On the tab, click on a radio button to create a new Data Storage File
Displays the "Open" dialog box. From the "Files of Type" drop-down menu, select a file type.
Save Cut
Copy Paste
Revision 25 November 2019
Navigate to folder where the file is stored. Click on the desired file name, then click "OPEN". Opens files and converts UMC800 (*.FBD) configuration files.
Saves the active configuration. First time save displays the "Save As" dialog box.
Moves the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places them on the clipboard. Indicated by a red dotted line. Upon pasting the items, all links to them (e.g., display references, Modbus address, recipes) are preserved as if they were moved, they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy.
Copies the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places it on the clipboard. Indicated by a blue dotted line.
Places the contents of the clipboard containing FBD diagram items onto the Function Block Diagram at the location determined by the blinking insertion point caret. This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty. Cut and pasted items maintain their links (e.g., display references, Modbus addresses,
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
27
ICON
Function Undo Redo Print
Help Topics
User Interface Main Toolbar Functions
Dialog Box Comments
recipes), they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy.
If you paste a cut function block and soft wires to the same or different worksheet in the same configuration, the soft wires will be dangling (unconnected) and you are asked to specify how you want to resolve dangling soft wires.
Click once to undo the last action. Click on the down arrow to see all previous actions. To undo several actions, move mouse to an earlier action and click on it: all actions from that action forward are undone. If you accidentally undo an action, use redo.
You can undo only actions that affect the contents of the configuration; you can't undo actions that affect the display of the configuration (such as zoom).
Click once to redo the last Undone action. Click on the down arrow to see all Undone actions. To redo several actions, move mouse to earliest desired action and click on it: all actions from that action forward are redone. If you accidentally redo an action, use undo.
You can redo only actions that affect the contents of the configuration; you can't redo actions that affect the display of the configuration (such as zoom).
Displays the "Print Report" Dialog box.
Let's you choose reports for printing from 5 different categories: Controllers Function Block Diagrams Displays Recipes Alarms and Events
Opens Help Topics Table of Contents and Help information screen.
Worksheet Toolbox
Displays or hides the Worksheet Toolbox Window.
File Browser Traceback Window
Monitor Mode
Download
Upload
Displays or hides the File Browser Window.
Displays or hides the Traceback Window.
Enters/Exits Monitor Mode and allows On-line Monitoring and Diagnostics. When pressed, the active configuration is in the Monitor mode (and cannot be edited). When not pressed, the active configuration is in the edit mode. Opens the "Download File" dialog box. Press start to Download file selected to the controller.
Opens the "Upload File" dialog box. Press start to Upload file selected from the controller.
28
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
User Interface Navigational Tools
Navigational Tools
Navigational Tools available: Main Menus and Main Window Toolbar File Browser Window Worksheet Category Tabs Worksheet Toolbars (Controller, Display, Function Block Diagram, Utilities) Find / Go To Function Block Help (right mouse click on block) Connection Traceback Window Finding an Item on the FBD Worksheet Hot Links Keyboard Navigation
Right Mouse Click
Shown below are the right-click menus. See also Right Click In Monitor Mode.
Right Click on Function Block Object (not pins) Help - Calls up Topic Help for Function Block selected Execution Order Cut Copy Paste Paste Special Delete Edit Modbus Register Address Properties
Right Click on Unconnected Function Block pins* Signal Tag Page Connector Analog Variable Digital Variable Numeric Constant Connector Paste Reconnects a signal tag or page connector that you cut from another pin. *When you drop one of these items it automatically connects to the pin you right-clicked on.
Right Click on Connected Function Block Input Pins Trace
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
29
November 2019
User Interface Right Mouse Click
Right Click on Variable Help - Calls up Topic Help for Function Block selected Execution Order Cut Copy Paste Delete Add to Modbus Registers Properties
Right Click on Signal Tag Help calls up help Find Where Used Opens Find dialog box. Let's you locate any and all places where the signal tag is used. Cut -- Cuts the signal tag so you can reconnect (paste) it to a different unconnected pin of the same type (digital or analog). Can reconnect to a different function block. Item is grayed out indicating the cut. Press Esc to cancel. Delete Deletes the signal tag. Add to Modbus Registers Properties
Right Click on Page Connector Help calls up help Find Where Used Opens Find dialog box. Let's you locate any and all places where the page connector is used. Cut --Cuts the page connector so you can reconnect (paste) it to a different unconnected pin of the same type (digital or analog). Can reconnect to a different function block. Item is grayed out indicating the cut. Press Esc to cancel. Delete Deletes the page connector. Add to Modbus Registers Properties
30
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Click on FB Diagram White Space Cut Copy Paste Paste Special Drop Other Items Execution Order Fast Logic Order Find Go To View (displays the view menu) Properties [File]
User Interface Keyboard Navigation
Keyboard Navigation
Press LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW UP ARROW DOWN ARROW END HOME PAGE DOWN PAGE UP
CTRL+LEFT ARROW CTRL+RIGHT ARROW CTRL+UP ARROW CTRL+DOWN ARROW CTRL+PAGE DOWN CTRL+PAGE UP CTRL+A
To Scroll worksheet to the left Scroll worksheet to the right Scroll worksheet up Scroll worksheet down Go to the end of last page Go to the beginning of first page Go to the next worksheet page Go to the previous worksheet page
Go to the end of last page Go to the beginning of first page Go to the top of the page Go to the bottom of the page Go to the next worksheet tab Go to the previous worksheet tab Selects all items
Other keyboard functions If necessary, you can use the standard keystroke conventions to move around. ALT used together with the underlined letter in text labeling an object lets you select that object. TAB select next field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates SHIFT+TAB select previous field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates UP ARROW previous choice in the field DOWN ARROW next choice in the field ALT+DOWN ARROW opens a drop-down list box
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
31
November 2019
User Interface Keyboard Navigation
This page has been intentionally left blank
32
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
5. File Management Opening an Existing File
File Management Opening an Existing File
Select "Open" from the File Menu... or
Displays the "Open" dialog box. Drop-down the "Files of Type' menu and select a file type.
from the Main Toolbar Shortcut: CTRL+O
Navigate to folder where the file is stored. Click on the desired file name, then click "OPEN".
Or
From the "File" menu, select one of the most recently opened
file listed above the "Exit" item.
Creating a New Configuration File
Select "New" from the File Menu then "Configuration" tab from the dialog box
or
Displays a "Choose a New File Type" dialog box. Select the "Configuration" tab. From the drop-down menus, select Controller and Revision.
Click OK and a new Designer Configuration file is listed in the Designer Browser and a New diagram is place in the Main Window area.
from the Main toolbar
Shortcut: CTRL+N
Saving A Configuration File
To Save an Existing File
1. Select "SAVE" from the "FILE" menu or from the Main Toolbar
2. If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0, and there are no I/O blocks with unassigned I/O addresses, then the data is saved automatically, and the rest of the steps may be skipped.
3. If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0, and/or there are I/O blocks with unassigned I/O addresses, the Process Control Designer will notify you of the situation and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs and/or a list of unconfigured I/O blocks.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
33
November 2019
File Management Saving A Configuration File 4. Click "Yes" to view the summary of unconnected inputs or unconfigured I/O blocks. 5. Click "Log File" to save the list to a text file, if desired.
To Save a New File or Save the File as a New Name 1. Select "SAVE AS" from the "FILE" menu. The "Save As" dialog box will open.
2. Type in the new file name in that field.
3. From the drop-down menu in the "Save as Type" field, select the configuration type depending on the controller you have.
4. If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0, and there are no I/O blocks with unassigned I/O addresses, then the data is saved automatically, and the rest of the steps may be skipped.
5. If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0, and/or there are I/O blocks with unassigned I/O addresses, the Process Control Designer will notify you of the situation and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs and/or a list of unconfigured I/O blocks.
6. Click "Yes" to view the summary of unconnected inputs or unconfigured I/O blocks.
7. Click "Log File" to save the list to a text file, if desired.
34
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management Creating Other File Types
To Save a File as a Different Device or Revision (i.e. conversion)
1. Select "SAVE AS" from the "FILE" menu. The "Save As" dialog box will open. 2. Type in the new file name in that field. 3. From the drop-down menu in the "Save as Type" field, select the configuration type and
revision that you wish to convert to. 4. If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0, and there are no I/O blocks
with unassigned I/O addresses, then the data is saved automatically, and the rest of the steps may be skipped. 5. If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0, and/or there are I/O blocks with unassigned I/O addresses, the Process Control Designer will notify you of the situation and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs and/or a list of unconfigured I/O blocks. 6. Click "Yes" to view the summary of unconnected inputs or unconfigured I/O blocks.
7. Click "Log File" to save the list to a text file, if desired.
Note that if you convert a safety-enabled configuration to a non-safety configuration, then all the safety worksheets in the configuration will be converted to process worksheets. Conversely, if you convert a non-safety configuration to a safety-enabled configuration, then a blank safety worksheet will be added to the configuration.
Creating Other File Types
See sections for details. Create/Edit Recipe (Variables) Create/Edit Setpoint Profile Create/Edit Setpoint Schedule Create/Edit Sequence Create/Edit Data Storage Settings Back up Controller Information
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
35
November 2019
File Management Converting ControlEdge HC900 Configurations
Converting ControlEdge HC900 Configurations
You cannot download a configuration saved as one ControlEdge HC900 controller model to a controller of a different model. You must first convert the configuration before doing a download.
Conversion Procedure 1. With the configuration file open, select "SAVE AS" from the "FILE" menu. The "Save As" dialog box will open. 2. From the drop-down menu in the "Save as Type" field, select the type of Controller configuration that you want to convert TO. (See table below.) 3. Select "SAVE". 4. If there is a problem with the conversion from C50 to C30, the "Conversion Error" dialog box will appear indicating what the error is. For example: Too many Loop Blocks, Greater than 400 User Function Blocks, Expansion Rack used in Configuration.
5. If there is no problem, the conversion will proceed. 6. If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0, the data is saved
automatically. 7. If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0, the application
will notify you that there are unconnected inputs and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs. 8. Click "Yes" to view the summary of unconnected inputs. 9. Click "Log File" to save the list to a text file, if desired.
Note: Configuration for model revisions can only be saved as models of same revision or newer revision. Configuration fails cannot be saved as older configuration revisions. Start with an "original configuration" and do a File, Save As, and save the configuration to the newer revision (or different controller type). The new configuration can only be downloaded to a controller of the same type.
* Configuration revision remains the same or is upgraded to a later revision
36
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management Uploading a File from the Controller
Uploading a File from the Controller
Introduction Upload transfers a file FROM the controller TO the PC. Uploadable files are configurations, recipes, and data storage. The Controller may be in ANY mode. No configuration file is required to be opened prior to the Upload Request.
Uploading Configuration 1. From the "File Menu" select Upload Configuration, or click on the Upload icon on the Main
Toolbar
,or click on the Upload icon on the Utilities Worksheet Toolbar
"Upload Configuration".
then select
2. The Upload File dialog box will appear. A temporary file name will be place in the "File Name" box.
3. Under "Current CommLink Settings", select the port and address to communicate to a controller. Reference "Utilities Worksheet in the appropriate fields. " for configuring the PC Ports.
4. Press "START". The dialog box will show "Percent Complete".
5. The Uploaded File will appear with an automatic file name containing the controller name, its local name (or alias), and the network it is on.
6. From the "File" menu, select Save or Save As and enter a file name and path in the appropriate fields.
Uploading Recipe or Data Storage
1. From the "File Menu" select Upload... The Upload File dialog box will appear. A temporary file name will be place in the "File Name" box.
2. Under "Current" CommLink Settings", select the port and address to communicate to a controller. Reference "Utilities WorksheetUtilities_Worksheet_Overview" for configuring the PC Ports.
3. Press "START".
4. Select a file type to upload. If uploading a recipe you'll be asked to choose which recipe in the controller's memory to upload.
5. The dialog box will show "Percent Complete". When the upload is complete, the Uploaded File will appear (with a temporary file name) in the editor for that file type.
6. From the "File" menu, select Save or Save As and enter a file name and path in the appropriate fields.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
37
November 2019
File Management Downloading a File to the Controller
Downloading a File to the Controller
Introduction
Once a control strategy--configuration file--is opened, Configuration Download transfers a configuration FROM the PC TO the controller.
The Controller may be in either RUN or PROGRAM mode (not Run-Locked) ATTENTION: You cannot download a configuration saved as one ControlEdge HC900 controller model to a controller of a different model. You must first convert the configuration before doing a download. See "Converting ControlEdge HC900 configurations ".
Procedure 1. From the File Menu select "Open" or Upload a file* from the controller.
IMPORTANT: If you intend to make a set of changes to a running configuration and wish to preserve the context of the current configuration parameters, you should perform an upload from the controller first to assure that you have the current configuration, make the incremental changes, save the modified file, and then download. This is highly recommended to avoid configuration conflicts.
2. Select the file (.cde) that is to be downloaded.
3. The selected function block diagram will appear in the Active View window. Only the active file window can be downloaded.
4. At this point you can make incremental changes to the file. (See "Downloading in the RUN mode" first)'
5. From the "File Menu" select Download or
click on the Download icon on the Main Toolbar
or
click on the Download icon on the Utilities Worksheet Toolbar Configuration".
then select "Download
6. The "Download File" dialog box will appear. Check the Port and Address information for correctness.
7. Press "START" to download the configuration to the configuration buffer. The download will begin if the controller is in: PROGRAM mode or RUN mode. The download will be rejected if the controller is in: RUN/LOCKED mode or OFFLINE mode. The dialog box will show "Percent Complete".
8. After the database tables have been transferred to a configuration buffer, select one of the following commands to transfer from the buffer to the controller: Download of a safety-enabled configuration will not be allowed if there is a mismatch of I/O channel information or in case of duplicate I/O information.
38
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management Downloading a File to the Controller
HOT START - the controller will use the new or updated configuration in RUN Mode.
WARNING During Hot-Start, TPSC Outputs turn Off. After Hot-Start complete, TPSC Output resumes to original position.
During a Hot Start:
- Controller memory will not be re-initialized - Outputs will be held at their current value. - Controller will stay in RUN mode
There are two possible actions with a Hot Start.
- If the Hot Start will be completed within approximately 3 controller scan cycles, then the Hot Start will proceed automatically.
- If the Hot Start requires longer than 3 controller scan cycles, a dialog box displays a) the estimated duration of the Hot Start and b) options to initiate or cancel the Hot Start.
COLD START - the controller will transition through normal PROGRAM-TO-RUN mode transition - Controller memory will be re-initialized - Outputs will be turned off during re-start - Controller will return to RUN mode
ABORT - the controller will disregard the new configuration and continue to use the previous configuration.
9. The dialog box status line will state "Mode Change in Progress" then "Download Successful" when completed.
Downloading in Run Mode
WARNING While we provide application assistance personally, through our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the configuration in the application and the potential dangers of downloading a configuration while running. Downloading in RUN Mode has the potential to create a hazardous situation. Changes to the configuration result in a short suspension of the control program followed by an immediate execution of the new configuration. It is the user's responsibility to ensure that configuration changes will not result in a hazardous situation. It is the user's responsibility to assess this risk for his process. Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury to people and/or property damage.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
39
November 2019
File Management Downloading a File to the Controller
Downloading in Run Mode (Hot Start) is a means to make configuration changes and download them to the controller without taking the process off-line. It is intended for incremental changes to a running configuration, such as:
Adding and Deleting Blocks Modifying block configuration parameters Adding/changing soft-wires, signals, variables Adding OI displays, Data Storage Adding Recipes, SP Profiles, SP Schedules, or Sequencers. Adding, deleting, or modifying I/O (DI, DO, AI, AO). IMPORTANT: If you intend to make a set of changes to a running configuration and wish to preserve the context of the current configuration parameters you should perform an upload from the controller first to assure that you have the current configuration, make the incremental changes, and then download.
Cautions
Configuration Change Transfer
Once the HOT START button is depressed, the configuration will be updated with the new changes. Note: During the time period required to perform the Hot Start, the controller will suspend the execution of its function blocks and hold its outputs at their current value. If you select Hot Start and the Hot Start will take longer than approximately three controller scan cycles, a popup window appears:
If this time period is acceptable, click Yes to begin the Hot Start. If this time period is not acceptable, press No.
Configuration Parameters All Configuration Parameters are set to the value or state in the .cde file following a download. For example: Tuning constants could be over written by a Download while in Run Mode. The tuning constants are considered part of the configuration. If you DO NOT first upload the present configuration, you will overwrite the active parameters with the values in the configuration that are downloaded. The new download is an all or nothing proposition.
Function Block Changes If a function block is deleted, Designer does not re-use the block number. If a function block is added, Designer uses the highest current block number + 1. Restrictions: When a configuration uses the last block number (500 for C30, 2100 for C50, 5100 for C70/C70R/C75) and you try to add another block, Designer will prompt you to "de-fragment" the table and recover previously deleted blocks. There can be NO Hot Start this case.
Data Storage Schedule (Legacy 559/1042 OI only) Assuming changes have NOT been made to an OI data Storage Schedule, the data storage will be interrupted only as long as it takes to transfer the configuration changes.
40
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management Downloading Firmware
Downloading Firmware
Background
Code download provides a mechanism to upgrade the firmware in your ControlEdge HC900 Controller to a newer version without the need to replace the CPU/IO card. This can be useful if you wish to upgrade your controller/IO to take advantage of new features and functions as they are introduced, or in the event that a software bug requires field repair. The HC Designer upgrade files can be downloaded from website https://www.honeywellprocess.com/en-US/explore/products/control-monitoring-andsafety-systems/modular-control-systems/hc900-control-system/Pages/hc900-controller.aspx
Getting Started
Before you begin the download there are a few things you need to be aware of. · Code Download can take a couple of minutes using Ethernet. Therefore, it is highly recommended that you do not start the code download procedure at a time when the likelihood of power failure is increased, such as during thunderstorms. · Disable Wi-Fi on your PC. · The code download function is only available through the ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer program connected to the controller via the CONFIGURATION port or Ethernet port on the ControlEdge HC900. Use the Utilities Worksheet to do the download. · The controller will not allow the firmware download to begin if the battery is bad.
· Code download will destroy the configuration database in the controller. Therefore, before code download is started, either upload the configuration file via the operator interface and save on floppy disk or other storage media, or upload and save to your PC via the software's Utilities Worksheet.
Firmware Files
The firmware files for the various CPU, Scanner and IO versions are placed in the C:\Program Files\ HC900 Firmware directory when HC Designer is installed or upgraded. It is strongly recommended both controller and scanners be upgraded together.
Controller Mode
Before starting the Firmware Download, switch the controller to "Program Locked" mode. Program Locked offers more security by requiring a key to change the mode switch position. See set controller mode.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
41
November 2019
File Management Downloading Firmware
Download Procedure
Step 1 2
3
Action
Backup the controller configuration either by uploading to floppy disk on the operator interface, or uploading and saving via the Designer.
Make sure the controller's mode switch is in "Program" (locked) or "Run/Prog" position. If the switch is in "Run/Prog" position, go to set controller mode display and change mode to Program (locked).
In Designer select the Utilities Worksheet tab.
Controller Module
4
From the "Controller Utilities Functions" select "Download to Controller".
On the sub-menu, select " Firmware", then "Controller Module".
5
Use the "Look in:" drop down list in the "Open" dialog box to select the drive and folder
you placed the files in.
6
Select and open the file "Version.CPU" displayed in the file list box.
7
Select the "Port" and "Address" on the "Download File" dialog box.
8
Click on the "Start" button in the "Download File" dialog box. The download will start,
and progress is displayed. The download itself will take a few minutes, depending on
the Port type and connection.
9
A "Download Succeeded" status will be displayed in the "Download File" dialog box.
If a failure is detected, an error message will appear in the Status section of the "Download File" dialog box. See "Error Messages" for a list of possible messages and resolutions. Also see Failure Modes.
Scanner Module
10
From the "Controller Utilities Functions" select "Download to Controller".
On the sub-menu, select " Firmware", then "Scanner Module".
11
Use the "Look in:" drop down list in the "Open" dialog box to select the drive and folder
you placed the files in.
12
Select and open the file "Version.SCN" displayed in the file list box.
13
Select the "Port" and "Address" on the "Download File" dialog box.
14
Click on the "Start" button in the "Download File" dialog box. The download will start,
and progress is displayed. The download itself will take a few minutes, depending on
the Port type and connection.
15
A "Download Succeeded" status will be displayed in the "Download File" dialog box.
If a failure is detected, an error message will appear in the Status section of the "Download File" dialog box. See "Error Messages" for a list of possible messages and resolutions. Also see Failure Modes.
16
Restore the configuration from the backup copy you previously made.
42
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management Download Firmware Error Messages
IO Module 17
From the "Controller Utilities Functions" select "Download to Controller".
On the sub-menu, select "Firmware", then "Io Module".
18
Use the "Look in:" drop down list in the "Open" dialog box to select the drive and folder
you placed the files in.
19
Select and open the file "Version.bin" displayed in the file list box.
20
Select the "Port" and "Address" on the "Download File" dialog box.
21
Click on the "Start" button in the "Download File" dialog box. The download will start,
and progress is displayed. The download itself will take a few minutes, depending on
the Port type and connection.
22
A "Download Succeeded" status will be displayed in the "Download File" dialog box.
If a failure is detected, an error message will appear in the Status section of the "Download File" dialog box. See "Error Messages" for a list of possible messages and resolutions. Also see Failure Modes.
Failure Modes
If there is a download failure indication on the "Download File" dialog box: · DO NOT cycle the controller power and DO NOT remove the battery. · Check the physical connections. · Check for power failures. · Restart the download from the beginning.
Download Firmware Error Messages
This is a list of possible error messages that could be displayed as the result of a Download Firmware failure:
Error Message
What to do
Instrument must be in PROGRAM LOCK mode to perform this operation Instrument's battery missing or dead Missing loader binary file
Could not open firmware update file Programming is not required, the downloaded version matches the code in the controller The downloaded file is corrupted Failed to complete file transfer
Controller is not responding, code download failed Failed to put instrument into loader transfer mode
Put controller in program lock mode before starting code download.
Replace controller battery before starting code download. Could not open the loader file. Make sure the "loader.s19" file is in the same directory as the firmware file to be downloaded. Make sure the firmware file is present in the directory selected. The version in the controller matches the version that was downloaded.
The firmware file was bad. Replace the firmware file Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart code download again. Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart code download again. Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart code download again.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
43
November 2019
File Management Download Firmware Error Messages
Error Message Failed to get controller status
Unexpected controller mode. Code download will abort. The controller will now reset Failed to get expansion rack status
FLASH erase failure. Replace the controller card FLASH programming failure. Replace the controller card FLASH memory failure. Replace the Controller card
What to do Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart code download again. Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart code download again.
Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart code download again. The controller has a hardware problem. Replace the controller card.
The controller has a hardware problem. Replace the controller card.
The controller has a hardware problem. Replace the controller card.
An incomplete code download has been detected. Do not remove controller power! Removing controller power could result in damage to the scanner card(s) An incomplete code download has been detected. Code download will proceed using the selected file No scanner racks detected
"Rack 1: SUCCESS, Rack 2: FAILED"
Failed to get UIO Module status
Failed to put instrument into IO mode
Programming is not required, the downloaded version matches the code in the IO Module IO Module is not responding, IO download failed "R1:M1: SUCCESS, ................R1:M12 : FAIL .......................................R12:M12: SUCCESS"
A previous code download was aborted or failed. Code download will proceed using the selected file.
A previous code download was aborted or failed. Code download will proceed using the selected file.
Most likely cause is no expansion racks connected to the main controller. It can also be caused by a failed scanner card. If a scanner is properly connected to the controller and this message is displayed, replace the scanner card.
Completion report for scanner code download. There should be a SUCCESS status for each card connected to the main controller rack. A FAILED status could be caused by a communications problem between the main controller rack and the scanner racks or by a failed scanner card. Restart code download again.
Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart IO code download again.
Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart IO code download again.
The version in the IO Module matches the version that was downloaded.
Could be caused by communication loss or controller power failure. Restart IO code download again.
Completion report for IO code download. There should be a SUCCESS status for each UIO Module connected to the controller. A FAILED status could be caused by a communications problem between the controller and UIO Modules or by a failed IO card. Restart IO code download again.
44
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management File Properties
File Properties
Let you fill in the title and author of the file as well as view the file statistics (Number of Blocks, Inputs, and other items). From the Designer Window File menu, select "Properties". Or in the File Browser Window right-click on an open configuration. The "File Properties" dialog box will appear. Select a tab: General Enter Title and Author. Read only: Path and file name, Date created and Last Modified, Schema #, Device information (CPU type, Revision number) Statistics
Shows usages and capacities for all items in the configuration. Asterisk * indicates there is no specific limit for this item, its limit is determined by available memory. Cycle Time and Fast Cycle Time increase (slow down) as the following increase: CPU % Used, Fast CPU % Used, Dynamic Memory, Config Memory. Also, extensive use of Free Form Logic blocks (as opposed to equivalent gate logic) can substantially increase Fast Cycle Time. Be aware that deleted function blocks consume memory; this memory can be made available by defragmenting.
"Read Protection" - Indicates current protection. If file is unprotected, click on "Protect File" to allow new password entry or change current password. "Worksheet Protection" - Indicates current protection. If worksheet is unprotected, click on "Protect" to allow new password entry or change current password. Also, you can change or remove worksheet protection.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
45
November 2019
File Management How to Add Worksheet Protection
How to Add Worksheet Protection
Introduction The ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer provides an optional configuration Worksheet protection. New files default to "No Protection". Worksheets can be protected on individual basis where all protected worksheets use the same password. A user has limited access to protected worksheets.
Protected Worksheet Type Controller Display Function Blocks Modbus Map
View Worksheet? YES YES NO YES
Edit Worksheet? NO NO NO NO
Protected Worksheets: · can be "unlocked". Protection is disabled, but not removed from the file. If you save the file, the worksheet protection will be "locked" when the file is reopened. · can have their passwords changed. In order to change a password, you will need to know the current password. · Can have their protection "removed". Removing the protection is permanent. If you save the file, the worksheet will not be protected when the file is reopened.
Protection Symbols There are three symbols that could appear on the "Worksheet Protection" tab that indicate the level of protection for the file:
= No protection is in place, worksheets are 'Unlocked"
= Protection exists, and the worksheets are "Unlocked".
= Protection exists, and the worksheets are "Locked".
46
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management How to Add Worksheet Protection
Protecting a Worksheet When There is No Protection
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Change Protection" button.
3
Click on the box next to the worksheet names you want to protect, then select
"DONE" button.
4
Click on the "Lock" button to setup a password.
5
Enter a password for the file in the "New Password" field (up to 14 characters).
Important note: Password shall not have Chinese characters
6
Re-enter the password in the "Confirm New Password" field.
7
Click "OK".
8
In Version 6.2 and earlier, click "Disable Master Password" if you wish to prevent
others from overiding password protection by getting a master password from
Honeywell. IMPORTANT NOTE: If you forget your password after Disable Master
Password has been selected you will not be able to view any protected worksheets.
9
In Version 6.3 and greater "Disable Master Password" and "Forgot Password"
options are not available. IMPORTANT NOTE: If you forget your password after
password has been set you will not be able to view any protected worksheets
To Change a Password
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Change Password" button.
3
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
4
Enter a New Password in the appropriate field.
Important note: Password shall not have Chinese characters
5
Confirm the new password in the appropriate field.
6
Click "OK".
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
47
November 2019
File Management How to Add Worksheet Protection
To Temporarily Unlock a Worksheet
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Unlock" button.
3
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
4
Click "OK", the worksheets are unprotected
NOTE: the "Controller", "Display", and "Function Block" worksheets also have a toolbar button to unlock worksheets.
To Permanently Remove Worksheet Protection
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Remove Protection" button.
3
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
4
Click "OK", the worksheets are unprotected.
Protecting a Worksheet When Worksheets Protection is Active
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
"Unlock" the worksheet.
3
Change protection.
4
Select worksheet names, then "DONE".
5
Select "LOCK"
48
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
File Management File Read Protection
File Read Protection
Protected files are password protected. You will be prompted for a password to open them.
Introduction
The ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer provides an optional configuration File Read protection. All the files default to "No Protection". Through the Properties selection on the FILE menu, you can enter a password to read protect each file. You can change the password and also remove Write protection using the same password.
Use this security feature to prevent other users from viewing your configuration. Once a file is protected and saved (or downloaded to a controller), it cannot be opened (or uploaded) unless you know the password.
Adding Read protection to a file
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the "Read Protection "
tab.
2
Click on the "Protect File" button.
3
Enter a password for the file in the "New Password" field (up to 14
characters).
4
Important note: Password shall not have Chinese characters
5
Re-enter the password in the "Confirm New Password" field.
Click "OK".
Important Note: In version 6.3 and greater, the "Forgot Password" option is not available. If you forget your password after it has been set to "read protect" the file you will not be able to open it.
To Change a Password
Step
Action
1
Click on the "Change Password" button.
2
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
3
Enter a New Password in the appropriate field.
4
Important note: Password shall not have Chinese characters
5
Confirm the new password in the appropriate field.
Click "OK".
To Unprotect a File
Step
Action
1
Click on the "Unprotect File" button.
2
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
3
Click "OK", the file is unprotected
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
49
November 2019
File Management Write Protect a File
Write Protect a File
Introduction Optional configuration File Write protection is provided. This feature makes use of the disk general file "Read Only" attribute. All the files default to "No Protection". When set to "Read Only", the file is Write Protected, which means it cannot be over written or deleted. Select "Write Protect File" from the FILE menu. Use the Check Box on the dialog box that appears to turn the attribute On (selected) or Off (deselected).
50
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
PC Comm Ports and Connections How to Manage PC Comm Ports and Connections
6. PC Comm Ports and Connections How to Manage PC Comm Ports and Connections
The middle and lower portions of the Utilities Worksheet contain the PC Comm Ports and Connections functions. Setting up your PC Comm Ports consists of the following functions:
· PC Network Port Setup for Controller Access · PC Serial Comm Port Setup · PC to Controller Connection Settings · Remote Loopback test · Remote Access · Communications Statistics
Attention: Following Address Ranges are not permitted by Internet Protocol Rules: · 0.x.x.x · 127.x.x.x · 128.0.x.x · 191.255.x.x · 192.0.0.x · 223.255.255.x · 224.x.x.x - 255.x.x.x
PC Network Port Set Up For Controller Access
The software lets you setup a PC Network Port and up to 8 PC Serial/USB Comm ports for interface to a specific controller (serially via the controller's RS-232 (legacy) or RS485 configuration port or over a network via the controller's Ethernet port, accessed by its IP address). You will need a Network Interface Card (NIC) in your PC for network connection. If there is a Modem on your PC, a symbol will appear on one of the Serial comm ports buttons.
Setting Up a Network Port 1. Click on the Network Port setup button
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
51
November 2019
2. The Network Port Dialog Box opens
To ADD a Network Port: Click on ADD and enter the properties in the Device IP Address fields.
To EDIT a Network Port: Click a device, click on EDIT and enter the properties in the Device IP Address fields.
To Delete a Network address: Click on a device in the Network address list, then click Delete button. The address will be deleted.
3. To do a Loopback test for a specific address click on the Loopback button.
PC Comm Ports and Connections PC Network Port Set Up For Controller Access
4. For Advanced Network Setup, click on the MORE>> button at the bottom of the "Network Port Properties" dialog box. Number of Retries before Abort - Enter a decimal value Retry Delay - Enter a value in milliseconds Timeout - Enter a value in milliseconds Note: It is not recommended that you set the values lower than those shown in the dialog box, since it may cause some communications operations to fail. Press Reset button to reset these fields to their default values
52
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
PC Comm Ports and Connections PC Serial Com Port Setup
PC Serial Com Port Setup
The software lets you setup a Network Port and up to 8 Serial Comm ports. If there is a Modem on your PC, a symbol will appear on one of the Serial Comm Ports buttons. See Setting up a Serial Com Port with a Modem.
Setting Up a Serial Comm Port
1. Click on the Serial Comm Port setup button. When there is no port Icon above the comm port name, the port is currently disabled. With newer PCs a USB to RS232 or USB to RS485 adapter may be used.
2. The "Serial Comm Port Properties" Dialog Box will Open
Click the 'Enable Port" box
Manually select a Baud Rate from the "Speed" drop-down menu, or if a controller is currently connected to the ports, press the "Detect" button to detect the controller's RS232 /RS485 baud rate.
Click OK.
Note: The Legacy controller's serial port can be set for either RS232 or RS485 operation (by means of DIP switches on the CPU card). Version 6.0 and greater CPUs support only an RS485 serial connection. If the Detect process runs through all the baud rates rapidly without appearing to actually check each baud rate, there may be a mismatch between the PC's serial port type and the controller's serial port type. If this behavior occurs, make sure that the DIP switches on the controller's CPU card are set correctly. The legacy controller factory settings are RS232 for Serial Port S1 and RS485 for Serial Port S2.
Note: The serial comm ports are configured to default to Honeywell ELN protocol, If a user configures a serial port to use Modbus RTU (slave) protocol, the Serial 232 box may be checked for HC Designer to communicate via this protocol.
3. The Serial CommPort Button will now show an icon indicating that the port has been set up.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
53
November 2019
4. For Advanced Network Setup, click on the MORE>> button at the bottom of the "Serial Comm Port Properties" dialog box. Number of Retries before Abort - Enter a decimal value Retry Delay - Enter a value in milliseconds Timeout - Enter a value in milliseconds Note: It is not recommended that you set the values lower than those shown in the dialog box, since it may cause some communications operations to fail. Press Reset button to reset these fields to their default values.
Setting Up a Serial Comm Port with a Modem
1. Modems must be "Installed" in MS WindowsTM.
2. Click on the Serial Comm Port Setup button.
3. The "Serial Comm Port Properties" Dialog Box opens
Click the 'Enable Port" box There is NO Baud selection because the speed is determined by the controller's modem. Click OK.
4. For Advanced Network Setup, click on the MORE>> button at the bottom of the "Serial Comm Port Properties" dialog box. Number of Retries before Abort - Enter a decimal value Retry Delay - Enter a value in milliseconds Timeout - Enter a value in milliseconds Note: It is not recommended that you set the values lower than those shown in the dialog box, since it may cause some communications operations to fail. Press Reset button to reset these fields to their default values.
PC Comm Ports and Connections PC Serial Com Port Setup
54
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
PC Comm Ports and Connections PC to Controller Connection Settings
5. For Telephony Settings, click on the MORE>> button at the bottom of the "Serial Comm Port Properties" dialog box. Click on a radio button to select one of the following two options: No Timeout - No timeout is performed and the application will stay connected until you Hang Up Connection Timeout - Enter in the active field (in minutes) how long the application will leave the line open before hanging up automatically. The Modem will hang up if there is no communications activity for this amount of time.
PC to Controller Connection Settings
After setting up your PC Network and PC Serial Comm Ports:
Select a Port from the drop-down menu
If you selected "Network" Select the Address of the controller from the drop-down menu.
You can run a loopback test
You can view and reset the communications statistics
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
55
November 2019
PC Comm Ports and Connections Remote Loopback Test
Remote Loopback Test
Remote Loopback tests the connection between the PC and the Controller. Running the test
· Click on the Loopback icon on the Utilities Worksheet Window. Loopback Test" dialog box will appear.
· Click "SEND". The Status line will read: Instrument Responded Correctly, or Instrument did not Respond - check the connections
· Click "Close".
. The "Remote
Remote Access
For Remote Controller Access via dial-up modem an external modem is required at the controller and is connected to the standard RS 232 configuration port. If a modem is already installed on the PC the Designer will notify you that it exists. Remote Access functions include on-line monitoring Live Monitor - Overview, Uploading and Downloading Configurations.
Procedure 1. Click on the Utilities tab.
2. Under PC Port Setup, click on a Comm Port. 3. The Serial Comm Port Properties dialog box opens. Click on the "Enable Port" box.
4. From the "Port" drop-down menu, select "COMx:MODEM". Statistics button.
will appear next to the
5. Click on this icon and the "Select the Number To Call" will appear.
To Hang Up a call, select "Hangup Modem" from the File Menu in the Main Menu. A message will ask you to confirm that you want to hang up.
56
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
PC Comm Ports and Connections Select the Number to Call
Select the Number to Call
Select the Number to Call Dialog Box. To ADD a Phone Number Type in the Phone Number, Name, and Comments in their respective fields, then click on "ADD to List". The information will appear in the Phone Number List.
To DELETE a Phone Number Click on a name or number in the Phone Number List and click "Remove from list". The line will be deleted and all the Phone numbers and names will move up one line.
To SELECT a number to call Click on a name or number in the Phone Number List and click "Dial".
To Hang Up a call Select "Hangup Modem" from the File Menu in the Main Menu. A message will ask you to confirm that you want to hang up.
Communications Statistics
The "Statistics" button on the "Current PC to Controller Connections Settings" will launch the "Communications Error Summary" dialog box. The summary statistics are shown below:
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
57
November 2019
PC Comm Ports and Connections Communications Statistics
See the table below for corrective action for each communication error. Click on "Reset" to change the statistics to "0".
Error Number of Comm Attempts Receive Overrun Errors API Errors
Link Errors Physical Errors
Reason
Count of messages sent down to a Controller
A count of Controller response messages that were longer than expected. Make sure you have the latest version of HC Designer and that it is compatible with the Controller version. Contact Technical Support if the problem continues.
The number of Application Errors are typically errors reported by the Controller.
Common reasons for this error:
Instrument responded to the wrong message. Check that there isn't more than one device with the same IP or Modbus address trying to communicate with the Controller.
Controller communication port is in use by other device(s).
Instrument responded with an error code. Take note of any error message dialog boxes that may popup while communicating with the Controller (e.g. While Monitoring). Attempt any corrective action based on the reported errors.
Contact Technical Support if the problem continues.
Count of messages that could not be interpreted by HC Designer. Typically these occur when the response message contains garbled data. Check physical connections between the Controller and the PC. If you are using a modem or a serial cable, this error may be the result of "line noise".
Count of hardware type errors. These typically occur when the Controller doesn't respond. Check cable and other hardware connections. If using a modem or a serial cable, verify the cable connections and baud rates of all pieces.
58
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Worksheets Overview What is a Worksheet?
7. Worksheets Overview
What is a Worksheet?
A Worksheet is a logical partition of a configuration file. Worksheets can be further categorized by function into 6 main categories. Each category is assigned a tab in the worksheet category tab control that makes up the main Worksheet Window of a configuration. There are restrictions on the number of individual worksheets that can exist in a given category and not all categories are available to all controller types and revisions of controller firmware. Below are the different worksheet categories:
Controller Worksheet
· Displays the configuration of I/O modules · 1 per configuration
Operator Panel Worksheet (Also referred to as Display Worksheets)
· Display and configure Operator Interface displays · 1 per configuration · Not available in revision 6.0 and above
Function Block Diagram Worksheets (This category is sub-divided into)
Process Worksheets
Safety Worksheets
· Display and configure control logic
· 20 per configuration (for C30, C30S, C50, C50S) · 160 per configuration (for C70, C75) · 80 per configuration (for C70S, C75S)
· 20 per configuration (for C30S, C50S) · 80 per configuration (for C70S, C75S) · Only available for SIL-compliant controller types · Only available in revision 6.0 and above
Modbus Map Worksheet Utilities Worksheet
· Only available in revision 4.0 and higher configurations using a Custom Modbus Address Map
· 1 per configuration
· Provides access to a variety of maintenance functions for the controller
· 1 per configuration
Each Worksheet may have full or restricted access (Worksheet Protection).
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
59
November 2019
Worksheets Overview Worksheet Category Tabs
Worksheet Category Tabs
A configuration is organized into categories shown as tabs at the bottom of the Main window: Controller Display Function Blocks / Process/ Safety Modbus Map (Rev. 4.0 configurations and higher with custom Modbus map)
An additional tab, Utilities, is provides access to a variety of useful functions that interact with the controller.
60
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Controller Worksheet Controller Worksheet Overview
8. Controller Worksheet
Controller Worksheet Overview
There is one worksheet for the configuration. It displays the I/O in all configured racks.
Toolbar The Controller Worksheet has a Toolbar to launch dialog boxes to configure:
Print Worksheet- Prints the I/O Summary as viewed on the worksheet. Controller Identification - Enter a controller name. It will be displayed on the Operator Interface used for Peer Communications (16 characters). Important note: Controller name shall not have Chinese characters Controller E-Mail Notification
Unlock Worksheets
I/O Summary A summary of each addressed I/O point (as well as unassigned I/O points) in the configuration indicates: Rack/Module/Channel Block ID - a hot link when clicked finds the I/O block on the Function Block Diagram Engineering Units and AI Input range Signal Tag of primary output pin (if present) a hot link when clicked finds the signal tag on the Function Block
Diagram Signal Descriptor of primary output pin (if present)
This assignment summary is built and updated dynamically on the worksheet body. It can be printed from the toolbar Icon.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
61
November 2019
Controller Worksheet Controller Configuration Toolbar
Controller Configuration Toolbar
Click on ICON to open a dialog box.
ICON
Function
Print Worksheet
Dialog Box Comments Click to open the standard Print dialog box. Fill in appropriate fields
Printed Output is the I/O Summary as viewed on the worksheet.
To display each page, as it will look when printed, click Print Report Preview on the File menu.
Controller Identification
Click to open the Controller Identification dialog box. Type in a name for your controller configuration. (same as Worksheet name) Also indicates controller type and revision. (read only)
E-Mail Notification
Unlock Worksheets
Click to open the E-Mail Notification dialog box.
Two Tabs on Dialog Box:
General FROM name displayed for convenience (read only) and SUBJECT information 31 character configurable text.
To List - enter up to 3 configurable E-Mail addresses. For each Email address check an Alarm/Event priority
See "E-Mail Notification"
Click to open the "Unlock Worksheets" dialog box. Enter a password and click "Unlock" to unlock all worksheets.
62
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
E-Mail Notification
Controller Worksheet E-Mail Notification
Opens the E-Mail Notification dialog box. It lets you configure up to three E-Mail addresses per controller configuration for Alarm and Event notification.
There are two tabs on the dialog Box.
General Tab
FROM
The Controller name is configured by the builder of the Configuration file [Read Only]
SUBJECT Enter an Event Subject (up to 31 characters) Enter an Alarm Subject (up to 31 characters)
Note: If "alarm subject" is not configured in HCD, emails receive "Email address 1" as a default subject for all three email address.
To List Tab -
Enter up to 3 configurable E-Mail addresses (32 characters per addresses). For each Email address check the Alarm/Event priorities you want the E-mail address to receive.
Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms because they are considered at a priority lower than all alarms.
Alarm priorities were set during "Alarm Group Configuration" under "Alarm Details" 2 = Low Priority Alarm 3 = Medium Priority Alarm 4 = High Priority Alarms 5 = Emergency Alarm
The priority of an event is always indicated as "1" - (see Event Configuration)
Attention: See "Set Controller Network Parameters" and follow the wizard to set up a SMTP mail server IP Address.
Examples:
Somebody@somewhere.com receives only priority 5 Alarms (only the check box for "5" is checked
Aperson@somewhere.com receives all Alarms and Events (all 5 boxes are checked)
People@somewhere.com receives only Events (only check box for "1" is checked)
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
63
November 2019
Unlock the Worksheets
Controller Worksheet Unlock the Worksheets
Open the "Unlock Worksheets" dialog box.
Enter the password in the field and then, press "UNLOCK". See How to Add Worksheet Protection on page 46.
64
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Display Worksheet Operator Panel Worksheet Overview
9. Display Worksheet
Note: This section applies to models 551, 552 and 1042 operator interfaces. It does not apply to the 900 Control Station.
Operator Panel Worksheet Overview
The Operator Panel Worksheet has a Toolbar to launch dialog boxes to configure: O/I Display Buttons [1 - 8] Model 1042; [1 - 5] Model 559 and Display Groups O/I Security (Operator Interface Settings)
O/I Data Storage Alarm Groups Event List Filenames Start Up Banner Page Help Message screens. Unlock Worksheets
There is a Display Keys Report that indicates current O/I Button assignments: Display Button Number Display Position on the button Display Format Group Title or Tag name
This assignment summary is built and updated dynamically on the worksheet body. It can be printed from the toolbar.
Operator Panel Configuration Toolbar
Click on ICON to open the dialog box.
ICON
Function Print
Dialog Box Comments
Prints the OI Display Worksheet. The printed output is the list of displays on each user-assigned button as viewed on the worksheet.
To display each page as it will look when printed, click "Print Preview" on the File menu.
Display Button Configuration
Click to open Display Buttons Configuration. It lets you assign displays to the user-assigned Operator Interface keys.
Operator Interface Settings
Data Storage Configuration
Click to open the "Operator Interface Settings" Dialog Box. It lets you edit security settings on the Operator Interface.
Click to open the Data Storage Configuration dialog box. It lets you create groups of data to be archived on the Operator Interface's storage device. Dialog box tabs are: Trend, Point Log, and Alarm/Event
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
65
November 2019
ICON
Function Alarm Group Configuration
Configure Event List
Operator Interface File Names Start Up Display Configuration
Message Display Configuration
Unlock Worksheets
Display Worksheet Operator Interface Displays
Dialog Box Comments Click to open the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box. It lets you configure groups of alarm points in the controller to report be reported at the OI and via E-Mail. See "Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups". Click to open the Configure Event List Dialog Box. It lets you configure tags to events from the controller to be reported at the OI or via E Mail.
Click to open the "O/I File Names for Disk Storage" Dialog Box. It lets you configure root names for the Operator Interface.
Click to open the Start Up Display Configuration Dialog Box. It lets you configure the Operator Interface Start Up display.
Click to open the "Message Display Configuration" Dialog Box. It lets you configure a set of message help displays for the Operator Interface. Click to open the "Unlock Worksheets" dialog box. Enter a password and click "Unlock" to unlock all worksheets.
Operator Interface Displays
The Operator Interface uses a color display to provide a variety of screen presentations for viewing control loops, setpoint programs, and other analog and digital status. Modifying and customizing the operator interface is done using the Designer software. With the software, data points can be identified with ASCII tag names. Once named, these data points may be accessed by the operator interface using a standard set of display formats. Customized display access and the assignment of selected display screens to keyboard buttons may be viewed using the Operator Interface Worksheet. All of the information for control loops and setpoint programmers will be accessed by the associated tag name while selected screens such as bar graphs, trends, and overview displays will require the user to specify the individual data points to be represented on the screen.
Display Buttons Configuration
Overview This function lets you customize display access by assigning specific display screens to a set of assignable buttons. OI Model 1042 has 8 assignable buttons, Model 559 has 5. Each assignable button supports a sequence of up to ten screens. Screens assigned to these buttons may be Monitor screens (view data only) or Operate screens (take actions). The type of screen and the data presented on the screen is defined during configuration.
Configuration Procedure
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the "Display Buttons Configuration" dialog box.
66
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Display Worksheet Display Buttons Configuration
Select one of the tabs (one for each button) located across the top of the dialog box.
"Choose a display format" field. This will determine what will be shown in the "Groups/Tags" field located below the "Display Format" selection box.
Display Formats categories are as follows. For examples, see the Operator Interface User Guide.
Category
Available Display Formats 1 Loop faceplate with trend, 1 Loop Numeric, Auto-Manual Bias, Multi-loop Faceplate
Recipe Load, Sequencer, Setpoint Programmer, Setpoint Scheduler
Device Control Operate, Four-Selector Switch, HOA Switch, Pushbutton
Horizontal Trend, Horizontal Trend with Digitals, Horizontal Trend with Vertical Bars, Vertical Trend, Vertical Trend with Horizontal Bars 3 Pt Horizontal, 3 Pt Vertical, 6 Pt Horizontal, 6 Pt Vertical
1 Pt Rotating Panel, Multipoint Panel, Overview, Panel - 4 Pts, Panel Meter
Alarm, Alternator Operate, Data Storage Status, Messages, Ramp Operate, Stage Operate
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
67
November 2019
Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups
A list of configured Groups/Tags and their titles will appear in the "Groups/Tags" selection window on the tab. The format selection title is listed under "Groups/Tags". Click on a Group/Tag number. Click ADD - to add the selection to the "Selected Display Formats" list. Click INSERT - to insert into a screen position. Other entries will shift down. Note that you must first select (click) the position in the "Selected Display Formats" list, on the right-hand side of the dialog, where you want to insert this display. Click DELETE - to delete a page from a selected position in the "Selected Display Formats" list.
Click EDIT - to change the Tag Order or to bring up the Display Tag Group Configuration dialog box. Note: You can also double-click on an entry in the "Groups/Tag" list or the "Selected Display Formats" list. This action produces the same result as clicking on the Edit button for the selected entry. Each time you configure a Loop (PID, CARB, ONOFF, TPSC, or AMB), SP Programmer (SPP), SP Scheduler (SPS), Sequencer, Hands/Off/Auto Switch (HOA), Ramp, Stage, Alternator or Device Control (DC) function block, you will have assigned a unique Tag Name to the block. This selection lets you arrange tags to determine the tag order in various displays on the operator interface. The order in which they appear in this "Tag Order" dialog box can be changed to coincide with the order in which you want them to be displayed. For other Display Groups, it allows you to go and edit the group; for example: Trend, Bar, Overview, and others.
Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups
Overview The "Display Tag Groups" lets you configure groups of tags that can be accessed by the operator interface using a standard set of display formats and a predefined menu hierarchy. These groups are configured using tabs that appear on the "Display Tag Groups Configuration" dialog box. The groups are listed below. After you have completed all the group configurations you can select the groups to be displayed and assign them to a specific operator panel display button. Refer to (Display Button Configuration)
Configuration
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the "Display Tag Group Configuration" dialog box. Select one of the tabs (one for each group) located across the top of the dialog box. Click on tab below to access the configuration procedure for the specific tab.
Alarms Display Tag Group
The Alarm Display Tag Group configuration tab provides a drop list of Alarm groups.
You can configure 20 Alarm Groups of 12 alarm points each. Each group contains a set of selected digital signal tags. An Alarm may be any Digital Signal Tag. There are up to 240 alarm points available. Each alarm point can be configured to generate an E-mail notification.
Select the Alarm tab then Select Display Group from the drop-down menu. Digital signals will be displayed in the "Selected Tags List" field.
68
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups
You can also select "Alarms" from: - the EDIT menu on the Main Menus - the FBD Worksheet toolbar button (when you do not have an OI and do not need to use Alarm Group logic in the control strategy) - the FBD Worksheet by dropping an ALMGR block onto the configuration and either double-
clicking on the block or right-clicking on the block and selecting the properties menu item on the context menu to bring up the 'Alarm Group Configuration" dialog box.
(when you do not have an OI and do need to use Alarm Group logic in the control strategy)
1. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
2. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces 3. Select a 'Tag Name" from the "Select Tag List". 4. Click on ADD, the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available position in the
"Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 5. Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group. 6. Select a signal in the "Selected Tags" field and click on ALARM DETAILS, and enter Alarm details in the Dialog Box. 7. Click OK.
Note: when you edit "Alarm Group 1-20" from either the O/I Worksheet, the FBD worksheet, or the FBD Alarm Group block, you are editing the same data.
Panel Meter Display Tag Groups
This selection lets you configure groups of Panel Meter Displays. Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables.
1. Select the Panel Meter tab then Select Display Group from the drop-down menu. Analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables will be displayed in the "Selected Tags" field.
2. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
3. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces. 4. Select a 'Tag Name" from the "Select Tag List". 5. Click on ADD, the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in
the "Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 6. Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group. Click OK.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
69
November 2019
Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups
Trend Display Tag Groups
A selection of horizontal or vertical trend format displays is available to provide a historical record of recent control performance. Trend displays may be configured with analog or digital points on each display. Trend displays allow a user selectable time period of from 0.5 to 24 hours each. Each display will retain from 1.5 to 6 screens of historical data that may be recalled from memory. Trend graph displays provide traditional value versus time plots in horizontal or vertical orientation. Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags and digital signal tags.
Attention: If you want trends displayed logarithmically make sure that the first signal tag selected has the decimal place setting. (Exponential Notation). See "Signal Tags".
1. Select the Trend tab then Select Display Group from the drop-down menu. Analog signal tags and digital signal tags will be displayed in the "Selected Tags" field.
2. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
3. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces 4. Select a 'Tag Name" from the "Select Tag List". 5. Click on ADD, the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available position in the
"Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 6. Enter the "Scale High" and "Scale Low" values for each signal selected. 7. Select a Time base for the Trend Display from the drop-down menu. (30 minutes to 24 hours) 8. Repeat the selection for up to 6 tags for each group. 9. Click OK.
Bar Display Tag Groups
This selection lets you configure 8 groups of Bar Displays. Bar Graph displays provide graphic representation of multiple analog or digital signal tags using horizontal or vertical orientation. Bar Graph displays are available in 3-point or 6-point vertical or horizontal format. Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags and digital signal tags.
1. Select the Bar tab then Select Display Group from the drop-down menu. Analog signal tags and digital signal tags will be displayed in the "Selected Tags" field.
2. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
3. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces 4. Select a 'Tag Name" from the "Select Tag List". 5. Click on ADD, the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available position in the
"Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 6. Enter the "Scale High" and "Scale Low" values for each signal selected. Defaults are 0 and 100. 7. Repeat the selection for up to 6 tags for each group. 8. Click OK.
70
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Display Worksheet Configuring or Viewing Display Tag Groups
Overview Display Tag Groups
This selection lets you configure groups of Overview Displays. An Overview display will present the current status/state for analog or digital tagged points. The display allows operator entry of values via assigned analog and digital variables. Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables for monitor only and/or operator entries. Analog entries for variables have range limits and digital variables may be turned on or off (via corresponding label).
The user may adjust analog and digital variables listed on overview displays while in operation. Configure entry limits for analog variables. Use entry limits for analog variables. Use entry limits of 0 (low) and 1 (high) for digital limits.
1. Select the Overview tab then Select Display Group from the drop-down menu. Analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables will be displayed in the "Selected Tags" field.
2. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
3. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces. 4. Select a 'Tag Name" from the "Select Tag List". 5. Click on ADD, the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in
the "Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 6. Enter the "Min Value" and "Max Value" values for each signal selected. Defaults are 99999 and +99999 7. Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group. 8. Click OK.
Single Point (Rotating) Panel Display Tag Groups
This selection lets you configure 2 groups of Single Point (Rotating) Panel Displays. Single Point Panel displays provide a single point alphanumeric readout that consists of the tag and current value. The display sequences through a list of up to 12 analog or digital signals or analog or digital variables. Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables.
1. Select the Single Point tab then Select Display Group from the drop-down menu. Analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables will be displayed in the "Selected Tags" field.
2. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
3. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces. 4. Select a 'Tag Name" from the "Select Tag List". 5. Click on ADD, the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in
the "Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 6. Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group. 7. Click OK.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
71
November 2019
Display Worksheet Alarm Details
Multi-Point Panel Display Tag Groups
This selection lets you configure 8 groups of Multi-Point Panel Displays. Multi-Point Panel displays present the current value/state for up to seven Analog or Digital signal tags or analog or digital variables in the controller. Each group may contain a mix of analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables.
1. Select the Multi Point tab then Select Display Group from the drop-down menu. Analog signal tags, digital signal tags, analog variables, and digital variables will be displayed in the "Selected Tags" field.
2. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
3. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces. 4. Select a 'Tag Name" from the "Select Tag List". 5. Click on ADD, the selected signal tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in
the "Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 6. Repeat the selection for up to 7 tags for each group. 7. Click OK.
Alarm Details
Select a tag in the "Selected Tags" area of the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box, then click on "Alarm Details' button. The Alarm Details dialog box opens and enables you to enter details for the selected tag. The block number and output number are listed across the banner. The Tag number and descriptor is listed in field below the banner.
Details include:
Alarm Priority - used for routing alarms to Email (which Email addresses get which alarms) Each of 3 E-mail address may have any/all alarm priorities assigned to it.
2 - Low Priority Alarm 3 - Medium Priority Alarm 4 - High Priority Alarm 5 - Emergency Alarm (select from the drop-down menu)
E Mail Notification of alarms, by priority, on a point by point basis. (check the box to allow Email notification) The E-mail will be sent: - if an alarm occurs on a point configured to send E-mail. - to any/all of the 3 E-mail addresses that have the associated alarm priority assigned.
Detailed Text - appears on the Operator Interface. (enter 2 lines of detailed text -24 characters max for each line)
Trigger Direction Trigger on ON state means alarm goes ON when triggered by rising edge (the discrete goes off-to-on) Trigger on OFF state means alarm goes ON when triggered by falling edge (the discrete goes on-to-off) (click on radio button to select)
72
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Display Worksheet Event List Configuration
Alarm Acknowledge - Group acknowledge
Manual Acknowledge - Can be acknowledged by operator. When a manual acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator, it will be indicated as cleared. Use when you want the operator to be able to acknowledge the alarm or see that the alarm was acknowledged and cleared. Auto Acknowledge -When an auto acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator, it will show no indication it was in alarm. Alarm can still be acknowledged by the operator when it is in the alarm state. An alarm point with this attribute will never indicate "clear" status. (click on radio button to select) Note: an alarm will always be stored to the O/I Archive list.
Event List Configuration
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Configure Event List dialog box. You can also select "Events" from:
- the EDIT menu on the Main Menu - the FBD Worksheet toolbar button
Up to 64 digital signals can be configured as events. The most recent 150 events will be available for display at the Operator Interface Events can generate Emails. From 150 to 1500 event records can be stored on the Operator Interface archive disk. Each event must have at least one of the following destinations:
Email, OI archive, or OI Display You can select the events from a list of all digital tags. A digital signal may be either an Event or an Alarm, but not both
Procedure 1. Enter a Title for the Event list. 2. From the drop-down menu, select the type of tags you want to display on the tag name list. 3. Click on each tag name you want included in the list. 4. Click on ADD. The selected tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the "Selected Tags List". 5. Select a tag in the list then, click on "Event Details" button to enter details for the tag selected. Details include: E Mail Notification Store to O/I Archive List Display on O/I Trigger Direction for ON or OFF state 6. Click OK.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
73
November 2019
Display Worksheet Event Details
Event Details
The Event Details dialog box enables you to enter details for the tag selected when you configure events. The block number and output number are listed across the banner. The Tag name and tag descriptor is listed in field below the banner. Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms. They are considered a lower priority than alarms. Details include:
E Mail Notification of events on a point by point basis. (Check the box to allow Email notification) The E-mail will be sent: - if an event occurs on a point configured to send E-mail. - to any/all of the 3 E-mail addresses that have events assigned. Event priorities are always indicated as "1"
Store to OI Archive List -OI Event File on the data archive disk on an event by event basis Display on OI - presentation on OI Status line and Event Summary display Trigger Direction ON Event on rising edge (Off-to-on transition)
OFF Event on falling edge (off-to-on transition). (click on radio button to select)
E-Mail Notification
opens the E-Mail Notification dialog box. It lets you configure up to three E-Mail addresses per controller configuration for Alarm and Event notification.
There are two tabs on the dialog Box.
General Tab
FROM
The Controller name is configured by the builder of the Configuration file [Read Only]
SUBJECT Enter an Event Subject (up to 31 characters) Enter an Alarm Subject (up to 31 characters)
To List Tab -
Enter up to 3 configurable E-Mail addresses (32 characters per addresses). For each Email address check the Alarm/Event priorities you want the E-mail address to receive.
Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms because they are considered at a priority lower than all alarms.
Alarm priorities were set during "Alarm Group Configuration" under "Alarm Details" 2 = Low Priority Alarm 3 = Medium Priority Alarm 4 = High Priority Alarms 5 = Emergency Alarm
The priority of an event is always indicated as "1" - (see Event Configuration)
Attention: See "Set Controller Network Parameters" and follow the wizard to set up a SMTP mail server IP Address.
Examples:
Somebody@somewhere.com receives only priority 5 Alarms (only the check box for "5" is checked
Aperson@somewhere.com receives all Alarms and Events (all 5 boxes are checked)
People@somewhere.com receives only Events (only check box for "1" is checked)
74
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Display Worksheet Operator Interface Settings
Operator Interface Settings
Note: This section applies to models 551, 552 and 1042 operator interfaces with floppy disk storage. It does not apply to the 900 Control Station.
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the "Operator Interface Settings" Dialog Box. Select one of the tabs: Security Save Main Menu Language
Security Tab
This lets you configure, download, and upload security settings for the operator interface. The security configuration is divided into two areas: Operator Security and Engineer Security.
Each of the security features shown in the dialog box offers a different level of security.
Item 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10
Feature Enable Security
Operator Security Code
Set Up Control
Change between Auto and Manual Control Change between Local and Remote Setpoint Disk Utilities/ Data Storage Setpoint Programmer Scheduler - Sequencer operations Recipe operations/Variable Edit Log On/Off
Engineer Security Code
Description
This is a master enabling switch. Click on box to enable security on any of the engineer or operator secured items that are also selected. If this is not selected, no engineer or operator secured items will be secured, even if they are selected.
Enter a 3-digit NUMERIC code that will be used to secure items 3 through 9. 0 disables Operator Security
Click to secure access to setup items. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
Click to secure loop mode AUTO/MANUAL operation Click off to allow unrestricted access
Click to secure changing between Local and Remote Setpoints. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
Click to secure access to disk utilities, data storage controls, and load data storage settings. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
Click to secure Setpoint Program/Scheduler/Sequencer operation. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
Click to secure recipe and variable edit operation. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
Click to secure Log On/Off operation. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
This is a higher level of security than the operator security code because it secures access to "off-line" functions such as calibration. Choose a 3-digit code which will be used to secure the item 11 through 13. 0 disables Engineering Security
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
75
November 2019
Display Worksheet
Item 11
Feature Unit Setup
12
Function Block Edit
13
Edit Menus
Description
Click to secure Set Mode, Set Time and Date, Set Security, Comm Ports, Self-Tests, Calibrate AI, Calibrate AO. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
Click to secure Edit Device Control and HOA EDIT displays. Click off to allow unrestricted access.
Click to secure Edit Device Control and HOA operate display Edit menus. Click off to allow unrestricted access
Save tab The Save tab is available for Rev. 2.0 or later configurations. Prevents unauthorized saves by specifying which items can be saved to the controller's pool. Recipes Setpoint Profiles Schedules Sequences
Main Menu tab The Main Menu tab is available for Rev. 2.0 or later configurations. Specify which items appear on the OI main menu: Recipes SP Programmers SP Schedulers Sequencers Loops Alarms/Events/Diags Summary Displays Unit Setup Disk Utilities Data Storage Log Off
Language tab Specify the language for all OI menus.
76
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
O/I File Names for Disk Storage
Display Worksheet O/I File Names for Disk Storage
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the OI File Names dialog box. You can configure up to 25 file name roots (6-characters) for use by the operator interface in disk storage. The Operator Interface lets you choose a name root and append it with a 2-digit number. Then a 3character extension is automatically added to create a filename for the disk storage functions. Please use DOS format File Names. The first several names listed in the dialog box are defaults and can be changed. Click on a box and enter a file name.
Start Up Display Configuration
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Start Up Display Configuration dialog box.
This selection lets you enter Title Text and Comment Text for your start up display. The "Start Up
display" is the first screen displayed following start up and is not associated with any display button.
This same text is also viewed on the OI's Logoff Display.
Configuration Procedure 1. Enter a title on the Startup display. The title can be up to 2 lines in length but there is a maximum of 12 characters per line. 2. Enter a text message on the Startup display. The message can be up to 4 lines in length but there is a maximum of 24 characters per line.
Example
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
77
November 2019
Message Display Configuration
Display Worksheet Message Display Configuration
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Message Display Configuration dialog box.
This selection lets you configure 10 pages of Help Message Displays.
Configuration Procedure 1. Select a page from the drop-down menu or navigate to the desired page using the Forward/Reverse buttons on the top of the dialog box. 2. Enter a title text for the display. The title can be one line in length but there is a maximum of 24 characters per line. 3. Enter a message text for the display. The message can be up to 11 lines in length for each page but there is a maximum of 32 characters per line.
Example
Unlock the Worksheets
Opens the "Unlock Worksheets" dialog box.
Enter the password in the field and then, press "UNLOCK". How to add/change worksheet protection.
78
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25 November 2019
Data Storage Data Storage Overview
10. Data Storage
Note: This section applies to models 551, 552 and 1042 operator interfaces with floppy disk storage. It does not apply to the 900 Control Station. Please refer to the Station Designer User Guide, 51-52-25149 for support of the 900 Control Station.
Data Storage Overview
The Data Storage feature provides background storage of process information on a storage device for analysis by an off-line computer equipped with Honeywell data analysis software. Data stored files cannot be reviewed from the operator interface. The instrument can support both continuous and discontinuous (batching) modes of the following storage types:
Trends - Two Trend groups of up to 12 points each can be stored. Floppy disk capacity for trends is inversely proportional to the number of trend points and the storage time interval (that is, the time between trend samples). For example, when storing 2 trend groups of 12 points each at a storage interval of 2 seconds, the storage device will be filled in a few hours. Conversely, when storing 1 trend group of 3 points at a storage interval of 30 minutes, the storage device could take several months to be filled. Point Log (unit data samples) - A point log file to take a "snapshot" of process data for up to 12 points is also provided. Point log samples can be scheduled to occur at a user-specified time synchronized to the controller's Real Time Clock (RTC) or by a digital event in the controller. The maximum sample rate for point log data is 60 seconds per sample. The Point log file has a maximum capacity of between 2000 and 5000 records per file. Alarms - Alarm recording is available to store on and off alarm actions. Alarm data includes the point tag, a 16-character point description, and the time and date of alarm occurrence. The Alarm file has a capacity of between 150 and 1500 records per file. Events - Digital event recording is also available to store on and off transitions of digital events in the controller. Event data includes the point tag, a 16-character point description, and the time and date of event occurrence. An Event file has a capacity of between 150 and 1500 records per file. Setpoint Programs/Schedules, instrument configurations, recipes, variables, diagnostics, and calibrations are not part of the Data Storage feature.
Data Storage Conventions
Storage Modes Trends, Point Log, and Alarms/Events can be stored in Continuous or Batch modes. In addition, Point Log can be stored in On Command mode.
Mode Off Continuous Batch
On Command
Description
No data will be collected
Data is sampled at the storage interval
Data is sampled at the storage interval, but also a Batch Enable Signal separates the sampled data into numbered batches. Batch #1 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends when the signal turns off. Batch #2 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends when the signal turns off, etc. No batch mode data is collected while the Batch Enable Signal is off. The Batch Enable Signal does not affect data being stored as Continuous or On Command.
Point Log data is sampled on each off-to-on transition of the Point Log Enable Signal.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
79
November 2019
Data Storage Data Storage Conventions
Storage intervals When data storage is enabled, samples are taken at regular intervals known as the storage intervals. These intervals can be from a few seconds to 30 minutes. Each data type has its own storage interval. For example:
Trends can be stored using one interval (like 5 seconds), Point Log using another interval (like 10 per day), and Alarms/Events (stored as they occur). Or, they can all use the same interval. It depends on how data storage has been configured. In Continuous and Batch modes, the storage interval determines how often data is sampled and stored: For trends, data is first sampled when storage is enabled and again at equally spaced intervals thereafter. For example, if trend storage is enabled at 2:03 p.m. and the interval is 10 minutes, trend storage occurs at 2:03, 2:13, 2:23, etc. until storage is disabled. For Point Log, data is first sampled after storage is enabled but not until the programmed Start Time. Data is sampled at equally spaced intervals after the Start Time. For example, suppose the Start Time is 3:00 p.m. and the storage interval is 10 minutes. If storage is enabled at 2:03 p.m., the first sample will occur at 3:00 and every 10 minutes thereafter. If storage is disabled at 3:35 and enabled at 3:42, storage will resume at 3:50. Notice that the interval is synchronized to the Start Time. Alarm/Events are logged on occurrence with time and date (No interval) In On Command mode for Point Log, there is no storage interval or Start Time. A single sample of Point Log data is taken when the Point Log Enable changes from off (disable) to on (enable).
How Storage is Enabled Data collection may be started through key actions from the operator interface keyboard or from digital status signals from the controller. An "S" in the status line of the operator interface display indicates active storage. [For detailed information refer to Data Storage Enable Conditions]
Disk Capacity The disk capacity (in time) is calculated and displayed once all storage initialization is complete. This eliminates the need for manual calculations and gives the operator the exact duration of the disk. All file types in the data storage feature may be configured to stop collecting data when the file is full or to continue in a circular storage mode (roll-over) where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected. When roll-over is not selected, a disk full warning indication is provided in the status line of the display. The configurator, as required, may change the percent full limit. A storage buffer in the operator interface allows changing the disk media without the loss of process data.
80
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Data Storage Data Storage Conventions
File Extensions The following File Extensions are used for the ControlEdge HC900 Controller's Data Storage output files: LNT for Trend Files LNP for Point Log Files LNA for Alarm Files LNE for Event Files
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
81
November 2019
Data Storage Data Storage Enable Conditions
Data Storage Enable Conditions
How storage is enabled Data Storage Enable/disable is an Operator Interface function. If a schedule is developed in the software, all storage is automatically enabled.
Enable controls The figure below shows the controls that must be enabled for each storage mode and data type. The left side shows the three data types and their possible storage modes (only one storage mode is in effect for any data type). The arrows show the conditions required for that storage to take place. For example, trend batch storage requires: the Trend Storage Control to be on (enabled at configuration if any signal is selected for storage i.e. Signal Enable = NONE), the Batch Command Control to be on (enabled at configuration), and the Data Storage Control to be enabled (enabled at Operator Interface). Notice that the Batch Command Control applies only to batch storage mode.
Three Levels of Enabling
There are three levels of Data Storage Enable: Data Storage Disable Signal (Operator Interface) See Note 1. Data Type Enable Signals Batch Command Enable Signal
Note 1. Since any storage schedules loaded into the system automatically enables storage, the operator interface can disable storage.
82
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Data Storage Data Storage Enable Conditions
Data Type Enable Signals
This level of control is the Data Type Enable Signal. Each data type (trends, point log, and alarms/events) has its own Enable Signal that can either be configured as a digital signal on the Designer, or if not configured as a digital signal (NONE selected on Designer Data Storage Configuration), it will appear on the Storage Control menu on the operator interface For example, if the Trend Enable Signal is configured as a digital signal in the Designer Data Storage Configuration, it will not appear on the Storage Control menu on the operator interface. This is done to avoid having two conflicting sources for the enable signal. When a digital signal is not used, the Trend enable signal is set to enable when the configuration is loaded. The Trends can then be disabled from the Operator Interface. The Enable Signal has two functions for Point Log storage. In Continuous and Batch modes, it enables Point Log storage to begin at the Start Time and at every storage interval thereafter. In On Command mode, when it changes from off (disable) to on (enable), it causes a single sample of Point Log data to be stored at that moment. (See Point Log Storage Enable Conditions)
Batch Command Enable Signal
This level of control is the Batch Command. It is a single control signal that starts and stops storage for all data types configured for batch storage. It does not affect Continuous or On Command storage. If the Batch Signal is configured as a digital signal in the Designer Data Storage Configuration, it will not appear on the Storage Control menu on the Operator Interface. This is done to avoid having two conflicting sources for the signal. When a digital signal is not used and Batch storage has been selected, the Batch command signal is set to Stop. Batches can be started from the Operator Interface.
Storage Enable Conditions
Trend Storage Enable Conditions
The figure below shows examples of Trend Storage Enable Conditions. Notice that Continuous Trend storage occurs unless Trend Disable or Data Storage Disable is selected. For Batch Trend storage, notice that Trend enable/disable, Data Storage enable/disable must be set to enable and Batch command must be Start.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
83
November 2019
Data Storage Data Storage Enable Conditions
Point Log Storage Enable Conditions The figure below shows examples of Point Log Storage Enable conditions. Notice that it occurs unless Point Log Disable or Data Storage Disable is selected. For Batch Point Log storage, notice that all three enables must be on. The figure shows that storage does not actually occur until the Start Time occurs, and then at every Storage Interval thereafter. For On Command Point Log storage, notice the samples are taken the instant Point Log Enable is enabled but not at intervals.
84
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Data Storage Data Storage Configuration Access
Alarm/Event Storage Enable Conditions
The figure below shows examples of Alarm/Event Enable conditions. Notice that Continuous Alarm/Event storage occurs unless Alarm/Event Disable and Data Storage Disable is selected. For Batch Alarm/Event storage, all three enables must be on.
1: Although Alarm Storage is active during the specified time periods, Alarm records will only be saved on active transitions of the alarm status. If no alarm occurs during the active period, the data for that period will be blank.
Data Storage Configuration Access
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Data Storage Configuration dialog box. This facility allows you to configure groups of data that will be stored to the Operator interface's data storage device. This process history can be a valuable source of information to analyze process operations quality and upsets. The groups are configured in Designer and downloaded as part of the configuration. You can also create a new data storage file (.dss) separate from the configuration. On the File menu, select New, Data Storage. Select a tab at the top of the dialog box to access a specific Data Storage Configuration dialog box. Click on a button below for specific Data Storage Configuration Instructions.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
85
November 2019
Data Storage Create/Edit Data Storage File
Create/Edit Data Storage File
Creates/edits a data storage file (.DSS). File can be downloaded to the controller.
Step/Item Select File, Open.
OR Select File, New. Select Data Storage tab. Select Data Storage. THEN Select a Reference Configuration.
Trend Point Log Alarm/Event
Pre-initialize Disk
Print Save Download
Action/Description Let's you choose a .DSS file to edit. After selecting file the Data Storage Editor appears.
"Choose a new file type" box appears. Data Storage button appears. The Data Storage Editor appears.
A data storage file must have a configuration to give it context. Select an open configuration from the pull-down list. If none available, select Open Configuration to open one. The configuration will open. Click back to Data Storage Editor and select the reference configuration. Trend setup. Point Log setup. Alarms/Events setup. Prepares zip disk for data storage. Select this to avoid the long initialization time on the operator interface. Prints the data storage settings. Saves the data storage file as .DSS file. Downloads data storage file to the controller.
Trend Storage Configuration
Trend storage will provide the following:
Number of Files: Points per Trend: Storage Modes: Storage Interval:
External Control:
2 maximum 12 maximum, Analog or Digital Off, Batch, Continuous 2, 5, 10, 20,30,40, 50 seconds 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 minutes Digital Tagged Signal Start/Stop of both Trends
Configuration Procedure Select the "TREND" tab on the "Data Storage Configuration" dialog box.
Active Field
Batch Enable Signal
Description
This signal starts and stops storage for Trends configured for "Batch" storage. It does not affect "Continuous" storage selection. From the pull-down menu, select: NONE Batch is started/stopped only through the operator interface's Data Storage Control Menu (defaults to Stop on configuration download)
86
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Data Storage Trend Storage Configuration
Active Field
Group Title File name Tag List
Selected Tag List Storage Intervals
Data Type Enable Signals
Storage Mode Rollover
Warning Level
Description ANY DIGITAL TAG Batch is started/stopped only through the on/off state of the selected Digital Signal. It will not appear on the operator interface's data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Data Storage Enable, refer to "Data Storage Enable Conditions"
Use the pull-down menu and select a Trend Group for configuration.
Enter a Group Title. There is a maximum of 24 characters (Note: This is not displayed on the Operator Interface. It only serves as a reminder for the user.)
Enter a File Name. There is a maximum of 8 Alpha Numeric characters. (DOS File Name restrictions)
From the Tag List drop-down menu, select the type of signals you want the tag list to display.
Click on a Tag Name and click ADD>>. The tag name will be added to the "Selected Tags" list.
Scaling Signals Scale each tag selected for High and Low values for the Trend Display. Click on the "Scale High" and "Scale Low" fields and enter the value. To delete a signal tag, click on a tag and click Delete.
Storage Interval From the Storage Interval drop-down menu, select a storage interval of from 2 seconds to 30 minutes. When Data Storage is enabled, samples will be taken at the interval selected here. Refer to Storage Intervals in Storage Conventions
This enable signal turns storage on and off for trends. From the pull-down menu, select: NONE Trend Storage Enable is started/stopped only through the operator interface's Data Storage Control Menu (defaults to Enable on configuration download), or, ANY DIGITAL TAG Trend Storage is started/stopped only through the on/off state of the selected Digital Signal. It will not appear on the operator interface's data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Trend Storage Enable, refer to "Trend Storage Enable Conditions".
From the pull-down menu, select a Storage Mode. Refer to "Data Storage Conventions" for mode definitions.
Click this box to allow data storage to continue collecting data in a circular storage mode where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected. Clear this box to allow data storage to stop collecting data when the file is full. You can configure a Warning Level for Disk Full %.
If you do not select rollover, enter a percent in the appropriate box.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
87
November 2019
Data Storage Point Log Storage Configuration
Point Log Storage Configuration
Point Log storage will provide the following:
Number of Files: Points per File: Storage Modes: Storage Interval: (all relative to start time)
External Control:
One
12 maximum, Analog or Digital
Off, Batch, Continuous, On Command
1 to 59 minutes, one minute increments 1 to 23 hours, one hour increments 1 to 30 days, one day increments Once month, same day of each month
Digital Tagged signal - start/stop storage to file - On Demand sampling
Configuration Procedure Select the "POINT LOG" tab on the "Data Storage Configuration" dialog box.
Active Field Batch Enable Signal
File name File Record Limit Tag List
Selected Tag List
Data Type Enable Signals
Description
This signal starts and stops storage for Point Logs configured for "Batch" storage. It does not affect "Continuous" or "On Command" storage selections. From the pull-down menu, select: NONE Batch is started/stopped only through the operator interface's Data Storage Control Menu (defaults to Stop on configuration download) ANY DIGITAL TAG Batch is started/stopped only through the on/off state of the selected Digital Signal. It will not appear on the operator interface's data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Data Storage Enable, refer to "Data Storage Enable Conditions"
Enter a File Name. There is a maximum of 8 Alpha Numeric characters. (DOS File Name restrictions)
Enter a File Record Limit number of between 2000 and 5000.
From the Tag List drop-down menu, select the type of signals you want the tag list to display.
Click on a Tag Name and click ADD>>. The tag name will be added to the "Selected Tags" list.
Scaling Signals Scale each tag selected for High and Low values for the Point Log Display. Click on the "Scale High" and "Scale Low" fields and enter the value. To delete a signal tag, click on a tag and click Delete.
This enable signal turns storage on and off for Point Logs. From the pull-down menu, select: NONE Point Log Storage Enable is started/stopped only through the operator interface's Data Storage Control Menu (defaults to Enable on configuration download), or,
88
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Data Storage Point Log Storage Configuration
Active Field
Storage Mode Storage Interval
Start Time
Rollover Warning Level
Description
ANY DIGITAL TAG Point Log Storage is started/stopped only through the on/off state of the selected Digital Signal. It will not appear on the operator interface's data Storage Control Menu For detailed information concerning Trend Storage Enable, refer to "Point Log Storage Enable Conditions".
From the pull-down menu, select a Storage Mode. Refer to "Data Storage Conventions" for mode definitions.
NOTE: For On Command storage mode, there is no storage interval or start time. (They are not used.)
Click on "Change". The "Storage Interval" dialog box will appear. Click on the radio button for Minutes, Hours, or Days
and select a storage interval from the Edit box. Or, click on the radio button for "Once a Month". Click OK Refer to Storage Intervals in Storage Conventions
NOTE: For On Command storage mode, there is no storage interval or start time. (They are not used.)
Click on "Change". The "Change Time" dialog box will appear. In the Edit box in each field, select a start time. Click OK. Refer to Storage Intervals in Storage Conventions
Click this box to allow data storage to continue collecting data in a circular storage mode where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected. Clear this box to allow data storage to stop collecting data when the file is full. You can configure a Warning Level for Disk Full %.
If you do not select rollover, enter a percent in the appropriate box.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
89
November 2019
Data Storage Alarm/Event Storage Configuration
Alarm/Event Storage Configuration
Alarm/Event storage will provide the following:
Number of Files: Records per File: Data Types:
Storage Modes: External Control:
One each 150 to 1500 records per file All Alarms Time/Date, On/Off All Events Time/Date, On/Off Off, Batch, Continuous Digital Tagged Signal Start/Stop storage to file
Configuration Procedure Select the "Alarm/Event" tab on the "Data Storage Configuration" dialog box.
Active Field
Description
Batch Enable Signal
This signal starts and stops storage for Alarm/Events configured for "Batch" storage. It does not affect "Continuous" storage selections.
From the pull-down menu, select:
NONE Batch is started/stopped only through the operator interface's Data Storage Control Menu (defaults to Stop on configuration download)
ANY DIGITAL TAG Batch is started/stopped only through the on/off state of the selected Digital Signal. It will not appear on the operator interface's data Storage Control Menu
For detailed information concerning Data Storage Enable, refer to "Data Storage Enable Conditions"
Alarm File Name Enter a File Name. There is a maximum of 8 Alpha Numeric characters. (DOS File Name restrictions)
Alarm File Record Limit
Enter an Alarm File Record Limit number of from 150 to 1500.
Event File Name Enter a File Name. There is a maximum of 8 characters
Event File Record Limit
Enter an Event File Record Limit number of from 150 to 1500.
Data Type Enable Signal
This enable signal turns storage on and off for Alarm Events.
From the pull-down menu, select:
NONE Alarm/Event Storage Enable is started/stopped only through the operator interface's Data Storage Control Menu (defaults to Enable on configuration download), or,
ANY DIGITAL TAG Alarm/Event Storage is started/stopped only through the on/off state of the selected Digital Signal. It will not appear on the operator interface's data Storage Control Menu
For detailed information concerning Trend Storage Enable, to "Alarm/Event Storage Enable Conditions"
Storage Mode
From the pull-down menu, select a Storage Mode. Refer to "Data Storage Conventions" for mode definitions.
Rollover
Click this box to allow data storage to continue collecting data in a circular storage mode where the oldest data is discarded as new data is collected.
Clear this box to allow data storage to stop collecting data when the file is full. You can configure a Warning Level for Disk Full %.
Warning Level
If you do not select rollover, enter a percent in the appropriate box.
90
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet FB Worksheet Overview
11. Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet FB Worksheet Overview
Function Block Diagram Worksheets let you build your General Steps to Build a Control /Safety Strategy graphically right on the User Interface Overview. It provides a full complement of SAMA-style symbols that we call Function blocks that can be softwired. " to each other. It also includes Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. tag, generation capability for resident control data that can be linked to displays and other software programs.
The Function Block Diagram Worksheet has a Toolbar, to launch dialog boxes to configure:
· Worksheet Properties - Enter a configuration name and description in the appropriate fields. · Alarm Group Configuration · Event List Configuration · Block Order
The toolbar also contains icons for Cut, Copy, and Paste; Zoom Level, and an Icon to toggle a grid on and off on the worksheet. The Function Blocks are listed in the appropriate Worksheet Toolbar. (Function Block Menu Tree). You can Drag and Drop the function blocks from the menu onto the worksheet and softwire them to create a control and/or safety strategy. See Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. Diagram rules.
Note that with Controller Rev 6.0 and higher, there is now the concept of "Safety" function-blockdiagram worksheets (vs. the regular "Process" function-block-diagram worksheets) for controllers that support it. The Safety worksheets allow definition of "Safety-enabled" configurations to run on SILcompliant controller models. Within Safety worksheets, certain restrictions at both configuration and run-time are enforced to ensure safety compliance is achieved.
The "Process" worksheet is the same as the "FBD" worksheet as they were called prior to Rev 6.0.
Note that a "Safety" function-block-diagram worksheet may be simply called "Safety worksheet", and a "Process" function-block-diagram worksheet may be simply called "Process worksheet", for purposes of brevity. Also, a function block that is placed on a Safety worksheet may be simply called a "Safety block".
When a new configuration is created, the Safety worksheet tab will only appear if the controller model and revision selected is a SIL-compliant model/revision.
· Up to 20/40 worksheets per configuration depending on controller model A total of up to 400 Function Block Pages (20 x 20) for non-SIL controllers C30, C50
· A total of up to 1600 Function Block Pages (80 x 20) for non-SIL controllers C70, C70R, C75 · A total of up to 800 Function Block Pages (20 x 20 x 2) for SIL controllers C30S, C50S · A total of up to 3200 Function Block Pages (80 x 20 x 2) for SIL controllers C70S, C75S
There is extended use of Right Mouse Click.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
91
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet FBD Configuration Toolbar
FBD Configuration Toolbar
Click on ICON to open the dialog box.
ICON
Function
Print Worksheet
Dialog Box Comments Click to print the active worksheet. It opens the "Print" dialog box for printing.
Append Process Worksheet / Append Safety Worksheet Delete Process Worksheet / Delete Safety Worksheet Reorder Process Worksheets / Reorder Safety Worksheets FBD Worksheet Properties
Cut
Copy
Adds a new Process or Safety block diagram. If selected, a new worksheet will be created and a new sub-tab for it will appear at the bottom of the diagram window. The new diagram reference will be placed in the File Browser. Click on the diagram name in the File Browser to edit the name.
Click to delete the selected Process / Safety Worksheet highlighted on the File Browser. This will delete all the items in the worksheet.
Opens the Worksheet order dialog box. Allows you to change the order of the worksheets as they appear at the bottom of the Worksheet area. Click on worksheet name and use the increment-decrement buttons at the top of the dialog box to change the worksheet order.
Type in a title and description of your FBD Worksheet. The title will appear in the File Browser and on the associated FB Worksheets tab at the bottom of the diagram.
Moves the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places them on the clipboard. Indicated by a red dotted line. Upon pasting the items, all links to them (e.g., display references, Modbus address, recipes) are preserved as if they were moved, they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy.
Copies the currently selected FBD diagram items from the current Function Block diagram and places it on the clipboard. Indicated by a blue dotted line.
Paste
Find Item Zoom Out
Places the contents of the clipboard containing FBD diagram items onto the Function Block Diagram at the location determined by the blinking insertion point caret. This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty. Cut and pasted items maintain their links (e.g., display references, Modbus addresses, recipes), they are not deleted and pasted as a new copy.
If you paste a cut function block and soft wires to the same or different worksheet in the same configuration, the soft wires will be dangling (unconnected) and you are asked to specify how you want to resolve dangling soft wires.
Allows you find an Item on the FBD worksheet. Opens the "Find Item" dialog box.
You can "zoom out" to see more of the page at a reduced size. Zoom levels of 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, and 150%.
Zoom In
You can "zoom in" to return items to normal size. Zoom levels of 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, and 150%.
92
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
ICON
Function Grid
Alarms
Events
Block Tag Order Unlock Worksheets
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet How to Add a New FBD Worksheet
Dialog Box Comments Let you place a grid in the FBD Diagram. This can aid in the placement of items on the diagram.
Click to open the "Alarms Group Configuration" Dialog Box. It lets you configure alarm points. See "Alarm Group Configuration" Click to open the "Configure Event List" Dialog Box. It lets you configure events in the controller. See "Event List Configuration"
Click to show drop down menu. Let's you change the execution order of the function blocks. Select Execution Order, Fast Logic Order, or Tag Order.
Click to open the "Unlock Worksheets" dialog box. Enter a password and click "Unlock" to unlock all worksheets.
How to Add a New FBD Worksheet
1. Right click on the FBD Worksheet name on the Browser. Select "Append New Worksheet", or 2. Select the "New FBD Worksheet" icon on the Function Block Diagram Toolbar (far left), or 3. From the Edit menu on the Main Drop-down menus, select "Append New Worksheet". 4. A new worksheet will appear at the bottom of the Function Block Diagram list in the browser
and a blank worksheet will be place on the Designer. 5. Right click on the new Worksheet name in the browser or double-click on the worksheet's tab
then, select Properties and set the new worksheet properties. 6. For each worksheet added, a tab will appear at the bottom of the Function Block Worksheet
area with the name of the worksheet that was set in "Worksheet Properties" on it. Use the scroll bar for access to a specific worksheet tab.
How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets
Use the Worksheet Tabs For each worksheet added, a tab will appear at the bottom of the Function Block Worksheet area with the name of the worksheet that was set in "Worksheet Properties" on it. If necessary, use the scroll bar to access other worksheet tabs. Click on the tab to select the associated Worksheet.
Use the File Browser The File Browser, located on the top left side of the Worksheet, is a movable window listing opened files. It allows you to move quickly between files and worksheets. To select a particular Worksheet, double-click the Function Block Worksheet name.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
93
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets
Use the Connection Traceback
Access the Trace Window from the Main Menu Toolbar Or, from the View Menu on the main menu.
The Trace Window provides a list of all blocks/pins you have traced and lists : Block ID Tag Name I/O Pin Name Worksheet name
The last trace is on the top of the list. Selecting a function block from the list will activate the associated function block worksheet.
Use the "Find Item" feature From the "Edit" Menu on the main menu select "Find". It lets you search for an item on the FBD Worksheet. Select the item type from the "Show" drop down menu on the "Find Item" dialog box. Select an item from the "Item" drop-down menu. Click on the Worksheet in the "Find Results" field and the associated worksheet will be selected and the Tag, Variable, or Function Block will be highlighted on the worksheet.
94
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Keyboard Navigation
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Keyboard Navigation
Press LEFT ARROW RIGHT ARROW UP ARROW DOWN ARROW END HOME PAGE DOWN PAGE UP
CTRL+LEFT ARROW CTRL+RIGHT ARROW CTRL+UP ARROW CTRL+DOWN ARROW CTRL+PAGE DOWN CTRL+PAGE UP
To Scroll worksheet to the left Scroll worksheet to the right Scroll worksheet up Scroll worksheet down Go to the end of last page Go to the beginning of first page Go to the next worksheet page Go to the previous worksheet page
Go to the end of last page Go to the beginning of first page Go to the top of the page Go to the bottom of the page Go to the next worksheet tab Go to the previous worksheet tab
Other keyboard functions If necessary, you can use the standard keystroke conventions to move around. ALT used together with the underlined letter in text labeling an object lets you select that object. TAB select next field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates SHIFT+TAB select previous field or object in dialog boxes and configuration templates UP ARROW previous choice in the field DOWN ARROW next choice in the field ALT+DOWN ARROW opens a drop-down list box
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
95
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Traceback Window
Traceback Window
Overview This feature helps you find problems with soft-wire and signal connections between Function Blocks. For Example: If you are testing a configuration that you've built and want to know why a Digital Output is ON when it should be OFF, you can search for the source of the Input Signal. Traceback is useful for finding the analog or digital source signal. Trace Window
Access the Trace Window from the Main Menu Toolbar Or, from the View Menu on the main menu.
It is a dockable, sizeable window. The Trace Window provides a list of all blocks/pins you have traced and lists:
Block ID Tag Name I/O Pin Name Worksheet name
Trace Window Update Each time you perform a Trace, the window will update with a new pair of block/pins. The first item is the signal source, the second item is the signal destination. Select any of the rows in the Traceback window to recall the diagram to display the selected block. The last trace is on the top of the list.
Right Mouse Click Procedure to Trace Signals 1. Select a Function Block of interest. 2. Right Mouse click on any INPUT pin. 3. Select "TRACE". Traceback will "find" the source of the connection you selected and refresh the FBD view with that block visible (Highlighted) - even if the other side of the connection is on a different worksheet. The Output pin of the block (the signal source) will be displayed in RED. 4. From that block, repeat the traceback to another block and another block, etc. 5. Use the Traceback list to view your Traceback history. 6. You can clear the Trace List by pressing the bar at the top of the window.
96
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Resolve Dangling Soft Wires
Resolve Dangling Soft Wires
When you cut a function block(s) and any connected soft wires, after you paste the selection onto the same or different worksheet in the same configuration, the pasted soft wires are left dangling (unconnected). To resolve these dangling soft wires a dialog box appears with the following choices. Delete dangling soft wires. Select this to delete the soft wires from the pasted function block(s). The soft
wire connections prior to the cut will be broken. Split dangling soft wires using signal tags. Select this to restore the pre-cut connections using
automatically created signal tags. The function blocks will again be connected not with soft wires but with signal tags. Split dangling soft wires using page connectors (available in configuration revisions 2.x or higher). Select this to restore the pre-cut connections using automatically created page connectors. The function blocks will again be connected not with soft wires but with page connectors. The last two choices are selectable only if sufficient quantities of signal tags or page connectors remain. ATTENTION: The automatically created signal tags or page connectors can sometimes overlap or hide the original connectors so check behind them, don't assume the previous connectors were replaced.
Examples Before the cut:
After pasting on a different worksheet and Delete dangling soft wires:
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
97
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Resolve Dangling Soft Wires
After pasting on a different worksheet and Split dangling soft wires using signal tags:
After pasting on a different worksheet and Split dangling soft wires using page connectors:
98
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet
How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet
On the FBD worksheet lets you find an item and all places it is used (such as a signal tag used multiple times). Access From Edit menu or by right clicking an item on the FBD worksheet. Opens the "Find Item" dialog box.
From the "Show" drop-down menu, choose an item type
From the "Item" drop-down menu, choose an item. If you already right clicked on an item in the FBD worksheet it will be displayed here.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
99
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet
The Find Results" field will indicate the Worksheet where the item is located. Click on the Worksheet name and you will jump to the item on the worksheet.
Double click on an item on the worksheet to open the "properties" dialog box. The Tag or Variable Number or Function Block name will appear on the dialog box banner.
How To Find and Replace Item on the FDB Worksheet
Find/Replace Item (Ctrl+H)
On the FBD worksheet lets you find an item and all places it is used and replace the item names used. Note: The replace functionality is not applicable for protected worksheets. From the Edit menu, click Find/Replace Tag.
1. In the Find what box, type the tag name of the variable, signal tag, page connector, or function block.
100
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet How To Find and Replace Item on the FDB Worksheet
2. Click Find. The window displays all places where it is used. 3. In the Replace with box, type the new name to be used 4. Do one of the following:
· Replace: Name of the selected item is replaced. Select an item from the list and click replace. The Tag, Variable, or Function Block will be highlighted on the Function Block Diagram.
· Replace All: Name of all items is replaced. The new tag name is applied to the selected items. 5. In the following example, the string 'VAR' is replaced with string 'PRO'. For example, Before replace:
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
101
November 2019
After replace:
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet How to Change a FBD's Worksheet Properties
How to Change a FBD's Worksheet Properties
1. Right click on the new Worksheet name in the browser and select "Properties", or 2. Double click on the worksheet tab, or 3. Select the "Properties" icon on the Function Block Diagram Toolbar (3rd from left), or 4. From the Edit menu on the Main Drop-down menus, select " Worksheet Properties". 5. Enter a Title (worksheet name will appear on the File Browser and worksheet tabs) and
Description (enhance the Worksheet name with descriptive text) in the appropriate fields of the dialog box. The descriptive name appears on the FBD Report Printouts. Reference "Print Report"
How to Change the Worksheet Order
1. The Worksheet Order dialog box lists the FBD worksheets as they appear on the tabs at the bottom of the Function Block Worksheet area.
2. In the dialog box, click on the Worksheet name that you want to reorder 3. Change the worksheet order using the Increment/decrement buttons at the top right of the
worksheet order dialog box 4. The tabs will be reordered at the bottom of the worksheet area.
How to Delete a FBD Worksheet
1. Right click on the new Worksheet name in the browser and select "Delete Worksheet", or 2. Select the "Delete" icon on the Function Block Diagram Toolbar (2nd from left), or 3. From the Edit menu on the Main Drop-down menus, select " Delete Worksheet". The
selected worksheet will be deleted.
102
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet How to Add Worksheet Protection
How to Add Worksheet Protection
Introduction
The ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer provides an optional configuration Worksheet protection. New files default to "No Protection". Worksheets can be protected on individual basis where all protected worksheets use the same password. A user has limited access to protected worksheets.
Protected Worksheet Type View Worksheet?
Edit Worksheet?
Controller
YES
NO
Display
YES
NO
Function Blocks
NO
NO
Modbus Map
YES
NO
Protected Worksheets: · can be "unlocked". Protection is disabled, but not removed from the file. If you save the file, the worksheet protection will be "locked" when the file is reopened. · can have their passwords changed. In order to change a password, you will need to know the current password. · Can have their protection "removed". Removing the protection is permanent. If you save the file, the worksheet will not be protected when the file is reopened.
Protection Symbols There are three symbols that could appear on the "Worksheet Protection" tab that indicate the level of protection for the file:
= No protection is in place, worksheets are 'Unlocked"
= Protection exists, and the worksheets are "Unlocked".
= Protection exists, and the worksheets are "Locked".
Protecting a Worksheet When There is No Protection
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the "Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Change Protection" button.
3
Click on the box next to the worksheet names you want to protect, then select "DONE" button.
4
Click on the "Lock" button to setup a password.
5
Enter a password for the file in the "New Password" field (up to 14 characters).
Important note: Password shall not have Chinese characters
6
Re-enter the password in the "Confirm New Password" field.
7
Click "OK".
8
In version 4.4 and greater click "Disable Master Password" if you wish to prevent others from overiding
password protection by getting a master password from Honeywell. IMPORTANT NOTE: If you forget
your password after Disable Master Password has been selected you will not be able to view any
protected worksheets.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
103
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet How to Add Worksheet Protection
To Change a Password Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Change Password" button.
3
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
4
Enter a New Password in the appropriate field.
Important note: Password shall not have Chinese characters
5
Confirm the new password in the appropriate field.
6
Click "OK".
To Temporarily Unlock a Worksheet Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Unlock" button.
3
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
4
Click "OK", the worksheets are unprotected
NOTE: the "Controller", "Display", and "Function Block" worksheets also have a toolbar button to unlock worksheets.
To Permanently Remove Worksheet Protection Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
Click on the "Remove Protection" button.
3
Enter the current password in the appropriate field.
4
Click "OK", the worksheets are unprotected.
104
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Alarm Group Configuration
Protecting a Worksheet When Worksheets Protection is Active
Step
Action
1
From the "File" menu, select "Properties", then select the
"Worksheet Protection " tab.
2
"Unlock" the worksheet.
3
Change protection.
4
Select worksheet names, then "DONE".
5
Select "LOCK"
Alarm Group Configuration
opens the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box.
You can also select "Alarms" from: - the Edit Menu on the Main Menu - the FBD Worksheet by dropping an ALMGP block onto the configuration - when you do not have an O/I and do need to use Alarm Group logic in the control strategy)
The Alarm Display Tag Group configuration tab provides a drop list of Alarm groups. You can configure:
· For controller Rev 4.0 or higher: 30 Alarm Groups of 12 alarm points each for a total of 360 alarm points in the controller.
· For lower revisions: 20 Alarm Groups of 12 alarm points each for a total of 240 alarm points. Each group contains a set of selected digital signal tags. An Alarm may be any Digital Signal Tag. All alarms are displayed at the OI. Each alarm point can be configured to generate an E-Mail Notification.
Procedure
1. Select a Display Group from the drop-down menu. Digital signals will be displayed in the "Selected Tags" field.
2. From the "Selected Tags List" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
3. (For Safety-enabled configurations only) From the "Safety Filter" drop-down menu, select the type of tags you wish displayed in the list. The default selection is "ALL".
4. Enter the group title. Use any mix of numbers, letters, and spaces 5. Select a tag then click on ADD, the selected signal tag will be placed in the next available
position in the "Selected Tags" field, OR Select a position in the "Selected Tags" field, then click on INSERT. The selected signal tag will be placed in the position chosen and the other signal tags will reorder as required. 6. Repeat the selection for up to 12 tags for each group. 7. Select a signal in the "Selected Tags" field and click on ALARM DETAILS, and Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. in the Dialog Box. 8. Click OK.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
105
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Alarm Details
Alarm Details
Select a tag in the "Selected Tags" area of the Alarm Group Configuration dialog box, then click on "Alarm Details' button. The Alarm Details dialog box opens and enables you to enter details for the selected tag. The block number and output number are listed across the banner. The Tag number and descriptor is listed in field below the banner.
Details include:
Alarm Priority - used for routing alarms to Email (which Email addresses get which alarms) Each of 3 E-mail address may have any/all alarm priorities assigned to it.
2 - Low Priority Alarm 3 - Medium Priority Alarm 4 - High Priority Alarm 5 - Emergency Alarm (select from the drop-down menu)
E Mail Notification of alarms, by priority, on a point by point basis. (check the box to allow Email notification) The E-mail will be sent: - if an alarm occurs on a point configured to send E-mail. - to any/all of the 3 E-mail addresses that have the associated alarm priority assigned.
Detailed Text - appears on the Operator Interface. (enter 2 lines of detailed text -24 characters max for each line)
Trigger Direction Trigger on ON state means alarm goes ON when triggered by rising edge (the discrete goes offto-on) Trigger on OFF state means alarm goes ON when triggered by falling edge (the discrete goes onto-off) (click on radio button to select)
Alarm Acknowledge - Group acknowledge
Manual Acknowledge - Can be acknowledged by operator. When a manual acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator, it will be indicated as cleared. Use when you want the operator to be able to acknowledge the alarm or see that the alarm was acknowledged and cleared. Auto Acknowledge -When an auto acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator, it will show no indication it was in alarm. Alarm can still be acknowledged by the operator when it is in the alarm state. An alarm point with this attribute will never indicate "clear" status. (click on radio button to select) Note: an alarm will always be stored to the O/I Archive list.
106
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Event List Configuration
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Event List Configuration
on the Operator Panel Worksheet Toolbar opens the Configure Event List dialog box.
You can also select "Events" from: - the Edit Menu on the Main Menu - the FBD Configuration Toolbar, button
· Up to 64 digital signals can be configured as events. · The most recent 150 events will be available for display at the Operator Interface · Events can generate Emails. · From 150 to 1500 event records can be stored on the Operator Interface archive disk. · Each event must have at least one of the following destinations:
Email, OI archive, or OI Display · You can select the events from a list of all digital tags. · A digital signal may be either an Event or an Alarm, but not both
Procedure
1. Enter a Title for the Event list in the "Title" editbox. 2. From the drop-down menu below the "Title" editbox, select the type of tags you want to display
on the tag name list. 3. (For Safety-enabled configurations only) From the "Safety Filter" drop-down menu, select the
type of tags you want to display on the tag name list. 4. Click on each tag name you want included in the list. 5. Click on ADD. The selected tag or variable will be placed in the next available position in the
"Selected Tags List". 6. Select a tag in the list then, click on "Error! Hyperlink reference not valid." button to enter
details for the tag selected. Details include: E Mail Notification Store to O/I Archive List Display on O/I Trigger Direction for ON or OFF state 7. Click OK.
Execution Order
Execution Order is the order in which function blocks are executed in the control strategy. There is a separate execution order for each of the two available scan rates, Normal Scan and Fast Scan. Each function block within a given scan rate is assigned a relative Block Execution Order number. Blocks are executed in increasing order, with blocks having lower execution order numbers being executed before those with higher execution order numbers. The Block Execution Order of each block is shown as a number in the top right-hand corner of the block's graphic on the function block diagram, as shown below.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
107
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Execution Order
In the diagram above, both function blocks have an execution order of 4. This is allowed because the PID104 block is executing at the Normal Scan rate, whereas the QDT105 block is executing at the Fast Scan rate, as indicated by the yellow lightning bolt on the QDT134 graphic.
It should be noted that the Block Execution Order is independent of the Block Number. Both the Block Number and the Block Execution Order are assigned in the sequence in which they are programmed, however, the Block Number must be unique throughout all function blocks, while the Block Execution Order only needs to be unique throughout the function blocks in the same scan rate. The system remembers the last programmed Block Execution Order for both scan rates independently.
You can override the execution order determined by the system during programming. Block Numbers, on the other hand, cannot be reassigned. There are two ways to change the execution order; by assigning a specific Block Execution Order number to a single function block, or by changing the relative execution order of multiple function blocks.
108
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Execution Order
Assigning a Block Execution Order
To change the Block Execution Order of a specific function block on a function block diagram, doubleclick in the top portion of the block's graphic where the Block Number and Block Execution Order are displayed (circled in the diagram below).
This action will display the Change Block Execution Order dialog on top of the function block graphic as shown below.
The block's execution order can be changed by entering a new number in the entry box and clicking on the OK button. You can increase or decrease the block's execution order to any value from 1 to 2100. If you enter a value outside this range an error message will be displayed.
When you click on the OK button the Block Execution Order of the selected function block is set to the new value. Any other function blocks in the same execution rate that have current execution orders equal to or greater than the new value will have their execution order incremented to retain uniqueness. For example, if the Block Execution Order of the PID104 block shown in the diagrams above is changed to 5, the Block Execution Order of the AI107 block will be incremented to 6, but the Block Execution Order of the DI108 block will remain at 5, as shown below.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
109
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Execution Order
When you change a block's execution order in this way, the previous execution order number is not reassigned to another block, but rather it is dropped from the list of used execution order numbers. This can leave gaps in the assigned execution order numbers. A similar situation occurs when a function block is deleted from a diagram. This does not create a problem for block execution, as it is the relative value of the execution order numbers that matter, not the absolute value. It does mean, however, that you can change the Block Execution Order number of a block without actually changing its true execution order if no other function block is assigned a number between the previous and new values.
Changing Relative Execution Order of Multiple Blocks
The relative execution order of one or more function blocks executing at either the Normal Scan or Fast Scan rates may be changed through the Function Block Execution Order dialog. This method has an advantage over the method described above, even for single function blocks, because the absolute values of the assigned execution order numbers does not have to be known and the function blocks from all function block diagrams are displayed together.
The Function Block Execution Order dialog can be accessed in a number of ways as described below. Note that while the same dialog is used to change the execution order of either the Normal Scan or Fast Scan function blocks, there are separate selection methods to pre-populate the dialog's list with the correct function blocks.
Edit Menu
1. Select Edit from the main application menu. 2. Select Block and Tag Order and activate sub-menu. 3. Select either Block Execution Order... or Fast Block Execution Order... to launch
the Function Block Execution Order dialog.
Function Block Diagram Worksheet Toolbar
1. Click on the icon in the Worksheet Toolbar displayed above any Function Block Diagram Worksheet to activate the drop-down menu.
2. Select either Block Execution Order... or Fast Block Execution Order... to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog.
110
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Execution Order
Function Block Diagram Worksheet Context Menu
1. Right-click in any whitespace area of any Function Block Diagram Worksheet to activate the context menu.
2. Select either Block Execution Order... or Fast Block Execution Order... to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog.
Function Block Graphic Context Menu
1. Right-click within the body portion of any normal scan or fast scan function block graphic (not the pins) to activate the context menu.
2. Select either Block Execution Order... or Fast Block Execution Order..., depending on which function block was selected in step 1, to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog.
Worksheet Toolbox Context Menu
1. Click on the Process or Safety tab of the Worksheet Toolbox to display a browser view of the function blocks currently in use.
2. Expand the folder of one of the function block types used in the configuration. 3. Right-click on either the icon or name of any normal scan or fast scan rate function
block to activate the context menu. 4. Select either Block Execution Order... or Fast Block Execution Order...,
depending on which function block was selected in step 3, to launch the Function Block Execution Order dialog.
When one of the above actions is taken, the Function Block Execution Order dialog box is displayed, as shown below. The list box will be populated with all of the function blocks executing at the selected execution rate, Normal Scan or Fast Scan. If there are more function blocks that can be displayed in the list box a vertical scrollbar will be displayed.
· If the dialog is accessed through the function block graphic context menu or the worksheet toolbox context menu, the corresponding function block will be selected in the dialog.
· If the dialog is accessed through the edit menu, worksheet toolbar or the worksheet context menu and a function block has been selected on an active function block diagram worksheet, that function block will be selected in the dialog.
· Otherwise the first function box in the list will be selected in the dialog.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
111
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Execution Order
For controller configurations that support the SIL Safety standard, the function blocks in the Process and Safety segments of the control strategy share the two execution rate systems. As a result, there is no filtering of Process versus Safety function blocks in this dialog, but the location of the function block, either Process or Safety, is shown in the first column. Note that for non SIL configurations there is no Safety portion, so the Process/Safety column shown in the figure above will not be present.
The relative position of the function blocks shown in the dialog list box can be selected and manipulated in a number of ways.
Single Function Block:
· Select by clicking on that function block. · Use the up and down arrows in the list box tile bar to reposition the function block one row at a
time. · Use Drag and Drop by clicking and holding on a block and dragging it to the desired location and
releasing the mouse button. Dragging to the top or bottom of the list box bounds will cause the list to scroll if the scrollbar is visible.
Consecutive Function Blocks:
· Select first function block by clicking and then select the last function block while holding down the Shift key while clicking.
· Use the up and down arrows in the list box tile bar to reposition the group of function blocks one row at a time.
112
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet Event Details
· Use Drag and Drop by clicking on one of the selected function blocks and holding and dragging it to the desired location and releasing the mouse button. Dragging to the top or bottom of the list box bounds will cause the list to scroll if the scrollbar is visible.
Non-Consecutive Function Blocks:
· Select the first function block or consecutive group of function blocks as indicated above. Add additional function blocks by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking.
· Make all of the selected function blocks have a consecutive execution order, starting with the position of the first selected function block, by clicking on the Make Blocks Consecutive button.
· Note that neither the Up and Down arrows in the list box title bar or Drag and Drop work with this selection method.
When all function blocks have been repositioned, click on the OK button to enforce the new execution order, or click on the Cancel button to revert back to the existing execution order. When the new execution order is enforced, the new Block Execution Order numbers will be assigned consecutively starting from 1, so any previous gaps in the execution order numbers will be eliminated.
See also "Tag Order"
Event Details
The Event Details dialog box enables you to enter details for the tag selected when you configure events. The block number and output number are listed across the banner. The Tag name and tag descriptor is listed in field below the banner. Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms. They are considered a lower priority than alarms. Details include:
E Mail Notification of events on a point by point basis. (Check the box to allow Email notification) The E-mail will be sent: - if an event occurs on a point configured to send E-mail. - to any/all of the 3 E-mail addresses that have events assigned. Event priorities are always indicated as "1"
Store to OI Archive List -OI Event File on the data archive disk on an event by event basis Display on OI - presentation on OI Status line and Event Summary display Trigger Direction ON Event on rising edge (Off-to-on transition)
OFF Event on falling edge (off-to-on transition). (click on radio button to select)
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
113
November 2019
E-Mail Notification
Function Block Diagram (FBD) Worksheet E-Mail Notification
opens the E-Mail Notification dialog box. It lets you configure up to three E-Mail addresses per controller configuration for Alarm and Event notification.
There are two tabs on the dialog Box.
General Tab FROM
The Controller name is configured by the builder of the Configuration file [Read Only]
SUBJECT Enter an Event Subject (up to 31 characters) Enter an Alarm Subject (up to 31 characters)
Note: Not configuring `Subject' will cause system to send E-mail with default subject.
To List Tab -
Enter up to 3 configurable E-Mail addresses (32 characters per address). For each Email address check the Alarm/Event priorities you want the E-mail address to receive.
Events do not have multiple priorities like alarms because they are considered at a priority lower than all alarms.
Alarm priorities were set during "Alarm Group Configuration" under "Alarm Details" 2 = Low Priority Alarm 3 = Medium Priority Alarm 4 = High Priority Alarms 5 = Emergency Alarm
The priority of an event is always indicated as "1" - (see Event Configuration)
Attention: See "Set Controller Network Parameters" and follow the wizard to set up a SMTP mail server IP Address.
Examples:
Somebody@somewhere.com receives only priority 5 Alarms (only the check box for "5" is checked
Aperson@somewhere.com receives all Alarms and Events (all 5 boxes are checked)
People@somewhere.com receives only Events (only check box for "1" is checked)
Unlock the Worksheets
opens the "Unlock Worksheets" dialog box.
Enter the password in the field and then, press "UNLOCK".
114
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25 November 2019
Library Functionality Unlock the Worksheets
12. Library Functionality
This functionality helps to export a group of the control logic and thereby save to a location. These groups can be imported in the worksheet whenever required. This saves time spent in recreating the control logics again. It is easy to share and reuse by other users via the designer software.
This functionality provides two features: · Export Library · Import Library
To export control logic group: 1. Open a cde file. 2. Select a portion of the control logic. To do this, left-click and drag over the area that you want to export. The items under the selected area are highlighted by dotted line. 3. Right-click on the selected area and click Export Library. NOTE: Right-click a function block and click Export Library. 4. Type a name for the library and click Save. The library file is saved with file extension as "dlf". The newly add library is added to the Library pane.
NOTE: Do not delete the library file from the computer. It cannot be recovered.
To import control logic group: 1. Open a cde file. 2. Right-click in the worksheet area and click Import Library. Locate the library file and click Open. Or Click the Library page and drag a library file to the worksheet. The Change Item Name window appears. 3. Click Apply to directly copy the library object without any changes. NOTE: The behavior of paste special functionality changes for certain items. See Special_cases_of_paste_special_functionality.
To remove library file: 1. Click the Library tab. 2. Right-click the library file that you want to remove and click Remove Library. This removes the file from the library. However, this file can be recovered as they are not deleted from the local system. To add the library files again, right-click Libraries and click Add Library. Select the file (s) and click Open. The files are added to the library.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
115
November 2019
Library Functionality Change Item Name
NOTE: To select multiple files, hold the SHIFT button and select the library files.
Change Item Name
This window allows finding and replacing any text and adding prefix and suffix to the item names. This helps to maintain uniqueness across the item names.
To change the item name: 1. Select one of the following: · Use Search and Replace: Used to find the tag name of the variable, signal tag, page connector, or function block and replace with a new name. · Use Prefix and Suffix: Appends the strings as prefix and suffix to the tag name of the variable, signal tag, page connector, or function block and replace with a new name. 2. Click Apply to implement the changes.
Tag Name Conflicts There can be conflicts if the names are not unique or if the tag name length exceeds the maximum limit (8 characters for page connectors and 16 characters for other items).
116
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Library Functionality Change Item Name
It is mandatory to resolve all the conflicts to continue with the further tasks. The Actual Tag Name (read only) column provides the present tag name. The Reason for Conflict (read only) column describes the cause for conflict. The Modified Tag Name (read/write) column allows you to provide a new tag name. The tool verifies for uniqueness and updates the Reason for Conflict column.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
117
November 2019
Library Functionality Change Item Name
Special cases of paste special functionality
The following table provides the result of paste special functionality for certain items.
Item Name Write Variable
Write Constant
Read Constants
Write Tune Constant Connectors
Operation Copy the write variable and its associated variable.
Copies the write variable.
Copies the write constant and its associated function block.
Copies the write variable.
Copies the read constants and its associated function block.
Copies the write variable
Copies the write tune constant and its associated function block.
Copies the write tune constant.
Creates the signal tag and connector associated to signal tag in the process sheet. Performs cut operation on the connector and performs paste special in the Safety Sheet. Creates the signal tag and connector associated to page connector in the process sheet Performs cut operation on the connector and performs paste special in the safety sheet.
Result After Paste Special
Linkage between newly created variable and write variable is maintained
Linkage is lost. That is variable number of write variable shall be zero
Linkage between newly created function block and write constant is maintained.
Linkage is lost. That is the target block number of write constant shall be zero
Linkage between newly created function block and read constant is maintained.
Linkage is lost. That is block number of read constant is zero.
Linkage between newly created function block and write tune constant is maintained.
Linkage is lost. That is the target block number of write tune constant is zero.
Error message is displayed as connectors of safety sheet should not have the associated signal tags in the process sheet.
Error message is displayed as connectors of safety sheet should not have the associated page connectors in the process sheet.
118
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Blocks Overview Function Block Definition
13. Function Blocks Overview
Function Block Definition
A Function Block is a unit of software that performs a set of operations on its Input Signals and Function Block parameters and produces Output Signals. These output signals can be configured as inputs to other blocks, whose output parameters can be configured as inputs to other function blocks, and so on. By configuring and connecting all the desired input signals and function block parameters, you develop control strategies for both analog and digital operations. A function block may represent a physical input or output, several inputs or outputs, an internal calculation or an internal function such as a PID algorithm. Block numbers 1-100 are reserved for specific status blocks.
Function Block Identification
Each Function Block has a type identification label of up to 5 characters assigned by during configuration. The label is an abbreviation for the operation or algorithm that the block performs and indicates the block number assigned.
Function Block Inputs and Outputs
Inputs Function Block Inputs must be connected to a signal source. Valid sources to a function block input parameter are: Signal Tags Variables Soft Wires Constants Page connectors Inputs enter the block from the top or left-hand side. Note that unconnected inputs will default to 0 or OFF.
Outputs Function Block Outputs are signals that reflect the results of a function block's execution. Outputs can be connected to any number of function block inputs including inputs on the same block, but, they cannot be connected to: An output of another block, A variable or constant, An internal system value from system status block. Outputs exit the block as straight lines from the bottom or right-hand side. Note that unused outputs can be left unconnected.
Attention As shown on the function block example below, there is a visual distinction between analog and digital pins,
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
119
November 2019
Analog Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a solid pin and Digital Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a hollow pin.
Function Blocks Overview Function Block Inputs and Outputs
120
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Blocks Overview Types of Function Blocks
Types of Function Blocks
Function blocks come in three main classes.
Input These process the physical inputs from the controller. Examples are Analog Input, Digital Input. They are the first stage in the controller's configuration.
Calculations and logic These process the data from the input blocks and perform arithmetic, logic and sequencing operations. Examples are PID, Setpoint Programmer, AND, Math, etc. They are the middle stage of the controller's configuration.
Output These process the data from the calculations and logic blocks and are the link with the physical outputs of the controller. The Analog output and Digital output function blocks convert this output information into a voltage or current, which is fed to the corresponding output hardware (such as a current output or relay).
Overview
Function blocks are graphic representations of instrument-like functions
· They are accessible through the Worksheet Toolbox on the Designer Main Window.
· They have inputs and/or outputs for connections to other blocks or functions, as applicable.
· Each function block is assigned a unique number from 101 to 500(CPU C30), 101 to 2100(CPU C50), 101 to 5100 (CPU C70/C70R/C75)
Note: Some blocks have reserved block numbers from 1 to 100
Memory usage The amount of memory used depends on the type of block. For capacities, File Properties, Statistics.
Function Block Attributes
1. Blocks have a rectangular graphic form, which varies in size depending on number of inputs and outputs that the block possesses. The block type determines the type of operation or algorithm that the block performs.
2. Each block has type identification label of up to five characters. The label is an abbreviation for the operation or algorithm that the block performs. Each block has a number to uniquely identify the function block. A few blocks have reserved block numbers.
3. Block numbers from 101 to 500(CPU C30), 101 to 2100(CPU C50), 101 to 5100 (CPU C70/C70R/C75) are assigned in the sequence that they are programmed. This is the Block ID number. During controller operation, control blocks are executed in numerical order; lowest numbered blocks are executed first unless you change the execution order.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
121
November 2019
Function Blocks Overview Fast Scan Indicator
4. Loops, Setpoint programmers, Setpoint Schedulers, Sequencers have unique user-assigned tag names. They are used to identify values for operator displays. Note that tag names are automatically displayed in capital letters.
5. Pin labels help identify block's secondary inputs and outputs. 6. Block outputs can be labeled with a "Signal Tag Name (Right click on the Output pin to drop a
signal tag symbol). Signal point names are used to display value/state of block output signals on operator displays. 7. Many blocks have configuration parameters to tailor operation to control requirements at hand. 8. Outputs exit block as straight lines from bottom or right-hand side. Outputs can be connected to any number of control block inputs, but, they cannot be connected to:
· an output of another block,
· a named variable, or
· a constant. Note that unused outputs can be left unconnected. 9. Inputs enter block as arrows from top or left-hand side. Inputs can be from:
· An output of another block (soft wire),
· A named variable (values that can be changed from the Operator Interface (max-150)) (Right click on Input pin to drop a variable)
· A connector that references a signal tag or page connector (Right click on Input pin to drop a connector)
· A constant that references a signal tag (Right click on Input pin to drop a constant) Note that unconnected inputs will default to 0 or OFF.
10. There is a visual distinction between analog and digital pins, Analog Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a solid pin and Digital Inputs and Outputs are indicated by a hollow pin.
11. A Digital pin without the ^ symbol indicates it is level sensitive. The pin is ON when its source signal is ON, OFF when source signal is OFF.A digital pin with the ^ symbol indicates it is rising edge sensitive. The pin is ON after its source signal changes from OFF to ON. Examples: HOLD is level sensitive ^RST is rising edge sensitive
12. Each I/O block corresponds to a physical address in a rack. That address (rack, module, channel) is shown at the top of the block.
Fast Scan Indicator
The Fast Scan Indicator is a yellow lightning bolt that has been placed somewhere on the face of the function block. See the example below.
ATTENTION For information on update rates for these blocks, refer to the "Fast Scan Function Blocks".
122
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Before You Start
14. Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy
Before You Start
The Designer software operates on a PC, independently from the controller hardware, until after the configuration is completed and downloaded. For this reason, you must identify the hardware that will be used in the controller so that the configuration constructed will match the intended I/O quantity and location in the controller.
There are two basic methods to begin configuring the controller:
1. Start with the physical I/O requirements of the controller Identify the I/O Configure the I/O blocks Download and test the I/O first, then Configure the Control /Safety Strategy, or
2. Start with the Control /Safety Strategy Drop the I/O blocks as needed but leave the physical address 0.0.0 Download and debug the strategy, then Configure the physical I/O addresses.
You can use some combination of these 2 methods, the Designer and Controller is flexible and will accommodate either approach.
See "Rack, Module, and Channel Assignments".
General Steps to Build a Control /Safety Strategy
Introduction
Configuration is the process of creating/editing a Control /Safety Strategy, best suited for your application, using Function Blocks, Variables, and Constants; Operator Interface Display assignments, Setpoint Programs, Schedules, Sequencers, and Recipes; Data Storage, Alarm and Event configuration. The configuration is essential to the controller, since it defines your control strategies and operational displays.
Following are the steps of the configuration process as determined by the tasks required.
Develop the Control/Safety Strategy using Function Block Worksheets
Step
Task
1
Select the Function Blocks, Variables, and Constants needed to meet the control /safety strategy
requirements.
2
Soft-wire the outputs to the inputs.
3
Assign signal tags to block outputs needed on displays.
4
Enter annotations as needed on the diagram.
5
Configure the function block parameters needed to define the operating characteristics.
6
Configure the Execution Order.
7
Configure Setpoint Profiles, Setpoint Schedules, Sequencers, and Recipes.
8
Configure the Alarms and Events.
9
Save the Configuration File.
10
Download the Configuration File.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
123
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Adding, Moving, Deleting Function Blocks to a FBD
Develop the Operator Interface and Data Storage using the Display Worksheet (Legacy controllers V 4.3 and older)
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Task Configure the Display Tag Groups. Configure the Alarms and Events. Configure the Display Buttons for the Operator Interface. Configure the Start Up and Message Displays. Configure Operator Interface Settings. Configure Data Storage Save the Configuration File Download a Control Strategy
Notes You can initiate a print out of your control strategy whenever you want to assist you in configuring. The above is a general approach to building a control strategy. One of the benefits of this product is its flexibility and integration. You can develop some I/O, Control Displays, then download and repeat.
Adding, Moving, Deleting Function Blocks to a FBD
Adding Drag and drop a function block symbol in the Worksheet Toolbox tree to the function block diagram. The Function block will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration.
Selecting a drawing item To select a drawing item, either click on it (Shift-Click to add an existing selection) or capture it in a selection net.
Auto-scrolling to select offscreen items Click and drag the mouse to the window's edges to automatically scroll to offscreen items.
124
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Connecting/Disconnecting Blocks
Manipulating a drawing item To form a selection net, press the left mouse button on an empty area of the drawing and drag the mouse to form a visible dotted rectangle
Release the mouse button. Everything entirely within the rectangle is selected and highlighted.
Drawing Conventions To delete a selected item, press the DELETE key or right-click on the item and select DELETE. To move a selected item, press the left mouse button on an already selected item and drag the selection to the desired location on the function block diagram. To copy a selected item, use the CUT, COPY, and PASTE functions on the EDIT menu or Toolbar or right-click on the item and select the desired menu item. To abort a move operation, press the ESCAPE key before releasing the mouse.
Function Block Changes If a function block is deleted, Designer does not re-use the block number. If a function block is added, Designer uses the highest current block number + 1. Restrictions: When a configuration uses the last block number (500 or 2100) and you try to add another block, Designer will prompt you to "de-fragment" the table and recover previously deleted blocks. The next configuration download to the controller following the defragmentation process requires a Cold Start.
Connecting/Disconnecting Blocks
Introduction A control strategy is created by connecting function blocks to each other -(Softwiring).
Connecting To connect two blocks, you must softwire a block's output pin to the other block's input pin (or vice versa). CAUTION In pre-2.0 configurations, if a function block is (inadvertently) placed on top of another block with pins touching, wires connected to the touching pins may follow the wrong block, when the block again moves. In other words, the connections you see may not be the connections you actually get. SOLUTION: Place drawing items so their boundaries do not touch or overlap. When moving drawing items groups, release the group over empty diagram space. The outputs are always on the right or bottom of blocks; inputs are always on the top or left of the blocks.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
125
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Connecting/Disconnecting Blocks
Double click at the end of a block's output (or input) pin. A single segment wire will adopt a straight or "L" shaped route.
You can click anywhere on the drawing to make a wire vertex and continue to either another vertex or a block pin.
A wire can have up to eight vertices including endpoints. You can connect two or more wires to the same output pin. Repositioning To reposition an existing wire: Click on the end point of the wire to be repositioned. It will be highlighted in a dotted line showing each vertex.
126
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Adding a Variable
Click on a vertex and drag into the new position and release
NOTE: A single "L" shaped wire cannot be repositioned. If you must alter the routing, delete the wire and add one with a vertex. Disconnecting To disconnect an existing wire: Click on the end point of the wire to be deleted. The wire is highlighted. Pull down the "EDIT" menu and select "Delete", or press the DELETE key. NOTE: A single "L" shaped wire cannot be repositioned. If you must alter the routing, delete the wire and add one with a vertex. See also Wire nodes
Adding a Variable
There are two types of variables; Analog and Digital.
Procedure Right-click on an Input pin and select "Drop Analog Variable" or "Drop Digital Variable" from the dropdown list OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group "Other Items", drag and drop the Variable symbol to the function block diagram. The Variable symbol will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
127
November 2019
Analog Variable
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Adding a Variable
Double click on the symbol to open its properties dialog box. Enter:
Name and Descriptor
Decimal Places (1-5)
Engineering Units
Decimal Places
Initial Value
Non-Safety Critical Selection. This must ONLY be enabled for variables that need to be opened to the process worksheet and must be restricted to non-critical safety use.
Also displayed is the item's default Modbus address and data type, followed by any user-defined addresses.
WVAR function blocks assigned to the variable are shown in the Write variable window section. when a Write Variable is selected the "Find Write Variable" button changes the worksheet focus locating the WVAR block assigned in the configuration. Further edits can be made if required and the new focus retained by selecting the "OK" button or return to the variable worksheet focus by selecting the "Cancel" button. Variables placed in the safety worksheet can be enabled for non-critical safety functions by checking ENABLE for non-critical safety function check box. Setting this check box allows the variable to be configured in the Process worksheets Write Variable function block. Variables placed on the safety worksheet must be restricted to Non-critical safety functions when enabled for data transfer from the process worksheet. Non-critical safety functions are defined in the safety manual 51-52-25-153.
Note: To maintain Variables to associated WVAR function block during configuration edits WVAR function blocks associated with the variable will default to no assignment when the associated variable has been deleted. The WVAR function block assignment must then be reestablished with the proper variable. Additionally once the WVAR to variable connection is assigned the Enable check box in the Variable configuration window is grayed out; to disable the WVAR function assignment needs to be cleared.
Analog Variable Properties on Process Worksheet
128
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Adding a Variable
Digital Variable
Analog Variable on Safety Worksheet
Double click on the symbol to open its properties dialog box. Enter: Tag Name and Descriptor Off Label On Label Initial Value (Off or ON) Non-Safety Critical Selection This must ONLY be enabled for variables that need to be
opened to the Process worksheet and restricted to non-critical functions as described in the ControlEdge HC900 Safety Manual 51-52-25-153. Also displayed is the item's default Modbus address and data type, followed by any user-defined addresses.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
129
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Adding a Variable
Digital Variable Properties on Process Worksheet
Digital Variable on Safety Worksheet
After a WVAR function block has been connected to the variable on the safety worksheet the Enable check box is grayed out so the connection cannot be broken. To break the connect remover the assignment from the associated WVAR function block(s).
130
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Adding a Numeric Constant
Adding a Numeric Constant
Procedure Right-click on an Input pin and select "Drop Constant" from the drop-down list OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group "Other Items", drag and drop the Numeric Constant symbol to the function block diagram. The Constant symbol will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration.
Numeric Constant symbol Double click on the symbol to open its dialog box. Enter Numeric Constant value.
Click "OK". Hint To save the number of numeric constants used when a given constant is used more than once, connect a signal tag to the output pin of the constant and use a connector object as the input pins of the appropriate blocks.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
131
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Adding a Connector
Adding a Connector
Procedure Right-click on an Input pin and select "Connector" from the drop-down list OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group "Other Items", drag and drop the Connector symbol to the function block diagram. The Connector symbol will appear on the Function Block Diagram for configuration.
Connector symbol
Double click on the symbol to open its dialog box. Enter: Connector Name
Click "OK".
Variables
A variable is a named diagram item, capable of holding a single analog or digital value. The value can be connected to function block inputs with a softwire. The value can be changed through any of the following:
· Entry at the Operator Interface · Loaded through a recipe
Either at the operator interface or programmed in the control strategy using a recipe load block. · Over a communications link from a peer controller or from a supervisor host. · Variables on the safety worksheet may only be changed in the RUN/Program operation mode unless enabled as non-critical safety function. Safety variables that are enabled may then be updated with writes to the associated WVAR function block on the process worksheet.
132
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Wire Nodes
Wire Nodes
Note: The Wire Node feature is available only in configurations for ControlEdge HC900 C30/C50 revision 2.0x and higher.
Introduction
A wire node lets you distribute an output signal to multiple input pins. The wire node has 4 pins; any one pin can be connected to an output signal (this action defines the pin as the input pin of the wire node and the pin is marked with an arrow head), the other three pins of the wire node are then automatically defined as output pins and can be connected to input pins of function blocks or other wire nodes. Note that multiple soft wires can be connected to each of the three output pins of the wire node, so you can distribute an output signal to more than three input pins on function blocks or other wire nodes using just one wire node. Also note that you can wire an input connector to the input pin of a wire node. This input connector can refer to either a signal tag or a page connector. This is useful if you want to distribute a signal on one page or worksheet to multiple places on another page or worksheet."
Procedure
Right-click on white space in your function block diagram and select "Drop Other Items..., Wire Node"
OR
From the Worksheet Toolbox group "Other Items", drag and drop the Wire Node symbol
to a
blank spot on the controller configuration.
Double-click any pin on the wire node, then click on the output signal you want. You can also doubleclick on the output signal first and then click on any pin on the wire node. An arrow appears showing logic flow direction. You can connect the input pin of a wire node to an output signal of a block, variable, signal connector, or numeric constant but not to a signal tag or page connector.
Double-click on any remaining wire node pin, then click on the desired input pin to complete the connection. Repeat for the remaining wire node pins.
If you need an output signal to go to more than 3 inputs, use additional wire nodes. You may use any number of output pins of a wire node.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
133
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Signal Tags
Loop-backs are allowed.
You can drag a wire node without breaking its connections.
Signal Tags
Introduction
Signal tags are users assigned names that can be associated with the output of any item. They can be: Assigned to displays Used to connect discontinuous wires to other block inputs using connectors in the same or in another FBD Worksheet. Assigned to Data Storage Used for Peer-to-Peer communication between multiple-networked controllers using Modbus communications. To identify important block output pins for monitoring.
Procedure
Right-click on an Output pin and select "Signal Tag". Drops the signal tag down and automatically connects it to the pin. Skip to Step 4.
OR
From the Worksheet Toolbox "Other Items", drag and drop the Signal Tag symbol controller configuration
to the
OR
Right-click on white space in your function block diagram and select "Drop Other Items..., Signal Tag".
134
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Signal Tags
The Signal Tag symbol will appear on the Controller configuration and the cursor will change to the softwire cursor. Attention: You cannot drop a signal tag directly onto an output pin. Drop it away from the pin, then softwire it to the pin. Once it is connected, you can move the signal tag to any location.
Place the crosshairs on the output pin and click to connect the tag to the output (dotted Line). You can add vertices like a softwire.
Double click on the tag name area to display the signal properties dialog box.
Analog Signal Tag
Enter: - Tag Name - Descriptor - Select Decimal Place [0-5]
or select exponential notation (i.e. display Trend Points Logarithmically) - Engineering Units - Safety Peer Export Enable - Selecting the check box will make the signal to be safety peer export enabled and gets added in to the configuration xml file. This xml can be used in the ANAIMP block of another controller configuration to import the signal tag for safety peer communication
Also displayed is the item's default Modbus address and data type, followed by any user-defined addresses.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
135
November 2019
Digital Signal Tag
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Signal Tags
Enter: - Tag Name - Descriptor - Off Label On Label Also displayed is the item's default Modbus address and data type, followed by any user-defined addresses - Safety Peer Export Enable - Selecting the check box will make the signal to be safety peer export enabled and gets added in to the configuration xml file. This xml can be used in the DIGIMP block of another controller configuration to import the signal tag for safety peer communication
An input signal tag connector can be changed to another signal tag connector or to a page connector. Double-click on the assigned input connector to see a selection of different signal tags or page connectors.
136
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Page Connectors
Page Connectors
Note: The Page Connector feature is available only in configurations for ControlEdge HC900 C30/C50 revision 2.0x and higher.
Introduction A Page Connector lets you connect a signal from a worksheet page to another page and across worksheets. Page connectors are similar to signal tags except they do not appear in any signal tag lists and are not accessible via Modbus. They are tags but they have no descriptors, decimal places, or alarm/event notification properties. You can rename them. Page connectors can be monitored. The Watch Summary window has a tab for page connectors.
Procedure Right-click on white space in your function block diagram and select "Drop Other Items..., Page Connector", OR From the Worksheet Toolbox group "Other Items", drag and drop the Page Connector symbol to a blank spot on the controller configuration. OR Right-click on a function block output pin. Drops the page connector down and automatically connects it to the pin. Skip to Step 3. Click any output pin of any function block to make a connection. (An output pin can have multiple signal tags and/or page connectors attached to it.) The output page connector appears with a default number.
Drop a connector
. Use any of the following methods.
Right click on the white space of a function block worksheet,
OR
Right click on a function block input pin
OR
Drag and drop the connector from the Worksheet Toolbox.
Double-click on the connector. A list of signal tags or page connectors is shown. Display all page connectors and pick one to assign to the input. When you pick one the unconnected input connector changes to an input page connector .
Double click on the page connector tag name area to view or change the page connector properties:
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
137
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Page Connectors
Analog Page Connector Properties - Tag Name - Engineering Units
Digital Page Connector Properties - Tag Name - Off Label - On Label Page connector tag names must be unique.
An input page connector can be changed to another page connector or to a signal tag connector. Double-click on the assigned input connector to see a selection of different signal tags or page connectors.
If you change the name of an output page connector you break the connection to any connected input page connectors. Input and output page connector names must match exactly to be a valid connection. Unconnected input page connectors are displayed as
.
138
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Boundary Item
Boundary Item
This is part of the Other Items category.
Helps to create modular groupings in the control logic for a better understanding of the functionality. Drag the Boundary Item to the worksheet and logically group the logics.
Alternatively, right-click on the worksheet and go to Drop other items > Boundary Item.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
139
November 2019
Text String
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Text String
This is part of the Other Items category.
Introduction You have the option to enter descriptive data on the Function Block Diagram. Any entered data has no effect on the operation of the Controller.
Procedure to Enter a Text String.
Step Action
1
From the Worksheet Toolbox group "Other Items", use the left Mouse button to click on the T (text)
symbol, hold the button down, drag the symbol to the function block diagram and release the
mouse button. The "Modify Text" dialog box will appear on the Function Block Diagram.
2
Select a Font size (6, 10, 12, 16 pt)
Select a Color (black, blue, red, green)
Select Bold, Italics, or underline or all three
You can change the default font characteristics for Text Annotations. See "Changing the Default
Annotations Attributes"
3
Key in the desired text in the field, then click OK.
You can use carriage returns for multiple lines.
The text will appear on the diagram in a dotted-line box.
4
Click and hold the cursor in the box and move the text string to the desired location.
5
To enter another text string, repeat the above steps.
Editing Text
To edit existing text, double click the text. The "Modify Text" dialog box will reopen. You can delete text or cut, copy, and paste text from one "Modify Text" dialog box to another. Use the `right' mouse button menu while the mouse cursor is in the edit box.
140
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Using Function Blocks to Build a Control /Safety Strategy Changing the Default Annotation Attributes
Changing the Default Annotation Attributes
You can change the default font characteristics for Text Annotations. These include · Font Size · Color · Bold/italic/underline Settings
Configuration Procedure 1. From the "Edit" menu, select "Options". 2. Select " Default Annotation Attributes". The "Default Text Attributes" dialog box opens. 3. Select a font size from the dropdown menu (6,10,12,or 16 points) 4. Select a color from the drop-down menu. (black, red, green, or blue) 5. Click on a button to select Bold, Italics, or Underline, or all three. 6. Click OK to save the selections for default text annotations
Auto Save Functionality
This feature is used for saving the file automatically at regular intervals without having to choose File > Save option. This functionality is available only for cde files.
To auto save the file:
1. Open the cde file that you want. 2. On the Options menu, click Auto Save. The Auto Save window appears. 3. Select Enable Auto Save. 4. In the Automatically Saves File For Every text box type a time (in minutes). 5. Click OK. (Min value: 5 minutes; Max value: 120 minutes).
NOTE: This value is retained and applied when the designer tool is opened next time.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
141
November 2019
Conventions Drag and Drop
Drag and Drop
15. Conventions
To add a function block to a controller configuration, select the desired block from the menu tree. Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the block over to the diagram on the right-hand side of the screen. Position the block and then release the left mouse button to drop the item into place.
Accessing Context Sensitive Help
While in a Controller configuration, click the right mouse button to allow access to Topic Help, Monitor functions, Cut, Copy, Paste functions and Properties Dialog Boxes.
Right Mouse Click
See page 29.
142
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
How to Configure Function Block Parameters Accessing Block Details
16. How to Configure Function Block Parameters
Accessing Block Details
Overview After function blocks are placed on the function block diagram, they can be configured Most dialog boxes are simple dialog boxes that contain the assigned block number and execution order of the block. Some dialog boxes contain various parameters and options that are configured based on the particular type of function block. For example: I/O blocks contain Rack, Module, and Channel addresses and function block configuration parameters. Certain function blocks contain a Modbus address. Tabbed dialog boxes will be used for the most complicated blocks (for example, PID) to organize the data for you.
Procedure 1. To access Block Properties, double click on the selected function block and the corresponding dialog box(es) will be displayed. 2. The dialog box(es) display(s) all parameters having to do with the selected function block. 3. Enter a physical address if applicable. 4. Enter any Tag Names 5. Enter all parameters on each tab, if present. 6. When all the changes are entered, click OK to enter, or CANCEL. 7. While in a Controller configuration, click the right mouse button to allow access to Topic Help, Monitor functions, Properties Dialog Boxes, and Cut, Copy, and Paste functions. Some function blocks let you customize their Modbus address.
Function Block Address
Addresses identify physical connection points for field wiring to Input/Output modules. Assign a unique address to each I/O block. See page 5.
User Assigned Tag Names
Some blocks have unique, user-assigned tag names. They are used to identify values for operator displays. When configuring displays you will be able to select from a list of tag name groups that you have assigned. (See "Configure Tag Order") Enter a Name in the "Tag Name" field. Tag names are automatically displayed on the block in capital letters
Function Block Parameters
All Function Block Parameters are values that influence the function block's execution. To enter a parameter:
1. Click the cursor on the desired parameter field to highlight it. 2. Key in the desired value, select from any drop-down menus, or select a radio button, if
necessary. 3. Click OK when configuration is complete.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
143
November 2019
How to Configure Function Block Parameters Function Block Parameters
This page has been intentionally left blank
144
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Block Diagrams Overview
17. Function Block Diagrams
Overview
Function Block diagrams let you build your control /safety strategy graphically right on the Designer Window. It provides a full complement of SAMA-style symbols that we call Function Blocks that can be "softwired" to each other. It also includes signal tag generation capability for resident control data that can be linked to displays and other software programs.
Function Block Diagram Rules
1. Do not place Function Block icons over another or overlap pins. 2. A pin output may be soft-wired to any number of inputs of other blocks. 3. You may change direction for soft-wiring with a left mouse click (up to 6 direction changes). 4. You may use "Signal tags" and "Connectors" to substitute for soft-wired connections and for
reference across diagram pages (right click on the input or output pins). 5. You may move a block or group of blocks by selecting blocks or "boxing a group of blocks". 6. You may cross soft-wires. 7. You can cut, copy, or paste (from File menu or Right-click on the diagram) one or more blocks
by selecting or "boxing" within an application or between active applications (allows function block libraries to be stored).
Saving A Configuration File
To Save an Existing File
1. Select "SAVE" from the "FILE" menu or from the Main Toolbar If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0, the data is saved automatically. If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0, The Designer will notify you that there are unconnected inputs and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs.
2. Click "Yes" to view the summary of unconnected inputs. 3. Click "Log File" to save the list to a text file, if desired.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
145
November 2019
Function Block Diagrams Saving A Configuration File
To Save a New File or Save the File as a New Name 1. Select "SAVE AS" from the "FILE" menu. The "Save As" dialog box will open.
2. Type in the new file name in that field. 3. From the drop-down menu in the "Save as Type" field, select the configuration type depending
on the controller you have. 4. If there are no unconnected inputs that need to be set to OFF or 0, the data is saved
automatically. 5. If there are unconnected inputs that have not been previously set to OFF or 0, The Designer will
notify you that there are unconnected inputs and ask if you want to see a list of unconnected inputs. 6. Click "Yes" to view the summary of unconnected inputs. 7. Click "Log File" to save the list to a text file, if desired.
Important Note: "Save As" feature on protected files (read protection or worksheet protection) from older version to version 6.3 or later is not supported. User need to remove the protection before save as to 6.3 or later version.
146
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Overview
18. Utilities Worksheet
Overview
This Utility Worksheet has three areas that let you perform a variety of tasks for maintaining the ControlEdge HC900 Controller and setting up your PC's Communications Ports.
Controller Utility Functions The upper part of the Utilities Worksheet contains the Controller Utility Functions. It has list of Icons that will launch dialog boxes for the following utilities:
· Diagnostics · Uploads · Downloads (Configuration, Controller Firmware, Scanner Firmware) · Set Controller Serial Port · Calibrate Modules · Set Controller Mode · Set Controller's Network Parameters · Set Controller Time · Data Storage Utility · Back Up Controller Information or Restore Controller Information · Manually Write Database to Flash
Current PC to Controller Connection Settings · Displays Comm Port and Address information. Let's you select a Port and Controller Network Address from the drop-down menus. · Allows you do a Loopback to check the communications connections. · Allows you view and reset the communications statistics. · Allows you to Dial/hang up the modem.
PC Port Setup Let's you set up a Network Port and up to 8 Comm Ports or Modems.
Controller Utility Functions
The upper part of the Utilities Worksheet contains the Controller Utilities Functions. It has list of Icons that will launch dialog boxes for the following utilities:
ICON
FUNCTION Controller Diagnostics*
Upload from Controller*
REFERENCE
Select from drop down menu: (options are only available in Monitor Mode) Controller Diagnostics. See page 232 Rack Diagnostics see page 240 Controller Ports Diagnostics see page 249 Modbus Port Diagnostics
Modbus Master (Serial) Port Diagnostics see page 262 Modbus/TCP Initiator Port Diagnostics see page 265 Forced Blocks see page 213 Redundancy ...
Redundancy System see page 292 Redundancy Link - see page 293 Lead CPU see page 294 Reserve CPU see page 297 Scanner 2 Link see page 298 Configuration Upload transfers a configuration FROM the controller TO the PC. See page 37.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
147
November 2019
ICON
FUNCTION Download to Controller* Set Controller Port**
Calibrate Controller **
Set Controller Mode**
Set Controller Network Parameters*
Set Controller Time**
Utilities Worksheet Uploading a File from the Controller
REFERENCE Downloads a saved configuration, controller firmware, or scanner firmware, IO firmware from FROM the PC TO the controller. See page 38 and page 41.
Menu selection lets you Set Protocol for controller's configuration ports.
Click to open the Calibrate dialog box. Four Tabs on the Dialog Box: AI Channel - see "Calibrate AI Channel". CJ Temp - see "Calibrate CJ Temp". AO Channel - see "Calibrate AO Channel". PPO Block see "PPO Block Calibration " Click to open the Set Controller Mode dialog box. Read the current mode, select a new mode, then write the new mode to the controller.
A Wizard interface guides you through connecting to a controller in order to view and edit the controller's network parameters In order to change the controller's network parameters, the controller must be in PROGRAM mode. Click to open the Set Controller Time dialog box.
Data Storage Utility
Back Up Controller Information Restore Controller Information Manually Write Database to Flash
(Available only for software revision Rev 4.4 and earlier.) Click to open the Data Storage Utility dialog box. Select a Removable Disk Drive Group Number and Trend group number. Press "Initialize" to prepare the disk for storage. Backs up controller's configuration and port settings. See Back Up Controller Information.
This button visible for open backup files only. See Restore Controller Information.
See Manually Write Database to Flash.
* These functions prompt you to select a PC port to which to connect.
** These functions communicate to a controller by using the PC Port displayed in " Current PC
to Controller Connection Settings".
Uploading a File from the Controller
See page 37.
Download a File to the Controller
See page 38 and page 41.
148
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Serial Ports
Set Controller Serial Ports
Use this feature to set the RS232 (legacy controllers) and RS485 ports protocol.
has two tabs--Serial S1 (RS232) and Serial S2 (RS485)--each with the following settings. Honeywell ELN: Default protocol Modbus RTU Master: Select to set controller up as a master. Modbus RTU Master - Advanced: Provides enhanced data throughput for applications where the ControlEdge HC900 is being used in conjunction with a "Modbus-to-fieldbus" gateway device. See page 150 for details. Modbus RTU Slave: Select to set controller up as a slave. Slave Type: Multidrop--select when using more than one slave on the selected PC port. Point to point--select for one slave Modem--select when using a modem between the master and slave. Slave Address: Enter 1-247, or 255. Modbus Slave Double Register Format: Each IEEE 32-bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers (four bytes, MSB=4, LSB=1 in byte order below) starting with the register defined as the starting register for the information. The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs among Modbus hosts. To provide compatibility, the Double register format is configurable. Selections are: FPB Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order - 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default) FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte-swapped Byte order - 2, 1, 4, 3 FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte-swapped Byte order - 3, 4, 1, 2 FP L Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order - 1, 2, 3, 4 Port Enable: Enables or disables port. Speed (bps): Select Baud rate. All slaves on the same PC port must be the same. Modbus parity: Odd or even. All slaves must be the same. Modbus stop bits: 1 or 2. All slaves must be the same. Set Activates settings. If you changed the controller's Baud Rate via a PC RS232 Comm Port, your PC will no longer communicate with the controller. In this case, you are prompted to detect the controller's Baud Rate. This feature will synchronize the PC's Comm Port with the controller and set the PC Baud Rate to the correct Baud Rate.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
149
November 2019
Modbus RTU Master - Advanced Setup
Utilities Worksheet Modbus RTU Master - Advanced Setup
Overview
The Modbus RTU Master Advanced protocol provides enhanced data throughput for applications where the ControlEdge HC900 is being used in conjunction with a "Modbus-to-fieldbus" gateway device. In these applications the gateway acts as a Modbus slave to the ControlEdge HC900 controller. The Modbus data is connected into the ControlEdge HC900 control strategy using the Modbus Read, Modbus Write, and Modbus Slave function blocks.
In order to achieve the enhanced data throughput, the ControlEdge HC900 communicates with the gateway using large packets of contiguous Modbus register addresses. This packetization technique allows the ControlEdge HC900 to exchange data with the gateway at rates up to the analog cycle rate of the controller (depending on the operating characteristics of the gateway device). The packet sizes can be adjusted to match the specifications of the gateway slave device.
Differences from standard Modbus RTU
There are several important ways in which the Advanced protocol differs from the standard Modbus RTU Master protocol:
1. Under the Advanced protocol the Modbus register data is written to the slave devices during every Modbus Master scan cycle. This behavior is different than the standard Modbus RTU Master protocol, where the data is written only when the slave block's Enable pin is ON.
2. The Enable pins on the Modbus function blocks do not control when the register data is written to the slave device. Instead, they control the value that is written to the block. For example, if a Modbus function block has the value 10 on its Write pin and the Enable pin is ON, then a value of 10 is written to the slave device. If the Enable pin is changed to OFF, the ControlEdge HC900 controller will continue to write a value of 10 to the slave device once every Modbus Master scan cycle. If the value on the Write pin is changed to 100 while the Enable pin is OFF, the controller will continue to write a value of 10 to the slave device. The next time the Enable pin is changed to ON, the controller will write the value 100 to the slave device.
3. Modbus Register write operations are performed using Modbus Function Code 16 (Preset Multiple Write). The number of registers written in a single transaction is based on the Advanced Setup settings for the serial port.
150
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Modbus RTU Master - Advanced Setup
4. If there are "gaps" in the Modbus register addresses referenced within the ControlEdge HC900 configuration, the controller will write a value of zero to the "undefined" registers. For example, if Modbus Registers 1 and 10 are assigned to Modbus function blocks but Registers 2 through 9 are not, the controller will write zeroes to Registers 2 through 9. The Advanced protocol can be used in any Modbus Master application that can accommodate these differences.
Factors affecting scan time Using the Advanced protocol, the ControlEdge HC900 controller can potentially scan all of the Modbus registers on the serial link at a rate that is equal to the analog cycle time. The actual scan time for any given application is affected by the following factors. 1. Characteristics of the slave devices (e.g., the maximum baud rate, the message turn around time, support for Modbus packets, the maximum allowable packet size, etc.). 2. Configuration of the Modbus slave blocks. 3. Programmed baud rate of the serial port. The Modbus Master scan time is adjusted automatically by the ControlEdge HC900 at run-time; no user intervention required. The actual scan time of the link is displayed on the Modbus Communication Diagnostics display in Monitor Mode.
Configurable parameters The parameters on this dialog can be used to match the behavior of the Advanced protocol to the characteristics of the slave devices on the link. Please consult the documentation for your slave devices to determine the best settings for your application. In general, the best overall performance of the Modbus Master Advanced link can typically be achieved by using the largest possible packet sizes.
Slave Reply Timeout (milliseconds) This parameter defines the Modbus message turnaround time for the link. It has a range of 10ms to 255ms. This parameter should be set to handle the slave device that has the worse case turnaround time on the link. If there are slave devices with turnaround times that are longer than 255ms, then the standard Modbus RTU Master protocol must be used.
Maximum Number of Modbus registers per transaction
Read Coil Registers (Function Code 1) This parameter determines the maximum number of coil registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction.
Read Digital Input Registers (Function Code 2) This parameter determines the maximum number of digital input registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction.
Read Holding Registers (Function Code 3) This parameter determines the maximum number of holding registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction.
Read Input Registers (Function Code 4) This parameter determines the maximum number of input registers that can be read from the slave devices in a single transaction.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
151
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Calibrate Controller
Write Multiple Holding Registers (Function Code 16) This parameter determines the number of registers that will be written to the slave devices in a single transaction. Note: if there are gaps in the Modbus register addresses referenced within the ControlEdge HC900 configuration, the controller will write a value of zero to the undefined address. For example, if Modbus Registers 1 and 10 are assigned to Modbus function blocks but Registers 2 and 9 are not, the controller will write zeroes to Registers 2 and 9.
Restore Default Settings This button allows you to restore the original default settings for the Advanced Setup parameters. Note: you must click the Set button on the Set Protocol dialog to activate any changes that are made on this dialog.
Calibrate Controller
See page 169.
Set Controller Mode
Set Controller Mode lets you set the controller mode. It can only be set when the controller's mode switch is in the center "Run Mode" position. ATTENTION: If the controller's mode switch is in one of the "Locked" positions, the mode cannot be changed from this position. It can be changed only by changing the position of the switch.
opens the Set Controller Mode dialog box. Follow the steps on the dialog box 1. Select a new mode - RUN, PROGRAM, or OFFLINE 2. Write the new mode to the controller. Press "Set New Mode" button
Program to Run takes some time. An Indicator on the dialog box shows the progress.
Set Controller Network Parameters
opens the "Controller Identification Setup Wizard" dialog box.
You can select a serial port or the Ethernet port over which the network parameters will be read/written.
The controller must be in PROGRAM mode to set the Network Parameters.
There are set up options on the wizard. The option you choose depends on how you are connected to a controller and what current knowledge you have of that controller. Important: before configuring your controller to work on a corporate LAN, consult with your Network Administrator regarding any corporate networking policies. Follow the Wizard instruction to set:
· Network Name User assigned name - can be different from controller name (16-character ASCII name. It is not part of configuration.)
It is required to uniquely define a Peer group if multiple processes, each with its set of peer controllers, are on the same physical cable. The controller binds the "Network name: Controller name" to the IP address of each of its peers at run-time. Important note: Network name shall not have Chinese characters
152
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Network Parameters
· Local Name (alias) User assigned 16-character ASCII name [can be different from controller name] It is not part of the configuration. See Controller Identification for more info on names.
· Modbus TCP Double Register format Each IEEE 32-bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers (four bytes, MSB=4, LSB=1 in byte order below) starting with the register defined as the starting register for the information. The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs among Modbus hosts. To provide compatibility, the Double register format is configurable. Selections are: FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order - 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default) FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte-swapped Byte order - 2, 1, 4, 3 FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte-swapped Byte order - 3, 4, 1, 2 FP L Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order - 1, 2, 3, 4
· IP Address Controller Internet Protocol Address - Guaranteed unique address, assigned by the Internet Corporation of America for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) IP Address includes four "Octets" (eight bits, translating to integers from 0 to 255, separated by periods). The manufacture default IP Address is 192.168.1.254.
· Subnet Mask Subnet Mask defines the netid (Network ID) and the hostid (Host ID) parts of an IP Address. The netid uniquely identifies a network, and the hostid uniquely identifies a computer on the network. The Subnet Mask can be used to partition the Network into sub-networks, using parts of the hostid to define new netids, or more correctly subnetids. Portioning a network in this way enables switches and routers to use the subnetids to reduce collision domains and to promote security.
· Gateway IP Address Used to forward packets to other networks and subnets. The Network Administrator typically provides this address.
· Email Server Outgoing Mail (SMTP) server IP Address: If the controller is configured for E-mail notification, enter the IP Address of the (SMTP) E-mail server.
Controller Identification The figure below shows how to uniquely identify multiple controllers on a network. Notice the controller names can be the same in both furnaces (Larry, Curly, Moe), but within the same network name they must be unique. To further distinguish controllers, use unique network names (Furnace #1 and Furnace #2). Network name: Controller name are bound to the IP address of each controller. Finally, use a local name (alias) to identify each controller to the end user. This local name is a convenient name such as for displays on the PC, it is not referred to for actual communication.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
153
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Network Parameters
154
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Set Controller Time
Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Time
opens the Set Controller Time dialog box. Screens differ depending on the version of HC Designer.
Version 4.0 and earlier This window lets you set your controller's date and time. Note: Use of Daylight Saving or Network Time Server requires Version 4.1.
Group PC Time
Item
Current Date Current Time Time Zone
Description Indicates PC's date, time and time zone.
Action Read Only.
Controller Time
Current Date Current Time
Select method for writing Time and Date to the Controller
Set to PC Time
Manually Override Time
Set Controller Time
Shows Controller's current date and time This is updated when you click on Set Controller Time button below.
PC's date and time, indicated here, will be used by controller.
Read only.
Click radio button to select.
Date and time entered here will be used by controller.
Writes PC or manual Date and Time to the controller. Current Controller Time (top of window) will be updated. A status message confirms the update.
Click radio button and enter desired date and time.
Click to set time.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
155
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Time
Version 4.1 and later There are two tabs in this window. Time and Date tab - Lets you set controller time to the PC time and assign a time zone to the controller. Network Time Server and DST tab - Lets you assign a Network Time Server that periodically synchronizes the controller time. Let you specify when controller time changes to Daylight Saving.
Version 4.1 Time and Date tab
Group
Item
Description
Action
Current PC Time
Current Date Current Time Time Zone
Indicates PC's date, time and time zone, including Standard or Daylight Saving.
Read Only.
Current Controller Time
Current Date Current Time Time Zone
Set Controller Time and Date
Date Time
Use Controller Time Zone
Use PC's Time Zone
Set Controller Time
Shows Controller's current date, time and time zone. Note: Daylight Saving, if applicable, is not shown unless Controller is in RUN mode.
PC's date and time, indicated here, will be used by controller.
Time zone entered here will be used by controller.
Time zone displayed here will be used by controller.
Click to write the above Date, Time and Time Zone to the controller. Current Controller Time (top of window) will be updated. A status message confirms the update.
Read only.
Read only.
Click to select. Enter desired Time Zone. Read only. Click to select. Click to select.
156
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Set Controller Time
Version 4.1 Network Time Server and DST tab Use this tab to - assign a Network Time Server that periodically synchronizes the controller time, - specify when controller time changes to Daylight Saving.
Group
Item
Description
Action
Network Time Server
Enabled Disabled
Disabled - controller's time will not be synchronized with a network time server.
Enabled - controller's time will be periodically synchronized to a network time server in Greenwich Mean Time. Different time zone or Daylight Saving must be configured separately.
Disable or enable will take effect when you click on Write Time Server Settings to Controller.
Click to select.
Time Server IP Addresses
Primary Secondary
Primary - primary time server's IP address.
Secondary - secondary time server address as a backup in case the primary can't be accessed.
Enter addresses. If using one server only, enter the same address as the primary.
Write Time Server Settings to Controller
Writes time server settings (enable or disable) to controller. Status will confirm the completed write. This button does not update the controller time, it just enables the connection. To see the current controller time, go to the Time and Date tab. Important: Network time servers use Greenwich Mean Time. Go to the Time and Date tab and set the time zone for your controller.
Click to write to the controller.
Daylight Saving Mode
Adjust Clock for Daylight Saving Changes
Let's you select one of the three Daylight Saving methods below.
Check box to enable one of the following options.
Use DSTI Pin on Time and Date Function Block
Controller time will be in Daylight Saving when DSTI pin on the Time and Date function block is ON. Time will be in Standard when pin is OFF.
Click to select.
One Year
Controller time will change to Daylight Saving, then to Standard, on the dates and times specified for a single year.
Click to select. Enter dates ad times. Begin Daylight Saving Time setting must be earlier than Begin Standard Time setting.
Every Year
Controller time will change to Daylight Saving, then to Standard, on the weekdays and times specified for every year.
Click to select. Enter dates and times. Last will be either 4th or 5th week, whichever is last.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
157
November 2019
Data Storage Utility
Note: This section does not apply to the 900 Control Station.
Utilities Worksheet Data Storage Utility
opens the Data Storage Disk Initialization Utility dialog box. It is used to initialize ZIP disks offline. (It takes a long time to initialize a disk on the Operator Interface)
Pre-initializing ZIP Diskette
Step
Action
1
Insert the 100MB Zip disk into your PC drive.
2
Select the Data Storage Utility Icon on the Utilities toolbar.
3
The dialog box appears.
4
Select a Drive Letter from the drop-down menu to specify the drive on your PC.
5
Select the number of Trend Groups that the Operator Interface will need from the drop down menu.
6
Click on Pre-initialize to prepare the disk for storage.
7
Exit DSU.
8
Remove disk, insert it into the operator Interface, and initialize it. See Initializing Disk under this
section entitled "Data Storage Operation".
158
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Back Up Controller Information
Back Up Controller Information
Saves a controller's active configuration as a backup file with .cbk extension. Similar to saving an uploaded configuration except that in addition to the configuration the port settings are saved. Versions 4.1 and up save time settings (time zone, DST, NTS IP addresses). You are prompted to specify the comm. link settings for the controller to be backed up. Backup files are read-only; to edit you must save as .cde.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
159
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Restore Controller Information
Restore Controller Information
This button is visible for currently open backup files (.cbk). Choices: Back Up Controller Restore Controller Same as doing a download to controller except port settings are also downloaded.
Controller must be in Program Lock Mode View Port Settings Shows all port settings in the backup file.
Serial S1/Serial S2 ports:
160
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
General properties:
Utilities Worksheet Restore Controller Information
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
161
November 2019
Network E1, Network E2 ports:
Utilities Worksheet Manually Write Database to Flash
Manually Write Database to Flash
Causes the configuration and user settings of a C70R/C75 CPU to be written (saved) to the controller's FLASH memory. User settings include, for example, PID tuning parameters, PP Output calibrations and changes to recipes (setpoint profiles, sequences, schedules). These settings are normally saved in battery-backed RAM, but if there is a power failure and the battery dies, these settings would be lost. By allowing an on-demand write of the database to FLASH, these settings will be retained and available immediately upon power-up.
If using redundant CPUs (C70R/C75) the database is saved to the FLASH of both Lead and Reserve controllers.
162
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Configure Modbus/Peer Write Access
Configure Modbus/Peer Write Access
This feature is used for enabling the controller to allow only selected devices to write to the controller. The IP addresses of other controllers or Modbus TCP devices are entered to enable or disable the write operation. From version 6.3 and greater, this feature also provides the network interface selection
for safety Peer Communication for SIL variants.
IMPORTANT: This feature is available in ControlEdge HC900 controllers from revision 6.1 and later.
· MODBUS TCP List: List of devices (Modbus TCP Master devices) that can perform Modbus write operation on the ControlEdge HC900 controller.
· Peer-to-Peer List: List of devices (ControlEdge HC900 peer controllers) that can perform peer write operation on the ControlEdge HC900 controller.
IMPORTANT: While accessing this feature the tool prompts for a password if the controller is password protected.
See Password Configuration.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
163
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Configure Modbus/Peer Write Access
To configure Modbus/Peer write access: 1. Click the Utilities tab. 2. Connect to the controller by providing the network details. See Current_PC_to_Controller_Connection_Settings. 3. Click Configure Modbus/Peer Write Access. The Set Protocol for each Controller Port window appears.
4. Click the MODBUS TCP List tab or the Peer-to-Peer List tab and select one of the following: · Write Restricted: Allows only the devices in the list to write to the controller. · Write Disabled: Denies write operation from all external devices.
5. Type the IP addresses of the devices. 6. Click Write. The settings are transferred to the controller. NOTE: Any device can read the values from the controller irrespective of the selections.
164
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Configure Modbus/Peer Write Access
Network Interface selection for safety peer communication
1. Click the Peer-to-Peer List tab as shown below
2. Select option from the "Safety Interface" section. a. Select "Any" to allow Safety peer communication on both "Ethernet Port 1" and "Ethernet Port 2", i.e. the subscriber allows safety peer communication thru import signals (SAFPDE, ANAIMP & DIGIMP function blocks) from the peer controllers (publishers) appear on both networks. b. Select "E1" to allow Safety Peer communication only on Ethernet Port 1. c. Select "E2" to allow Safety Peer communication only on Ethernet Port 2.
Note1: Network Selection option is available only on SIL variants.
Note2: Safety interface selection for C30S & C50S is fixed and defaulted to "E1". Note3: Safety interface selection for C70S & C75S is defaulted to "Any" Note4: "Peer Write" is not allowed thru safety peer communication 3. Click Write. The settings are transferred to the controller.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
165
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Password Configuration
Password Configuration
This feature protects the controller from unauthorized users accessing the controller. It allows the user to set a password for the controller. This password must be provided while accessing the controller utility functions. By default, the controller is not protected with password. IMPORTANT:
- Password can be set only when the mode switch on the controller is set to the "Run/Pgm Mode" position.
- Password shall not have mandarin characters To enable the controller password:
1. Click the Utilities tab. 2. Connect to the controller by providing the network details. See
Current_PC_to_Controller_Connection_Settings. 3. Click the Password Configuration button. The Password Configuration window appears.
4. Select Enable Password.
5. Type a password in the text boxes. NOTE: The password must contain a minimum of 8 characters and not exceed 32 characters.
6. Set the controller to "Run/Pgm" mode. 7. Click Apply.
166
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Password Configuration
8. Change the controller mode to "Run Lock" mode. This step must be performed within 3 minutes. The password is enabled.
To disable the password:
1. Click the Utilities tab.
2. Connect to the controller by providing the network details. See Current_PC_to_Controller_Connection_Settings.
3. Click the Password Configuration tab. The Password Configuration window appears.
4. Clear Enable Password. 5. Set the controller to "Run/Pgm" mode. 6. Click Apply. 7. Change the controller mode to "Run Lock" mode to disable the password. The tool provides 3
minutes to perform this step. The password is disabled.
IMPORTANT: · It is recommended to secure the physical access of the controller key switch for preventing unauthorized controller password modifications. · It is recommended to change the controller password after every 90 days.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
167
November 2019
Diagnostics
Utilities Worksheet Diagnostics
has menu selections on a drop-down menu. It lets you select from a list of diagnostic windows for various controller connections. The controller must be in "Monitor" mode. Select Monitor Mode from the Monitor menu or click on the Monitor mode icon on the Main toolbar. Controller Diagnostics - displays controller status and diagnostic parameters. Rack Diagnostics - displays the "Rack Diagnostic Summary" dialog box. Information is for Rack, I/O expansion (except C30 CPU), and Module diagnostics. Controller Ports Diagnostics - select a port from the drop-down list.
Serial Port S1 Serial Port S2 Network Port Expansion Rack Port (except C30 CPU) Host Connections Peer-to-Peer connections Modbus Master Port Diagnostics - displays status of the Modbus Master port S1 (RS232) or S2 (RS485), if so configured. Forced Blocks.- displays a list of Function Blocks, by block ID, that have a forced output pin. Redundancy select from the drop-down list:
Redundancy System
Redundancy Link
Lead CPU
Reserve CPU
Scanner 2 Link
168
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Calibrate Modules
Calibrate Modules
Overview The controller I/O modules are factory calibrated to 0.1% accuracy. But, if greater accuracy is required, you can calibrate the AI and AO modules using the Process Control Utilities on-line connected to the controller. You can also calibrate the Position Proportional Output block. The calibration of the PPO block is similar to that of the AI and AO except that the calibration values are stored as part of the block's configuration, not on the AI card itself.
opens the Calibrate Modules dialog box. There are four tabs on the Dialog Box: AI Channel - see "Calibrate AI Channel". CJ Temp - see "Calibrate CJ Temp". AO Channel - see "Calibrate AO Channel". PPO Block see "Calibrate Position Proportional Output "
Calibrate AI Channel
The Calibrate AI Channel tab allows you to calibrate the selected AI to ensure that the 0 and 100% values selected during configuration is actually correct.
ATTENTION: You should not access the Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I/O display while the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long as both displays are shown; user must exit either display to do a calibration.
To calibrate an AI Channel:
1. Enter a Rack #, Module #, and Channel #.
2. Click on Select Input. The program will then poll the controller to see if the selected AI exists.
3. The Cal 0% button is now available. Connect a reference supply to the input pins of the AI.
The reference supply must have the following characteristics:
T/C, mV, Volts Inputs:
1 microvolt resolution
Ohms, RTD Inputs:
0.1 Ohm resolution
4-20mA inputs:
4 microamp resolution
4. Set the reference supply to the reference value shown. (The reference value is displayed below the Instrument Status section.) Click on "Cal 0%" to calibrate the low end of the AI.
5. The Instrument Status section of the dialog will display the results of the calibration.
6. If the 0% calibration was successful, the 100% button is now available. Set the reference supply to the reference value shown. Click on "Cal 100%" to calibrate the high end of the AI.
7. If the Cal 100% calibration was successful, the Save Cal button is then available. Click on "Save Cal" to save the current set of calibrations for the selected AI.
8. If either calibration fails, the Instrument Status section will display an AI Calibration Failed message - Check connections The Reference section will display a wrong Rack, Module, and channel - reenter Addresses.
9. Click on Close.
Note: Click on "Restore Factory Calibration" button to do same.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
169
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet Calibrate Modules
NOTE: Refer to the Calibration section in the ControlEdge HC900 Installation and User Guide for additional Hardware details.
Calibrate CJ Temp The Calibrate CJ Temperature tab allows you to ensure the Cold Junction calibration is correct.
To calibrate a CJ Temperature: 1. Enter a Rack #, Module #, and Channel #. 2. At CJ Temperature, enter the actual ambient temperature (measured at the AI pins). 3. Click on Select CJ Input. The program will then poll the controller to see if the selected AI exists. If
the AI is found the Cal CJ button will then be available. 4. Click on the Cal CJ button to initiate the calibration. The status of the calibration is displayed in the
Instrument Status section of the dialog. If the calibration is successful, the Save Cal button will be available. 5. Click on the Save Cal button to save the current CJ calibration. 6. If the calibration fails, a message will be displayed in the Instrument status section. 7. Click on Close to close dialog. Note: Click on "Restore Factory Calibration" button to do same. NOTE: Refer to the Calibration section in the ControlEdge HC900 Installation and User Guide for additional Hardware details.
Calibrate AO Channel The Calibrate AO Channel option allows you to calibrate the selected AO to ensure that the 0 and 100% values selected during configuration are actually correct. ATTENTION: You should not access the Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I/O display while the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long as both displays are shown; user must exit either display to do a calibration.
To calibrate an AO Channel: 1. Enter a Rack #, Module #, and Channel #. 2. Click on Select Output. The program will then poll the controller to see if the selected AO exists. 3. The Cal 0% button is now available. Measure the actual output of the AO at the terminal block with a
meter and enter the measurement into 0% Measured. Click on Cal 0% button to calibrate the 0% measurement. The reference value is displayed below the Instrument Status section. 4. The Instrument Status section of the dialog will display the results of the test. 5. If the 0% calibration was successful, the 100% button is now available. Measure the actual output of the AO at the terminal block with a meter and enter the measurement into 100% Measured. Click on Cal 100% button to calibrate the 100% measurement. 6. If the Cal 100% was successful, the Save Cal button is then available. Click on Save Cal in order to save the current set of calibrations for the selected AO. 7. If either of the tests fail, the Instrument Status section will display an AO Calibration Failed message. 8. Click on Close. Note: Click on "Restore Factory Calibration" button to do same.
NOTE: Refer to the Calibration section in the ControlEdge HC900 Installation and User Guide for additional Hardware details.
170
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration
Restore Factory Calibration
To restore the Factory Calibration: 1. Click on the Restore Factory Calibration button on the dialog box. The Restore Factory Calibration
dialog is displayed. 2. Enter the Rack, Module, and Channel number for the desired calibration. 3. Click on Restore to initiate the task. The status of the restore will be displayed in the Instrument
Status section of the dialog. 4. Click on Close to close the dialog when the restore is complete.
PPO Block Calibration
Introduction The Calibrate PPO Block tab allows you to calibrate the selected Position Proportional Output Block to ensure that the 0% and 100% Motor Positions are actually correct and to measure the true motor speed. The calibration of the PPO Block is similar to that of the AI and AO. However, the calibration values are stored as part of the PPO block's configuration data; not on the AI card itself. To retain these calibrated values, upload and save the configuration to disk. The procedure is to move the motor first to its 0% position, wait until the position feedback signal has stabilized, and capture the 0% feedback value. A similar procedure is done next for the motor's 100% position, The third step is to measure the true motor speed by moving the motor a fixed period of time, measuring the position feedback delta, and computing a motor speed from this data. The final step is to save the values in the block's configuration data. All previous calibration values will be overwritten.
Calibration Procedures There are three methods for calibrating the PPO block. Click on one of the modes shown below for instructions. AUTO Controller positions the motor and captures the positions. SEMI-AUTO Controller positions the motor and the user captures the positions. HAND User positions the motor by hand and captures the positions.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
171
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration
Auto Calibration Procedure Controller automatically positions the motor and captures the positions. NOTE: Put the controller in "Offline" or "Program" mode in order to perform calibration.
1. Select the Utilities tab at the bottom of the Main Window
2. Under the "Controller Utility Functions", select the "Calibrate Controller" icon.
The "Calibrate" dialog box will open. 3. Select the "PPO Block" tab at the top of the dialog box. 4. In the "Calibration Block" field, drop-down the list of PPO blocks and select one. 5. Under "Calibration Mode", select the "AUTO" radio button. 6. Under "Calibration Procedure", press "Start". Result:
· The "Start" button is disabled and the Status indication at the top of the dialog box will change to indicate that the motor is moving to its 0% position. The "Feedback Value" area on the dialog will indicate movement and direction of the motor. The Progress Bar will indicate progress (Time Remaining) for this step.
· The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 0% position. The status will change to indicate that the 0% position has been captured.
· The status will change to indicate that the motor is moving to its 100% position and the feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor. The progress bar will indicate progress (Time Remaining) for this step.
· The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 100% position. The status will change to indicate that the 100% position has been captured.
· The status will change to indicate that the motor is currently undergoing speed calibration. The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor. The progress bar will indicate progress (Time Remaining) for this step.
· The status will change to indicate that the PPO Calibration has been saved. A message box appears indicating that the calibration is complete. Three choices will also appear. Select one.
Press F2 to Position Motor at 0% Press F3 to Position Motor at 100% Press F4 to Leave Motor at Current Position
172
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration
Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure Controller automatically positions the motor and the user captures the positions NOTE: Put the controller in "Offline" or "Program" mode in order to perform calibration.
1. Select the Utilities tab at the bottom of the Main Window.
2. Under the "Controller Utility Functions", select the "Calibrate Controller" icon
The "Calibrate" dialog box will open. 3. Select the "PPO Block" tab at the top of the dialog box. 4. In the "Calibration Block" field, drop-down the list of PPO blocks and select one. 5. Under "Calibration Mode", select the "SEMI-AUTO" radio button. 6. Under "Calibration Procedure", press "Start".
The "Start" button is disabled and the Status indication at the top of the dialog box will change to indicate that the motor is moving to its 0% position. The "Feedback Value" area on the dialog will indicate movement and direction of the motor. The Progress Bar will indicate progress (Time Remaining) for this step. The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 0% position. 7. Click the Cal 0% button, then the status will change to indicate that the 0% position has been captured. The status will change to indicate that the motor is moving to its 100% position. The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor. The progress bar will indicate progress (Time Remaining) for this step. The status will change to indicate that the motor is at its 100% position. 8. Click the Cal 100% button, then the status will change to indicate that the 100% position has been captured. 9. Click the Cal Speed button. A dialog box will appear warning that the speed calibration will move the motor. Press "OK" to start or "Cancel" to abort. The status will change to indicate that the motor is currently undergoing speed calibration. The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor. The progress bar will indicate progress (Time Remaining) for this step. 10. Click the Save Cal button. A dialog box will appear that confirms the Motor Calibration Values. Press "OK" to save the values or "Cancel" to abort. The status will change to READY and indicate that the PPO Calibration has been saved. A message box appears indicating that the calibration is complete. Three choices will also appear. Select one.
Press F2 to Position Motor at 0% Press F3 to Position Motor at 100% Press F4 to Leave Motor at Current Position
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
173
November 2019
Utilities Worksheet PPO Block Calibration
Hand Calibration Procedure User positions the motor by hand and captures the positions. NOTE: Put the controller in "Offline" or "Program" mode in order to perform calibration.
1. Select the Utilities tab at the bottom of the Main Window.
2. Under the "Controller Utility Functions", select the "Calibrate Controller" icon.
The "Calibrate" dialog box will open. 3. Select the "PPO Block" tab at the top of the dialog box. 4. In the "Calibration Block" field, drop-down the list of PPO blocks and select one. 5. Under "Calibration Mode", select the "HAND" radio button. 6. Under "Calibration Procedure", press "Start".
The "Start" button is disabled and the Cal 0% button is enabled. 7. Move the motor by hand to its 0% position.
The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor when it is moving. 8. When ready, click the Cal 0% button and the 0% position of the motor is captured
as indicated in the status. 9. Move the motor by hand to its 100% position.
The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor when it is moving. 10. When ready, click the Cal 100% button and the 100% position of the motor is captured as indicated in the status. 11. Click the Cal Speed button A dialog box will appear warning that the speed calibration will move the motor. Press "OK" to start or "Cancel" to abort. The status will change to indicate that the motor is currently undergoing speed calibration. The feedback area will indicate movement and direction of the motor. The progress bar will indicate progress (Time Remaining) 11. Click the Save Cal button. A dialog box will appear that confirms the Motor Calibration Values. Press "OK" to save the values or "Cancel" to abort. The status will change to READY and indicate that the PPO Calibration has been saved. A message box appears indicating that the calibration is complete.
174
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
19. Set Point Programming Terms and Definitions
Set Point Programming Terms and Definitions
Term Auxiliary Analog Value
Cycles Engineering Units Guaranteed Hold Soak Limits
Number of Segments Power Loss
Program
Program Name
Program Number Ramp Segments
Running a Profile
Definition
In addition to the main ramp and soak output value, a second analog value is available for each step of the profile. This output is a fixed soak value, which may be used to provide a setpoint value for a secondary control loop in the process. An example would be a ramp and soak temperature program combined with pressure setpoints for each step of the profile.
A portion of a profile or the entire program may be repeated up to 100 times or indefinitely as specified in the program Cycles count value.
You must assign a descriptor consisting of up to 4 keyboard characters for the engineering units that the setpoint value represents. For example, GPM for gallons per minute, NPS for number per second, RPM for revolutions per minute, and DEGF for degrees Fahrenheit.
Limits High and Low (above and below the Setpoint value) can be configured in selected engineering units. If the PV is outside of configured limits just prior to entering the Soak segment, the soak timer will not be permitted to start. It will start when the PV is within the High and Low limits. Once the soak timer has started and then the PV goes outside of configured limits, the soak timer will halt. It will remain halted until the PV is again within the configured limits. A Guaranteed Hold High or Low limit setting of 0.00 is equal to no limit at all.
Segments are timed ramp and soak subdivisions of a setpoint program. Consecutive ramps and soaks are allowed. The last segment must be a soak.
A recovery ramp rate value is provided in the event of a power loss while a program is running. The ramp rate value is used to return the process to the last operating setpoint prior to power loss. A power OFF digital input and separate timing block will abort the running program if power loss has been OFF for more than a specified time period.
If Restart pin is connected, must enter a value into Profile Restart Rate.
If left = 0 profile will not proceed.
The term "Program" is used to identify the process for selecting and entering the individual ramp and soak segment data for a Setpoint Program function block (SPP) needed to generate a required setpoint versus time profile (also called a program).
During configuration you must assign a name (descriptive reference) consisting of from 1 to 8 letters or numbers without spaces. Thus, a name can be a combination of letters and numbers. Note that lowercase letters are automatically converted to uppercase.
This number is assigned when the software or the Operator Interface creates the profile. The program number is assigned in the "Setpoint Profile Pool" and is shown on the "Edit Setpoint Profile" dialog box.
A ramp segment is a starting setpoint and the time or rate to reach the setpoint of the following segment.
Typically, segment #1 will be a ramp. Ramp time is determined in either:
TIME*--Hours or Minutes Range = 0.00 hr. to 999.99 hr. / 0.00 min. to 999.99 min.
OR
RATE*--EU/MIN or EU/HR
Range = 0 to 999.99
*This selection of time or rate is made when you configure properties.
Make this selection before entering any Ramp during Profile Edit.
NOTE: When Ramp unit is configured for TIME, entering "0" will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak.
Setpoint profiles may be started, held, advanced, jogged to a predefined segment or reset from the operator interface or by digital inputs to the block. Programs may be started from a pre-
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
175
November 2019
Set Point Programming Terms and Definitions
Term Segment Segment Events
Setpoint Guarantee
Setpoint Value Soak Segments
Synchronizing Programs
Definition selected segment number.
A segment is a ramp or soak function which together make up a Setpoint Profile.
You can configure 1 to 16 segment events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment events are digital switches that provide ON/OFF outputs through an SPEV control block. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains ON until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment. Note that segment events are not interrupted by soak time delays when the process variable is outside the guaranteed soak band. Events turn ON as soon as the previous segment is completed even if the process variable has not reached the soak setpoint. When the program completes, the events are held at current value until the programmer is returned to the ready state.
There is a setpoint guarantee function provided that holds the program if a PV exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint. Selections allow setpoint guarantee to be active for all segments, soak segments only, or for specified segments. Up to 3 Process Variables may be configured as inputs to the block for setpoint guarantee.
A setpoint value set for Ramp (starting Setpoint value) and Soak(soak setpoint value)segments
A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint (value) and soak duration (time).
The last segment must be a Soak.
The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low range limits in engineering units.
SOAK TIME is the duration of the soak and is determined in:
TIME*--Hours or Minutes Range = 0.00 hr. to 999.99 hr. / 0.00 min. to 999.99 min.
*This selection is made when you configure properties.
Two setpoint programs operating on the same time base can be synchronized using the Synchronize (SYNC) function block. This block automatically starts the second program when the first program is started and maintains synchronization when either program is place in hold.
176
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Set Point Programming What is a Setpoint Program?
What is a Setpoint Program?
A Setpoint Program is really a setpoint versus time profile that establishes the setpoint values and how they are to vary with time. Each setpoint profile consists of segments. Each segment of the profile may be a ramp or a soak except the last step that must be a soak. In addition to the main ramp and soak output value, a second analog value (Aux. Output) is available for each step of the program. This output is a fixed soak value that may be used to provide a setpoint value for a secondary control loop in the process. An example would be a ramp and soak temperature program combined with pressure setpoints for each step of the program. Each segment can turn on segment events to provide ON/OFF signals through a Setpoint Program Events (SPEV) control block that is used in conjunction with an SPP block. Each Profile carries its own unique number and a name for identification. (The names are descriptive references [aliases] and uniqueness is not enforced.) Unique names are recommended to avoid operator confusion). Using the software, you can set the setpoint values, soak times, guaranteed soak band, ramp rates, and event action for individual setpoint profiles in configuration and access the information through the Setpoint profile display in the operator interface. This means that an operator can adjust individual ramp and soak segment settings during operation, but the general profile configuration, including number and name, is under configuration control. However, any changes made through the SPP Operate display to a program that is running in an SPP block will not be written as changes in the program configuration.
Setpoint Program Configuration Overview
Introduction
Setpoint Program (Profile) configuration provides a quick and easy way to create, edit, and save up to 99 different ramp/soak (setpoint) profiles for the Setpoint Programmer (SPP) control blocks in the configuration. An operator can interact with the configured profiles through the Setpoint Program Operate display at the operator interface or operation can be directed through integral actions connected by Softwiring functions.
Configuration Functions
Basic functions that you will use to configure a Setpoint Profile. · Create/Edit Setpoint Profile - Under File-New or File-Open you can access the Profile Editor to create or edit a setpoint profile. · Setpoint Profile Pool - The SP Profile Pool lets you add or delete a profile on a list of configured profiles. Through two menus on the dialog box you can set the properties for each profile and set up or edit the information for each segment that make up a profile. · Setpoint Profile Properties - Setpoint Profile Properties is information for the profile that is entered on five specific tabs. It includes Text, General, Loop/Jog, and Start/Restart. · Setpoint Profile Setup (EDIT) - Setpoint Profile Setup or Edit consists of configuring each segment of the profile and assigning the ramps and soaks and associated information (Values, Time, Auxiliary output, Guaranteed Hold, and Events) in the order required to complete your SP program.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
177
November 2019
Setpoint Schedulers Setpoint Scheduler Overview
20. Setpoint Schedulers
Setpoint Scheduler Overview
Setpoint Scheduler blocks may be configured for multi-setpoint control. Comprising the suite is a Master block (SPS), Auxiliary Setpoint block (SPSA), Event Decoder block (SPEV), State Switch Block (STSW), and State Flags block (STFL). The Master block supports ramp or soak outputs operating on a common time base. It accepts one PV for each setpoint. Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master (SPS) block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for each setpoint output. You can assign a Failsafe value for each setpoint. The Auxiliary block supports soak only outputs. The Event block supports event outputs. A single schedule may include segments and auxiliary block data. The schedules are stored in the controller's memory. Setpoint Schedules offer the same operating modes and digital controls as setpoint programs. On-line editing of a running schedule is supported through dedicated operator interface displays
Setpoint Guarantee Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for each setpoint output. Actions for the guarantee soak may be set on a per segment basis for OFF, high setpoint deviation, low setpoint deviation or both high and low setpoint deviations.
Segments Each segment of the Setpoint Scheduler allows entry of a next segment recycle location. This function allows unlimited recycle nesting and continuous recycle operation. A jog function allows a single jump to a designated segment number through a digital input to the State Switch block.
Labels Main Output Labels Eight character labels and four character engineering units are provided for each Setpoint plus a decimal point selection. Auxiliary Output Labels Eight character labels and four character engineering units are provided for each Setpoint plus a decimal point selection Event Labels Eight character labels are also provided for the Digital Event block. Assigning these labels first will aid you in the setpoint schedule configuration process. These labels will appear in the configuration dialog boxes.
Setpoint Schedule Overview
Introduction Setpoint Schedule configuration provides a quick and easy way to create, edit, and save up to 20 different Setpoint Schedules for the Setpoint Scheduler (SPS) control blocks in the configuration. An operator can interact with the configured schedules through the Setpoint Program Operate display at the operator interface or operation can be directed through integral actions connected by Softwiring functions.
178
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Setpoint Schedulers Setpoint Schedule Overview
Setpoint Scheduler Display Configuration
ATTENTION
Before you proceed with the Setpoint Schedule assign the appropriate labels for the Setpoint Scheduler displays.
Assigning these labels first will aid you in the schedule configuration process. See Setpoint Scheduler Function Block configuration. These labels will appear in the configuration dialog boxes.
Configuration Functions
Basic functions that you will use to configure a Setpoint Schedule. · Create/edit Setpoint Schedule - Under File-New or File-Open you can access the Schedule Editor to create or edit a setpoint schedule. · Setpoint Schedule Pool - The SP Schedule Pool lets you add or delete a schedule on a list of configured schedules. Through this dialog box you will set the properties for each schedule and set up or edit the information for each segment that make up a schedule. · Setpoint Schedule Properties - Setpoint Schedule Properties is information for the schedule that a Label, a Jog Segment, Time Units, and Guaranteed Hold Limits for each of the eight setpoints. · Setup/Edit Setpoint Schedule - Setpoint Schedule Setup or Edit consists of configuring each segment of the schedule and assigning starting values for all eight Setpoints of the segment and the Guaranteed Hold Type for each. You can also set up to 16 events for each segment. Time Units, Recycle Segment, and Recycle Counts selections are included on this dialog box. · You can also assign values to all eight Auxiliary Outputs for each segment by clicking on each "Aux" button on the dialog box.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
179
November 2019
Sequencers What is Sequence Control?
21. Sequencers
What is Sequence Control?
The need to control a sequence of operation is a very common control requirement in industrial equipment today. Sequence control can be a very rigid series of inter-related events used to start-up or shut-down a unit process, or it can be a series of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to produce a final product. Sequences can be very simple with only timed or cascaded events that occur regardless of process feedback, or they can be very complex with multiple nested default sequences programmed to occur only if process feedback indicates a need to take alternate actions. When sequence control is used to produce final product, sequence variations are often required to allow the same equipment to be used to produce multiple types of product. In these applications the sequence is often partitioned into logical units to allow operators and supervisors to monitor the progress of the process using familiar terminology. Heat-up, cool-down, filling, venting, mixing and other similar terms are often used to describe the particular phase the control equipment is executing. Variations in the product being processed can require changes to the sequence where particular phases are bypassed, duplicated or executed in an alternate manner. When all of these requirements are combined in a single control specification, developing a suitable control strategy can be a demanding and sophisticated endeavor.
Sequence Configuration Overview
The sequencer function block controls the output statuses of up to 16 digital outputs and one auxiliary analog output. Each combination of outputs represents a state of the sequence such as Heat, Mix, or Cool, for example. The function block supports up to 50 states e.g. PURGE, FILL, HEAT, etc.
The sequence contains up to 64 steps. Each step enables a state, allowing for a state to be designated for several steps.
A pool of 20 sequences, up to 64 steps each, may be stored in controller memory for quick recall and assignment to any of the 4 sequencers.
Each state supports two of digital events as inputs that can designate the end of the associated step.
Time in seconds or minutes, a manual advance, or a digital event can be used to terminate a sequencer step and cause the sequence to advance.
The operational sequence for the steps is retained in a separate sequence file in the memory pool of the controller that may be selected on-demand through a user interface or via a recipe (variables).
Configuration Functions Basic functions that you will use to configure a Sequence. Sequence Editor Create/Edit a Sequence under the File-New or File-Open menus. Accesses the Sequence Editor. Sequence Pool When you select "Sequences" from the Recipe menu, the "Sequence Pool" dialog box will be displayed. Through this display, you will add a new sequence or delete an existing one and also enter the properties function and the "Edit Sequence" function to set up each sequence. Sequence Properties Sequence Properties is information for the sequencer: Label, Description, a Jog Step, and Time Units. Sequence Setup (EDIT) Sequence Setup or Edit consists of configuring each step of the Sequence with a State Number and Name, Time In Step, Time Next Step, Event 1 Next Step, Event 2 Next Step, Advance next step, and an Auxiliary value.
180
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Recipes Recipe Overview
Recipe Overview
22. Recipes
Multiple meanings of "recipe"
Loop control users apply the word "recipe" differently in different contexts. There is no industry standard for the word's meaning. In a broader sense, a recipe is any collection of data specific to a process setup that can be downloaded into and then run as part of controller's function block configuration. The following are recipe types:
Recipe (Variables)
Set Point Profile
Set Point Schedule
Sequence
Notice the first recipe type is also called a recipe. The two uses of the word "recipe" can get confusing. In this narrower sense, a recipe is a collection of data--specifically, variables. To distinguish it from the broader meaning HC Designer calls it "recipe (variables)".
To one user a recipe is a collection of variables; to another user a recipe is a set point profile; to another user a recipe is a set point schedule; to another it's a sequence. These different uses of the word "recipe" are all ok as long as you understand they are all recipes in the broader sense.
A recipe needs a configuration for context
A recipe by itself is ineffective; it must be associated with a specific controller configuration to give it context. Therefore, when creating or opening a recipe you must specify for which configuration the recipe applies to. Set Point Profiles are excluded from this requirement.
Recipe type
Recipe Setpoint Profile Setpoint Schedule Sequence
How linked to configuration
Variable tag names Not linked to configuration Event labels State Name, Event Signal #1, Event Signal # 2
Compatibility
It is up to you to understand how your recipes will work with your configurations. For example, when you download a recipe (variables) (.rcp) to a controller, the recipe's variables, sequential order and their values might make sense in one controller configuration but not another.
Recipe locations Once created, a recipe can reside in several places. Be aware that having multiple copies of a recipe can cause mix-ups. For example, suppose you've created a recipe (any type) called COOKIES. It can reside in the following places.
COOKIES saved as a separate recipe file to disk or floppy. Recipe files can be added to a recipe pool. (See Recipe file types.)
COOKIES in the recipe pool of a configuration saved to disk as a .CDE file.
COOKIES in the recipe pool of a currently open configuration in the software. (See Recipes menu)
COOKIES in the recipe pool of your controller's running configuration. Here it is available to be loaded into the controller's function block configuration.
COOKIES actively loaded and running in your controller's function blocks.
This example applies to all recipe types (recipe (variables), schedules, sequences, profiles).
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
181
November 2019
Recipes Recipes Menu
Recipe file types After creating a recipe or editing one in the recipe pool, you can save a recipe to disk using the following extensions (assigned automatically). Recipe (variables): .RCP Set Point Profile: .PRF Set Point Schedule: .SCH Sequence: .SEQ When part of a configuration's recipe pool, a recipe is not saved as a separate file but is saved in a "slot" in the pool as part of the configuration (.CDE). Any recipe can be accessed in the configuration's recipe pools and saved as its own recipe file if desired.
Recipes Menu
Accesses all recipe pools. To learn about the different recipe types read Recipe Overview.
Menu Selection Allocate Recipe Memory Recipes (Variables)... Setpoint Profiles...
Setpoint Schedules...
Sequences...
Function
Allocates the controller's memory for the four recipe types. This is the number of recipes that can be stored in the controller's four recipe pools. Recipes in these pools can be loaded and run by Recipe Selection Blocks, Programmers, Schedulers, and Sequencers. As recipe memory usage increases, less memory is available for other parts of your configuration (such as function blocks).
A recipe (variables) is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingredients needed to make a product or run a particular batch. This selection opens the Recipe Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Recipe details. You can save the selected recipe item to a file; open a recipe file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected recipe item to a controller's recipe pool.
Setpoint Program (Profile) configuration provides a quick and easy way to create, edit, and save different ramp/soak (setpoint) profiles for the Setpoint Programmer (SPP) control blocks in the configuration. This selection opens the Setpoint Profile Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Setpoint Profile details. You can save the selected SPP item to a file; open a SPP file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected SPP item to a controller's Setpoint Profiles pool.
Setpoint Schedule configuration provides a quick and easy way to create, edit, and save different Setpoint Schedules for the Setpoint Scheduler (SPS) control blocks in the configuration. This selection opens the Setpoint Schedule Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Setpoint Schedules details. You can save the selected SPS item to a file; open a SPS file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected SPS item to a controller's Setpoint Schedule pool.
Sequence configuration provides a series of inter-related events used to startup or shut-down a unit process, or a series of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to produce a final product. This selection opens the Sequence Pool dialog box and allows viewing, adding, editing, and printing of Sequence details. You can save the selected SEQ item to a file; open a SEQ file and insert it into the pool; and download the selected SEQ item to a controller's Sequence pool.
182
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Recipe (Variables) Introduction
23. Recipe (Variables)
Introduction
Each recipe consists of Variables, and carries its own unique recipe number and name for identification. (The names are descriptive references [aliases] and uniqueness is not enforced. Unique names are recommended to avoid operator confusion). The selected Variables were assigned during the Function Block Diagram Configuration.
It is possible to edit the setting of any recipe Variables through the Recipe Setup display at the operator interface. This means that an operator can adjust individual ingredient amounts in the recipe; but the ingredients (item's Variable Name), the order of the ingredients, and the recipe's number and name are under configuration control.
The recipe variable list is configured using the Designer application. An operator will be able to change individual item values through the Operator Interface.
For automatic loading of a setpoint profile in addition to other variables, a variable representing a profile number may be included in the recipe. This would also apply to a schedule or sequence number.
Recipe Attributes
A recipe is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingredients needed to make a product or run a particular batch. The items represent Analog and/or Digital Points that were assigned in the Function Block Configuration and are identified by their Variable Names. Recipes have these basic attributes: Recipe Number - A unique number must be assigned for each recipe that is configured. Numbers can be assigned in any sequence with gaps between numbers, but no two recipes can be given the same number. Recipe Name - A descriptive name must be assigned consisting of letters or numbers with no spaces. Thus, a name can be any combination of letters and numbers without spaces. Note that lowercase letters are automatically converted to uppercase letters. Recipe Variables - A list of Variables can be compiled for each recipe. A valid Variable and desired setting must be specified for each recipe item. Adjustable Settings - The setting for an analog point can be any appropriate value from99999 to 99999, and a digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state. It is possible to edit/change any recipe item/Variable Name setting through the "Edit Recipe" Setup dialog box during configuration.
Recipe (Variables) Configuration
Overview
A recipe is a list of Variables with settings that define the ingredients needed to make a product or run a particular batch. The items represent Analog and/or Digital Points that are assigned in the Function Block Configuration and are identified by their Variable Names.
Configuration Functions
Basic functions that you will use to configure a Recipe:
Recipe Editor Create/Edit a Recipe under the File-New or File-Open menus. Accesses the Recipe Editor.
Recipe Pool When you select "Recipes" from the Recipe menu, the "Recipe Pool " dialog box will be displayed. Through this display, you will add a new recipe or delete an existing one and also enter the properties function and the "Edit Recipe" function to set up each recipe.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
183
November 2019
Recipe (Variables) Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles
Recipe Properties
The Recipe Properties is merely a name assigned to the recipe, which will be added to the pool. You can also include a descriptor.
Recipe Setup (EDIT)
Recipe Set Up or Edit consists of selecting Variable names, assigning an analog value or digital state, and adding them to a list of Recipe items.
Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles
Recipes can be given a 16-character name and shown on the Recipe Menu display for user selection (accessed through the Main Menu selections of the Operator Interface).
A Recipe can automatically load a stored profile number for use by a specific Set Point Programmer. To do this connect an Analog Variable to the NPGM pin of the Set Point Programmer block given a name such as PROFNUM (see figure below). This Variable is added to the variable list for a recipe and given a number corresponding to the profile number to be loaded. Upon selection and loading of the recipe at the Operator Interface, the programmer will also load the profile number listed in the recipe. The operation of the programmer to run this profile is from the standard Set Point Programmer display.
As an example, for a selection of a SP Profile number 2, the entries into the Edit Recipe dialog box
would be
VARIABLE NAME = PROFNUM
VALUE = 2
184
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Recipe (Variables) Create/Edit Recipe (Variables) File
Create/Edit Recipe (Variables) File
Creates/edits a group of variables to be saved as a file (.RCP). File can be downloaded to the recipe pool. A recipe in the pool can later be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration. The file assumes that the variables are in a certain order in the configuration. Make sure that this order is preserved when loading into a controller's active configuration. Changes to variables via deletions, renaming, or re-directing may affect the recipe content.
Step/Item Select File, Open.
OR Select File, New. Select Recipes tab. Select Recipes (Variables).
Action/Description Let's you choose an .RCP file to edit. After selecting file the Recipe Editor appears.
"Choose a new file type" box appears. Recipe types appear. The Recipe Editor appears.
THEN Select a Reference Configuration.
Name and Description Variable Tag List
Recipe Items Name Value
Delete Print Save Download
A recipe must have a configuration to give it context. Select an open configuration from the pull-down list. If none available, select Open Configuration to open one. The configuration will open. Click back to Recipe Editor and select the reference configuration. Identify the recipe. Lists all variable tags in the reference configuration. Click on a tag and click Add to add it to the recipe. Lists all variables in the recipe. Name of variable
Value/state of variable. If analog variable, enter a value in the value field. If digital variable, select ON or OFF.
Deletes selected item from recipe. Prints the recipe Saves the recipe as .RCP file. Downloads recipe to the controller's recipe pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
185
November 2019
Recipe (Variables) Recipe Pool
Recipe Pool
Introduction
This is the recipe (variables) pool. The Recipe Pool lets you add or delete a Recipe on a list of configured Recipes and also enter the "Properties" function and the "Edit Recipe " function to set up each recipe.
Configuration
When you select "Recipes (Variables)" from the Recipes menu, the "Recipe Pool" dialog box will be displayed. From left to right the icons are:
ADD a Recipe: Put cursor on an empty pool line and select the NEW Icon. The "Recipe Properties" dialog box will open. EDIT the Properties of an Existing Profile: Select the Worksheet Properties Icon. The "Recipe properties" dialog box will open. EDIT a Recipe: Select the Edit Recipe Icon. The "Edit Recipe" dialog box will appear. COPY and PASTE: Select a recipe from the pool window, then select the Copy Icon. Select another location in the pool window, then select the Paste Icon. The copied recipe will be inserted into the location selected. DELETE a Recipe: Click on a recipe name and then click on the Delete icon. PRINT a Recipe: Click on a recipe name and then select the Print icon. The "Print" dialog box will appear. Select OK. A recipe report will be printed with all the information entered on the "Recipe Properties" dialog box. [Variable, Description, Value or State] SAVE a Recipe: To save a recipe as a .rcp file, click on a recipe name and then select the Save icon. The "Save As" dialog box will appear. OPEN a Recipe: To open a previously saved .rcp file and insert it into the pool, click on the Open icon. DOWNLOAD a Recipe: To download a recipe to the controller's recipe pool, click on the Download icon.
186
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Recipe (Variables) Setup/Edit a Recipe in Pool
Setup/Edit a Recipe in Pool
The "Edit Recipes" dialog box lets you set up or edit a recipe listed in the "Recipe Pool." Make sure you have clicked on "Properties " and have given that specific recipe a name and description. See RECIPE POOL before proceeding. Procedure
1. Click on a recipe name in the active field and select "Recipe" or double click on the recipe name. The "Edit Recipe" dialog box will appear.
2. To ADD Variable to a Recipe: Select a variable and click on ADD. A variable number will appear under "Recipe Items".
3. To DELETE a Variable from a Recipe: Select a variable number from the "Recipe Items" field, then click "Delete".
4. To SET UP a Recipe Item From the "Recipe Items" list, select a variable name from the list of recipe items.
5. If it is an analog variable, enter a value in the value field. 6. If it is a digital variable, select ON or OFF, from the drop-down menu in the Value field, as a
digital state for the variable. 7. Repeat this procedure for each recipe variable desired for the recipe you are configuring. 8. Click "OK". The length of the Recipe (number of variables) will appear in the "Recipe Pool". 9. Click "CLOSE" on the "Recipe Pool' dialog box to complete the configuration.
Recipe Properties
The Recipe Properties dialog box contains fields for you to enter: · a recipe name you want assigned to the recipe, which will be added to the pool. · a descriptor of 16 characters.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
187
November 2019
Setpoint Profiles Create/Edit Setpoint Profile File
24. Setpoint Profiles Create/Edit Setpoint Profile File
Creates/edits a setpoint profile be saved as a file (.PRF). File can be downloaded to the setpoint profile pool. A profile in the pool can be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration.
Step/Item Select File, Open.
OR Select File, New. Select Recipes tab. Select Setpoint Profile THEN
Name and Description Properties
Ramp Type Eng. Units Time Units Aux. Out Units Guar. Hold Type Guar. Hold High Guar. Hold Low Setpoint Type Add Insert Delete Type
SP Value
Time/Rate
Action/Description Let's you choose a .PRF file to edit. After selecting file the Profile Editor appears.
"Choose a new file type" box appears. Recipe types appear. The Profile Editor appears.
Identify the profile.
This function lets you set the properties for the profile. The information configured here will appear in the Edit SP Profile dialog box.
Properties of the profile. You can change these under Properties.
Adds a step. Inserts a step. Deletes selected step. Ramp or Soak. A ramp segment is a starting setpoint and the time or rate to reach the setpoint of the following segment. Typically, segment #1 will be a ramp.
Setpoint value set for Ramp (starting Setpoint value) and Soak (soak setpoint value). Ramp time is determined in either: TIME*-Hours or Minutes Range =0:00 hr. to 999:59 hr. / 0:00 min. to 999:59 min.
OR RATE*-EU/MIN or EU/HR Range =0 to 999.99 *This selection of time or rate is made when you configure properties. Make this selection before entering any Ramp. NOTE: When Ramp unit is configured for TIME, entering "0" will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak.
188
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Step/Item Aux. Out
Guar. Hold Events
Print Save Download
Setpoint Profiles Create/Edit Setpoint Profile File
Action/Description
In addition to the main ramp and soak output value, a second analog value is available for each step of the profile. This output is a fixed soak value, which may be used to provide a setpoint value for a secondary control loop in the process. An example would be a ramp and soak temperature program combined with pressure setpoints for each step of the profile.
OFF or ON. Choose ON to hold the program if a process variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint.
You can configure 1 to 16 segment events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment events are digital switches that provide ON/OFF outputs through an SPEV control block. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains ON until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment. Note that segment events are not interrupted by soak time delays when the process variable is outside the guaranteed soak band. Events turn ON as soon as the previous segment is completed even if the process variable has not reached the soak setpoint. When the program completes, the events are held at current value until the programmer is returned to the ready state.
Prints the profile.
Saves the profile as .PRF file.
Downloads profile to the controller's Setpoint Profile Pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
189
November 2019
Setpoint Profiles Setpoint Profile Properties
Setpoint Profile Properties
Introduction
This function lets you set the properties for the program selected in the Setpoint Profile Pool. Appears when creating a new profile or editing one in the setpoint profile pool.
Parameters
1. Enter the properties information in the appropriate fields in the dialog box, then click "OK".
Parameter
Parameter Description
Entry Information
TEXT
Label
Profile Name
8 characters
Descriptor
Description of Profile
16 characters
Primary Output Label
Primary Output Descriptor Name.
8 characters
Primary Output Engineering Units
Primary Output Engineering Units descriptor
4 characters
Auxiliary Output Label
Auxiliary Output Descriptor name
8 characters
Auxiliary Output Engineering Units
Auxiliary Output Engineering Units descriptor
Auxiliary Output Engineering Units descriptor
GENERAL
Ramp Type
Rate
Each ramp segment's time specifies the RATE at which that profile's output will reach the next segment.
Click on Radio button
Time
Each ramp segment's time is the TIME allotted to the profile's output to reach the next segment's value in hours or minutes.
Click on Radio button
Guaranteed Hold Type
None
No guaranteed hold if a PV deviates a specified Click on Radio button amount above or below the profile output.
Per Segment All Soaks
Let's you select specific segments for guaranteed soak where you set up the profile ramps and soaks.
All soaks will have a guaranteed soak.
Click on Radio button Click on Radio button
All Segments
All segments will have a guaranteed soak
Click on Radio button
190
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Setpoint Profiles Setpoint Profile Properties
Time Units Hours
Minutes
This selection assigns the time units of all segments in HOURS.
This selection assigns the time units of all segments in MINUTES.
Click on Radio button Click on Radio button
Guaranteed Hold High
Guaranteed Hold High
Set Point type Initial
A Number in Engineering Units above the setpoint outside of which the timer halts
Enter a Number in Engineering Units below the setpoint outside of which the timer halts.
Enter a value Enter a value
With this selection, profiles will ramp to the next segment SP value from the current value.
Click on Radio button
Target
LOOP/JOG Jog Segment Loop Start Segment End Segment
Cycles
START/RESTART Restart Rate
With this selection, profiles will ramp to the current segment SP value from the current value.
Segment number jog will go to.
This designates the number of the first segment of the loop. This designates the number of the last segment of the loop. The last segment of a program must be a soak segment. Last segment of a loop can be a ramp or soak.
This number lets the program repeat (loop) a specified number of time from beginning to end. An entry of 0 will cause an indefinite loop.
The Restart Rate value is used to return the process to the last operating setpoint prior to power loss when restart input is connected to power off timing block.
Click on Radio button
Enter a value Enter a value from 1 to 49 Enter a value from 2 to 50
Enter a value from 0 to 100
Enter a value in Engineering Units
2. Click on the tab to access the properties for that tab.
3. Enter the information required for each tab then click "OK". 4. Click on the profile name in the Setpoint Profile Pool and select the Edit Segments Icon (3rd
from left) from the Toolbar on the dialog box.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
191
November 2019
Setpoint Schedules Create/Edit Setpoint Schedule file
25. Setpoint Schedules
Create/Edit Setpoint Schedule file
Creates/edits a setpoint schedule be saved as a file (.SCH). File can be downloaded to the setpoint schedule pool. A schedule in the pool can be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration.
Step/Item Select File, Open.
OR Select File, New. Select Recipes tab. Select Setpoint Schedule.
THEN Select a Reference Configuration. Name and Description
Properties Time SP1-SP8 Events 1-16
Aux1-Aux8 GHold1-GHold8
Recycle Segment
Action/Description
Let's you choose a .SCH file to edit. After selecting file the Schedule Editor appears.
"Choose a new file type" box appears. Recipe types appear. The Schedule Editor appears.
A schedule must have a configuration to give it context. Select an open configuration from the pull-down list. If none available, select Open Configuration to open one. The configuration will open. Click back to Schedule Editor and select the reference configuration. Identify the schedule.
Sets properties for the schedule, such as time units and guaranteed hold limits. Length of time for the segment. Setpoint values. For ramp segments these are the starting values. Segment events are digital switches that provide ON/OFF output through an SPS function block. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains on until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment. Select from the drop-down menu which events you want to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. The auxiliary block supports up to 8 soak only outputs. You can assign values to all eight Auxiliary Outputs for each segment. Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for each setpoint output. Actions for the guarantee soak may be set on a per segment basis for OFF, HIGH setpoint deviation, LOW setpoint deviation or both HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations. Click on an active field and select a GHOLD Type from Drop-down menu: OFF - No Guaranteed Hold HIGH setpoint deviation - The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above the Setpoint value set. LOW setpoint deviation - The schedule will hold if a PV deviates below the Setpoint value set on the "Setpoint Schedule Properties" dialog box. HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations - The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above or below the Setpoint value set on the "Setpoint Schedule Properties" dialog box. The segment number at which a recycle will start. Enter a value 0 to 50
192
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Setpoint Schedules Setpoint Schedule Pool
Step/Item Recycle Count
Delete Print Save Download
Action/Description
This number lets the schedule repeat (loop) a specified number of times. Enter a value 0-999 or 0 for infinite. Deletes selected item from schedule. Prints the schedule. Saves the schedule as .SCH file. Downloads schedule to the controller's schedule pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration.
Setpoint Schedule Pool
Introduction
The SP Schedule Pool lets you add or delete a schedule on a list of configured schedules. Through this dialog box you will set the properties for each schedule and then set up or edit the information for each segment that make up a schedule.
Configuration
When you select "Setpoint Schedules" from the Recipe menu, the "Setpoint Schedule Pool" dialog box will be displayed. Through this display, you will add a new schedule or delete an existing one and also enter the set properties function and the "Edit Schedule" function to set up each schedule.
From left to right the icons are:
To ADD a Schedule: Select the NEW Icon. The "Setpoint Schedule Properties " dialog box will open.
To EDIT the Properties of an Existing Schedule: Select the Worksheet Properties Icon. The "Setpoint Schedule Properties " dialog box will open.
To EDIT a Schedule: Select the Edit Segments Icon. The "Edit Setpoint Schedule" dialog box will appear.
COPY and PASTE: Select a schedule from the pool window, then select the Copy Icon. Select another location in the pool window, then select the Paste Icon. The copied schedule will be inserted into the location selected.
To DELETE a Schedule: Click on a schedule name and then click on the Delete icon.
PRINT a Schedule: Click on a schedule name and select the Print icon. The "Print" dialog box will appear. Select OK. A profile report will be printed with all the information entered on the tabs of the "Setpoint Schedule Properties" dialog box.
SAVE a Schedule: To save a Schedule as a .sch file, click on a recipe name and then select the Save icon. The "Save As" dialog box will appear.
OPEN a Schedule: To open a previously saved .sch file and insert it into the pool, click on the Open icon.
DOWNLOAD a Schedule: To download a Schedule to the controller's Schedule pool, click on the Download icon.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
193
November 2019
Setpoint Schedules Setup/Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool
Setup/Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool
Introduction
The "Edit Schedule" dialog box lets you set up or edit a schedule from the schedules listed in the "Setpoint Schedule Pool."
Make sure you have clicked on "Properties " and have configured the properties for that specific Schedule.
Edit a Schedule
Click on a schedule name in the active field and select the Edit Segments Icon (3rd from left) from the Toolbar on the dialog box or double click on the schedule name.
The "Edit Schedule Segments" dialog box will appear with the selected Schedule indicated on the top banner. The Designer presents multiple segments at a time to view and edit.
To ADD a Segment Click on ADD on the dialog box. A new Segment number will appear at the bottom of the segment list.
To DELETE a Segment Click on a segment number in the field and click "Delete" on the dialog box. The segment will be deleted and all the segment numbers following the deletion will be changed.
To EDIT a Segment Each segment contains the following Segment attributes: (click on field for drop down menu to appear for some selections)
Parameter
Parameter Description
Entry Information
Time
Length of time for the segment Time Units were selected in the "Setpoint Schedule Function Block Properties " Dialog Box
Value in Minutes or Hours, whichever has been selected.
Setpoint Values
Setpoint 1 through Setpoint 8
Enter a starting setpoint value in each active field
Ghold Type
[Ghold1 thru Ghold8]
Setpoint guarantee is provided for the master block setpoints with a single symmetrical value for each setpoint output. Actions for the guarantee soak may be set on a per segment basis for OFF, HIGH setpoint deviation, LOW setpoint deviation or both HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations.
OFF - No Guaranteed Hold
HIGH setpoint deviation
The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above the Setpoint value set.
LOW setpoint deviation
The schedule will hold if a PV deviates below the Setpoint value set on the "Setpoint Schedule Properties" dialog box.
HIGH and LOW setpoint deviations
The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above or below the Setpoint value set on the "Setpoint Schedule Properties" dialog box.
Click on an active field and select a GHOLD Type from Drop-down menu
194
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Setpoint Schedules Setup/Edit Setpoint Schedule in Pool
Parameter
Auxiliary Outputs [Aux1 thru Aux8]
Parameter Description
The auxiliary block supports up to 8 soak only outputs. You can assign values to all eight Auxiliary Outputs for each segment.
Entry Information
Enter values for all Auxiliary Outputs in the appropriate fields.
Recycle Segment The segment number at which a recycle will start
Recycle Count
Events [Events 1 thru 16]
This number lets the schedule repeat (loop) a specified number of times.
Segment events are digital switches that provide ON/OFF output through an SPS function block .
When a segment event is turned ON, it remains on until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment.
Enter a value 0 to 50
Enter a value 0-999 or 0 for infinite
Select, from the dropdown menu, which events you want to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Click on the box for each segment.
A zero will change to 1 in the selected event position
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
195
November 2019
Setpoint Schedules Setpoint Schedule Properties
Setpoint Schedule Properties
Introduction This function lets you set the properties for the schedule selected in the Setpoint Schedule Pool. If you are adding a schedule, this dialog box will automatically appear. It will also appear if you select the Worksheet Properties Icon (2nd from left) from the Toolbar on the dialog box. The information configured here will appear in the "Edit Schedule Segment" dialog box.
Configuration Refer to the table below and enter the properties information in the appropriate fields in the dialog box, then click "OK". You will return to the "Setpoint Schedule Pool " dialog box.
Parameter General
Label Descriptor Jog Seg
Time Units
Hours Minutes Guaranteed Hold Limit
Parameter Description
Schedule Name Description of schedule Logic input (JOG) on state switch block will cause the schedule to jump to the start of the segment designated then continue. This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for all segments. Time unit in Hours Time unit in Minutes The schedule will hold if a PV deviates above or below (or both) the Setpoint value set here.
Select Guaranteed Hold Type on the "Setpoint Edit Schedule" dialog box.
Entry Information
8 characters 16 characters Segment number jog will go to
Click on Radio button Click on Radio button Enter a setpoint value
196
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Sequences Create/Edit Sequence File
26. Sequences
Create/Edit Sequence File
Creates/edits a sequence be saved as a file (.SEQ). File can be downloaded to the sequence pool. A sequence in the pool can be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration.
Step/Item Select File, Open. OR Select File, New. Select Recipes tab. Select Sequence. THEN Select a Reference Configuration.
Name and Description Properties Add Time SP1-SP8 State
State name Time in Step Time in Next Step
Event Signal #1 Event 1 Next Step
Event Signal #2
Action/Description
Let's you choose a .SEQ file to edit. After selecting file the Sequence Editor appears.
"Choose a new file type" box appears. Recipe types appear. The Sequence Editor appears.
A sequence must have a configuration to give it context. Select an open configuration from the pull-down list. If none available, select Open Configuration to open one. The configuration will open. Click back to Sequence Editor and select the reference configuration. Identify the sequence.
Sets properties for the sequence, such as jog step and time units. Adds a step to the sequence. Length of time for the segment. Setpoint values at the start of the segment. State number for each step of the sequence. A state may be selected multiple times in the sequence. Since time is an attribute of the sequence, the state may be activated for a different time period each time it is selected. (The order does not have to be sequential). Enter a State Number in each active field. States are numbered from 1 to 50. Name of current state. Enter a state name (12 character max.) Examples: Heating, Cooling, Mixing. Time duration value for each step of the sequence. Time units can be changed under Properties. Designates the step the sequence will advance to when the time expires. It can be any step in the sequence, including steps that have been previously executed. Enter 0 to stop the sequence after current step expires and to hold the outputs. Click on the Event Signal #1 field and from the drop-down menu, select the event you want signal #1 to represent. Each state of the sequence can also be configured to accept two different events to terminate the step. Whichever occurs first--an Off-to-On (rising edge) transition of either event signal OR elapsed step time--will cause the sequence to advance to the appropriate next step. Enter a value for Event 1 Next Step. Click on the Event Signal #2 field and from the drop-down menu, select the event you want signal #2 to represent.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
197
November 2019
Step/Item Event 2 Next Step
Advance Next Step Aux. Value Delete Print Save Download
Sequences Create/Edit Sequence File
Action/Description
Each state of the sequence can also be configured to accept two different events to terminate the step. Whichever occurs first--an Off-to-On (rising edge) transition of either event signal OR elapsed step time--will cause the sequence to advance to the appropriate next step. Enter a value for Event 2 Next Step. Allows you to select an appropriate action for the manual advance OI action or function block digital advance input. Enter a value. Enter an analog output value associated with each state. Deletes selected step from sequence. Prints the sequence. Saves the sequence as .SEQ file. Downloads sequence to the controller's schedule pool where it can be edited or loaded into the controller's active configuration.
198
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Sequences Sequence Pool
Sequence Pool
Introduction The Sequence Pool lets you add or delete a Sequence on a list of configured Sequences and also enter the "Properties" function and the "Edit Sequence " function to set up each Sequence. Configuration When you select "Sequences" from the Recipes menu, the "Sequence Pool" dialog box will be displayed. From left to right the icons are:
ADD a Sequence: Select the NEW Icon. The "Sequence Properties" dialog box will open.
EDIT the Properties of an Existing Sequence: Select the Worksheet Properties Icon. The "Sequence Properties" dialog box will open.
EDIT a Sequence: Select the Edit Sequence Icon. The "Setup/Edit Sequences" dialog box will appear.
COPY and PASTE: Select a recipe from the pool window, then select the Copy Icon. Select another location in the pool window, then select the Paste Icon. The copied sequence will be inserted into the location selected.
DELETE a Sequence: Click on a sequence name and then click on the Delete icon.
PRINT a Sequence: Click on a sequence name and then select the Print icon. The "Print" dialog box will appear. Select OK. A sequence report will be printed with all the information entered on the "Sequence Properties" dialog box. [Label, Description, Jog Step, and Time Units in Hours or Minutes]
SAVE a Sequence: To save a sequence as an .seq file, click on a recipe name and then select the Save icon. The "Save As" dialog box will appear.
OPEN a Sequence: To open a previously saved .seq file and insert it into the pool, click on the Open icon.
DOWNLOAD a Sequence: To download a sequence to the controller's sequence pool, click on the Download icon.
Setup/Edit Sequence in Pool
Introduction
The "Edit Sequence" dialog box lets you set up or edit a sequence from the sequences listed in the "Sequence Pool" dialog box.
Make sure you have clicked on "Edit Properties" toolbar icon and have configured the properties for that specific Sequence.
Edit a Sequence
Click on a Sequence name in the active field and select the Edit Item Icon (3rd from left) from the Toolbar on the dialog box or double click on the Sequence name.
The "Edit Sequence" dialog box will appear with the selected Sequence indicated on the top banner. Several Steps are shown for viewing and editing.
To ADD a Step Click on ADD on the dialog box. A new Step number will appear at the bottom of the Step list.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
199
November 2019
Sequences Setup/Edit Sequence in Pool
To DELETE a Step Click on a Step number in the field and click "Delete" on the dialog box. The Step will be deleted and all the step numbers following the deletion will be changed.
To EDIT a Step Each step contains the following Step attributes:
Parameter
Parameter Description
Entry Information
State Number
State number for each step of the sequence. A state may be selected multiple times in the sequence. Since time is an attribute of the sequence, the state may be activated for a different time period each time it is selected. (The order does not have to be sequential)
Enter a State Number in each active field. States are numbered from 1 to 50
State Name
Name of current state
N/A
Time in Step
Time duration value for each step of the sequence.
Time Units are selected on the Sequence Properties dialog box
Enter values for all Steps in the appropriate fields.
Time Next Step
Designates the step the sequence will advance to when the time expires. It can be any step in the sequence, including steps that have been previously executed.
Enter a number for the next step when time expires on current step. Enter 0 to stop the sequence after current step expires and to hold the outputs.
Event Signal #1
The event signal is a digital signal defined in the sequencer block. When Event Signal #1 signal transitions from FALSE to TRUE the sequence will jump to the step defined in Event 1 Next Step.
Event 1 Next Step An off-to-on (rising edge) transition of Event Signal #1 will cause the sequence to advance to the step specified here.
N/A
Enter a value for Event 1 Next Step.
Event Signal #2 The event signal is a digital signal defined in N/A the sequencer block. When Event Signal #2 signal transitions from FALSE to TRUE the sequence will jump to the step defined in Event 2 Next Step.
Event 2 Next Step An off-to-on (rising edge) transition of Event Enter a value for Event 2 Next Signal #2 will cause the sequence to advance Step. to the step specified here.
Advance Next Step
Allows you to select an appropriate action for the manual advance OI action or function block digital advance input
Enter an "Advance Next Step" value.
Aux Value
Enter an analog output value associated with Enter an analog output value. each state.
200
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Sequences Sequence Properties
Sequence Properties
Introduction This function lets you set the properties for the sequence selected in the Sequence Pool. If you are adding a Sequence, this dialog box will automatically appear. It will also appear if you select the Worksheet Properties Icon (2nd from left) from the Toolbar on the dialog box. The information configured here will appear in the "Edit Sequence" dialog box.
Configuration Refer to the table below and enter the properties information in the appropriate fields in the dialog box, then click "OK" to return to the "Sequence Pool" dialog box.
Parameter
Parameter Description
General
Label
Sequence Name
Descriptor
Description of Sequence
Jog Step
Logic input (JOG) on state switch block will cause the Sequencer to jump to the start of the step designated then continue.
Time Units
This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for all Steps.
Hours Time unit in Hours
Minutes Time unit in Minutes
Entry Information
6 characters 16 characters Step number jog will go to
Click on Radio button Click on Radio button
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
201
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Overview
27. On-Line Monitoring
Overview
Designer Monitoring provides the following: · Multiple, concurrent function block Monitor Windows - You can open as many Function Block monitor windows as you want until you run out of physical resources on the PC - You can open Function Block monitor windows concurrently for Function Blocks on different Function Block Diagram Worksheets - Function Block monitor window can be resized to better suit concurrent windows · Provides a Watch Window to view groups of related data such as I/O and Signal Tags · Allows Monitoring to cross all FBD worksheet boundaries - There are no boundaries - You can call up Function Block monitor windows from any or all FBD worksheets concurrently - The Watch Window implicitly crosses all worksheets - All other diagnostic windows can also be open concurrently
Access Select "Monitor Mode" from the "Monitor" menu or select the "Monitor" icon from the Main Toolbar.
You can specify the monitor update rate that determines how often data is collected from the controller during monitoring. This update rate can be set to either 1/4 second, 1/2 second, 1 second, or 5 seconds. See "Monitor Toolbar" for the available Monitoring and Diagnostic Windows. See "Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode" for on-line monitoring indicators.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
203
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Enter Monitor Mode
Enter Monitor Mode
Select "Monitor Mode" from the "Monitor" menu or select the "Monitor" icon from the Main Toolbar.
While in monitor mode, edits to the configuration cannot be made.
Procedure
1
Selecting this menu item opens the "Enter Monitor Mode" dialog box
2
Select the controller to monitor using the Port and Address fields on this dialog. The dialog
box also indicates the Protocol and Baud rate for the selected controller.
3
Click the OK button on this dialog to enter monitor mode for this configuration.
4
The background of the function block diagram worksheet changes to yellow and the cursor
includes the Monitor icon [Eye} with the arrow.
See "Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode".
5
The Monitor Toolbar will appear, whose buttons you can use to toggle (show or hide) the
various monitor windows. These windows can also be toggled using menu items on the
Monitor menu.
6
When exiting monitor mode, any monitor windows still open will be closed and will be re-
opened at their same positions when monitor mode is re-entered for this configuration.
Note: After downloading the configuration to the controller and triggering a hot start, going to monitor mode immediately may show "database mismatch error". It is recommended to allow controller to complete the hot start before entering monitoring mode.
204
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode
On-Line Monitoring Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode
When "Monitor Mode" is selected there are several indications that the configuration is in Monitor Mode.
1. The "Connected" indicator on the Status Bar will blink to show that the controller, whose name appears next to it, is being monitored. 2. The cursor changes to include the Monitor icon [Eye] along with the arrow.
3. The word <Monitoring> appears in the configuration Title Bar at the top of the diagram.
4. The background color of the Function Block Diagram changes to YELLOW.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
205
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Monitor Update Rate
Monitor Update Rate
Introduction You can specify the monitor update rate that determines how often data is collected from the controller during monitoring. This update rate can be set to either 1/4 second, 1/2 second, 1 second, or 5 seconds. This option is allowed only during edit mode, not while you are monitoring the controller. The default monitor update rate is 1 second and this update rate is remembered between sessions of the software. If you want to monitor from a relatively slow computer set the monitor update rate to a slow setting.
Procedure Select "Set Update Rate" from the "Monitor" menu on the Main Drop-down menus. Select an Update Rate from the Sub-menu:
1/4 Second 1/2 Second 1 Second, or 5 seconds
Monitor Toolbar
Click on ICON to open a dialog box. More than one dialog box can be open at a time. The Monitor Toolbar toggles monitor windows for the following:
ICON
Function Watch Summary
Controller Diagnostics
Window Comments Toggles the Watch Summary Window that lets you view groups of related data such as I/O and Signal Tags.
Toggles the Controller Diagnostics Window that lets you view the controller parameters and values.
Rack Diagnostics
Serial S1 Port Diagnostics
Serial S2 Port Diagnostics
Network Port Diagnostics
Toggles the I/O Rack Diagnostics window that lets you view the Rack Diagnostics, Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics (except C30 CPU), and the I/O Module diagnostics.
Opens the Serial Port S1 (RS232 Default) Configuration Port Diagnostics window that lets you view the parameters and values of the S1 port (default R2-232) on the controller.
Toggles the Serial Port S2 (RS485 default) OI Port Diagnostics window that lets you view the S2 port (default RS485 Operator Interface) parameters and values.
Toggles the Network Port Diagnostics window that lets you view the network port parameters and values.
206
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
ICON
On-Line Monitoring Monitor Toolbar
Function
Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics (except C30 CPU)
Host Connections Diagnostics
Window Comments Toggles the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics window that lets you view the expansion port parameters and values.
Toggles the Host Connections window that lets you view the host connections parameters and values.
Peer-to-Peer Diagnostics
Function Block Monitor
Toggles the Peer-to-Peer Connections Diagnostics window that lets you view the Peer-to-Peer parameters and values.
Toggles the Monitor Function Block window that lets you monitor key parameters of the selected Function Block.
Forced Blocks Window
Toggles the Forced Block Summary Window Window that lets you see all the function blocks that have forced outputs.
All Function Block Windows
Let's you toggle the function block windows that are open - Display or Hide
All Pins
All Monitor Windows
Let's you toggle (display/hide) monitoring values (numeric or On/Off state) at all input and output pins that are shown.
Let's you toggle the Monitor windows that are open - Display or Hide.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
207
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring How Do I Start Monitoring
How Do I Start Monitoring
Procedure 1. Either upload the configuration from the controller to your PC or Open the file from disk that matches what's in the controller. Designer will inform you if the file you opened is not currently loaded in the controller. In this case, limited monitoring capabilities will be available. For example, you won't be able to monitor function blocks or bring up the Watch Summary Window. 2. Press the MONITOR button on the main toolbar.
The "Enter Monitor Mode" dialog box will open. Note: While in monitor mode, you won't be able to edit the configuration. For example, you won't be able to add or delete function blocks, move items on the Function Block Diagram, or change configuration parameters of function blocks on their property pages. You will, however, be able to view the configuration parameters of function blocks on their property pages, but these values aren't being read from the controller. They exist only in the configuration open in Designer. That is why it is recommended that you perform an upload from the controller before monitoring so that current values from the controller are shown on the function block property pages."
3. Select the Comm port and controller address to monitor. Press OK. It checks to see if information is the same in the controller.
4. The feedback will be the monitor toolbar.
The Status Bar shows
on bar indicates that monitor mode is in effect. The green square
is an activity indicator and flashes bright green when requests for monitored data are made to the
controller.
There is also the word "Monitoring" indicated on the banner of the worksheet, the FBD worksheet background turns yellow and an eye appears with the cursor arrow. See "Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode" for on-line monitoring indicators.
208
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Right Click Procedure in Monitor Mode
Right Click Procedure in Monitor Mode
Depending where you right-mouse click on the FBD worksheet during monitoring, the resulting menu will have some differences. In each column is shown the menu items that appear when you right-click on that item on your FBD during Monitor Mode.
Function Variable Block
Right click on these
Yellow Space
Signal Connectors
Page
Tags
Connectors
To see these choices
Monitor Block
Monitor Execution Watch
Watch
Block
Order Summary Summary
Watch Summary
Watch Summary
Watch Fast Logic Add to Add to Watch
Summary Order
Watch
Summary
Summary
Add to Watch Summary
Monitor
Add to
Find
Pins
Watch
Summary
Monitor Monitor Pins Monitor Pins Pins
Help
Monitor Pins
Go To
Help
Help
Help
Execution Order
Help
View
Find Where Used
Find Where Find Where
Used
Used
Copy
Execution Properties Properties Properties
Order
(File)
(Signal (Connector)
Tag)
Properties
Properties (Function
Block)
Copy
Properties (Function
Block)
Right click on these
Input Pins
Output Pins
Wire Node
To see these choices
Trace
Monitor Pins
Monitor Pins
Help
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
209
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Function Block Monitor Window
Function Block Monitor Window
The Designer provides live monitoring of all Function Blocks. To access, select "Monitor Function Block" from the "Monitor" menu or from the Monitor toolbar.
Or Right Click a function block or variable in Monitor Mode and select the Monitor Block menu item. The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. For "Loop" blocks, the current mode will be shown in the lower right of the window
LSP AUTO = Local Setpoint, Automatic Output LSP MAN = Local Setpoint, Manual Output RSP AUTO = Remote Setpoint, Automatic Output RSP MAN = Remote Setpoint, Manual Output To change Mode settings of a loop block, click on a radio button to select
Local or Remote Setpoint Automatic or Manual Output Click the "Change Mode" button to change the mode. Changing a Parameter Some blocks allow you to change some parameters. Click on a parameter name, if allowed the "Write" field will become active. Enter an override value in the field. Channel/Sensor Status I/O blocks display a parameter called Channel/Sensor Status to indicate any abnormalities. See I/O Channel/Sensor Status for details. Click on "X" to exit box.
Attention: All function blocks dialog boxes have a "MONITOR" button when in Monitor mode that will access this window. Below is an example of a Monitor Window for a PID block.
210
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Forcing/Unforcing an Output
Forcing/Unforcing an Output
Overview The ability to force and unforce the output [pin] of function blocks and variables from the Designer is provided as an aid to startup and configuration troubleshooting. The feature is limited to single output per block. The majority of blocks have a single output, and most of the multiple output blocks have an obvious primary (i.e. most important) output. This may apply to the block's primary analog output (such as for an AI block) or digital output of a logic block (such as for a DI or DO block). Note: A function block input is never forced. Some blocks (i.e. Loop Blocks) do not have a forceable output. It is not possible to force/unforce function block outputs from the Operator Interface. Variables, which are normally set to 0 on download of a new configuration or a change in configuration can have their output value changed on-line. You can also preset the value of a variable using an initialization procedure via function blocks or by setting the Initial Value field on the variable's property page. You can also display a list of blocks that are presently being forced. See "Forced Blocks Window " ATTENTION: All forced outputs are cleared by a CONTROLLER COLD START. In password protected redundant controllers, forcing of parameters does not work after fail over. User shall exit the monitor mode in HCD and reenters the password to enforce the parameters. CAUTION During Live-Monitoring (especially fast logic), it is possible to see transient states where the block output is inconsistent with its input values. This occurs because it is possible for the input values and outputs values to be taken from different controller execution cycles. Therefore, either the viewed inputs or outputs may be "older". SOLUTION: Recognize this possibility when interpreting results. Use forcing if necessary to create and assess static conditions.
Forcing an Output
1. Do an Upload to make sure the file is current.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
211
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Forcing/Unforcing an Output
2. Enter Monitor Mode - Select the Monitor Mode icon from the Main Toolbar, or select "Monitor Mode" from the Monitor menu. The FBD background turns yellow.
3. Right-Click on a selected function block, then select "Monitor Block". The "Monitor Block" dialog box will open.
4. Select "OUT" or "Output" in the dialog box of the Live Monitor screen. If Forcing is allowed, the Write field becomes active. Enter the Output value in the entry field next to the "Write" button. NOTE: for Loop Blocks, put the controller into Manual Mode.
5. Click "WRITE". The output value will change to the value entered for forcing. The word Forced will appear next to "Output" and "Block Status".
Changing (Force) a Digital Value from ON to OFF Select "ON" or "OFF" from the drop-down list box and click "WRITE". The selection for the parameter selected will change to the selection entered for forcing.
If there is a problem with the forcing Check your communication Set Up for correct settings Make sure the Mode Switch on the controller is in "RUN " mode.
Unforcing an Output Right-Click on a selected function block, then select "Monitor Block". The "Monitor Block" dialog box will open.
Click on the forced output (indicated by FORCED). Click Unforce. The original selection for the parameter will return.
212
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Forced Blocks Window
Forced Blocks Window
Overview
The Forced Blocks window provides a list view of all function blocks that have forced outputs and provides a quick means of removing the forced outputs on selected block. The Forcing and Unforcing of function block outputs is a feature that is only available in Monitor Mode. For more information on how to force function block outputs see Forcing/Unforcing an Output.
Opening the Window
The Forced Blocks Window is represented by the Exclamation Mark icon and can be accessed in 3 ways as described below. For each method, the system must already be in Monitor Mode for the option to be available.
Monitor Menu 1. Select Monitor from the main application menu. 2. Select Forced Blocks... to launch the Forced Blocks window.
Monitor Mode Toolbar
1. Click on the toolbar.
button in the Monitor Mode Toolbar from the main application
Utilities Worksheet
1. Select the Utilities tab from the main Worksheet Category Tabs to display the Controller Utilities worksheet.
2. Click on the
button to bring up the Controller Diagnostics submenu.
3. Select Forced Blocks... to launch the Forced Blocks window.
Unforcing Block Outputs
There are two versions of the Forced Blocks dialog window, depending on whether or not the controller being monitored is one that supports the SIL Safety standard. For SIL compliant controllers the version shown on the left below will be displayed. For non SIL compliant controllers the version shown on the right below will be displayed.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
213
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Forced Blocks Window
Both versions of the window have a list box displaying a list of all of the function blocks that currently have forced outputs.
· Function blocks located on a Safety worksheet have a yellow background. · Function blocks located on a Process worksheet have a white background. · If no function blocks have forced outputs the word NONE is displayed. · If new forces are added or removed from individual function block monitor windows the
list will be updated dynamically.
Both versions of the window have a Clear ALL Forces button that allows all forced outputs to be cleared with one click. For Safety enabled controllers there are additional Clear PROCESS Forces and Clear SAFETY Forces buttons that allow forced outputs on the Process and Safety worksheets to be cleared independently. In either, case a warning message similar to the one shown below will be displayed requesting confirmation before the action is taken.
214
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Forced Blocks Window
Both versions of the window have a Unforce Selected Item button that allows the output of a single function block to be unforced. To enable this button, click on the desired function block as shown below. (Multiple selections using the Shift or Ctrl keys are not allowed.)
Clicking on the Unforce Selected Item will now clear the forced output on the selected function block. In this case the action takes place immediately and no confirmation is required.
Exiting
To close the Force Blocks window click on the X in the top right-hand corner.
See Also
Monitor Mode Forcing/Unforcing an Output Watch Summary Inputs/Outputs
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
215
November 2019
How Do I Stop Monitoring
Press the MONITOR button on the main toolbar.
On-Line Monitoring How Do I Stop Monitoring
This will return the associated configuration to EDIT mode. Feedback will be the monitor button (unpressed), and all open monitor windows will disappear. The FBD Worksheet background returns to white and the eye disappears from the cursor.
Attention: If you return from EDIT mode to Monitor mode, all your previously opened monitor windows will appear (if the same configuration)
Logic Flow
Overview In Monitor Mode, Logic Flow is shown within the Configuration Worksheet Monitor Window. Soft Wires are identified to represent the Logic state at the pin of the source in monitor mode. Function Block pin values can be monitored briefly or you can stick the values on display until you dismiss them. Analog Values are in decimal format and Digital States are On/Off. Digital Signal Tags and corresponding Connectors at the block pins include color-coded representations for state changes. Page Connectors include color-coded representations for state changes. Logic Inversion indicators are pictorially identified on the block and are color-coded to identify logic states impeding or permitting logic flow.
CAUTION During Live-Monitoring (especially fast scan), it is possible to see transient states where the block output is inconsistent with its input values. This occurs because it is possible for the input values and outputs values to be taken from different controller execution cycles. Therefore, either the viewed inputs or outputs may be "older". Logic monitoring is appropriate for static conditions.
Soft Wire Identification
Solid/Green = On, Dotted/Red = Off Logic State at the Output Pin = ON The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid GREEN. Logic State at the Output Pin = OFF The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dashed RED.
216
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Logic Flow
Solid/Red = On, Dotted/Green = Off
Logic State at the Output Pin = ON
The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid RED.
Logic State at the Output Pin = OFF
The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dotted GREEN.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
217
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Logic Flow
Signal Tags and Connectors/Page Connectors Digital Signal Tags and Connectors/Page Connectors include color-coded representations for state changes as substitutes for soft-wires. To select one of the following color schemes, go to Monitor menu, then Set Logic State Colors.
Solid/Green = On, Dotted/Red = Off Logic State at the Output Pin = ON The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid GREEN. Logic State at the Output Pin = OFF The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dashed RED.
Solid/Red = On, Dotted/Green = Off Logic State at the Output Pin = ON The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in solid RED. Logic State at the Output Pin = OFF The Digital Signal Tag and its corresponding Connector/Page Connector will have the entire length of its tail drawn in dotted GREEN.
218
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
On-Line Monitoring Logic Flow
Displaying Function Block's Pin Values Function Block pin value(s) can be monitored briefly and you can set one or all of the values on display (constant display) until you dismiss them. Analog Values are in decimal format and Digital States are On/Off. Displaying a Single Pin Value
Displaying Briefly Hover the cursor over any pin momentarily. The pin's value will be displayed next to the pin as long as the cursor remains motionless over the pin. To remove the briefly displayed value: remove the cursor from the pin.
Displaying Until Dismissed (Constant Display) Hover the cursor over any pin and left-click while the pin value is displayed, or right-click and select "Monitor Pins" from the menu. To remove the constantly displayed value: left-click on the pin again, or right-click and select "Monitor Pins" again from the menu.
Displaying All Function Block Pin Values
Displaying Briefly
Hover the cursor over the interior of a function block momentarily. All of the Function Blocks pin values will be displayed next to the pins as long as the cursor remains motionless over the block.
To remove the briefly displayed values: remove the cursor from the block.
Displaying Until Dismissed
Hover the cursor over the interior of a function block and left-click while the pin values are displayed, or right-click and select "Monitor Pins" from the menu.
To remove the constantly displayed value: left-click on the pin again, or right-click and select "Monitor Pins" again from the menu.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
219
November 2019
Toggling All Pin Values on Worksheet
On-Line Monitoring Logic Flow
Select
on the Monitor Toolbar or select "Monitor Pins" from the Monitor menu.
NOTE: Any pin values shown when monitor mode is exited will be re-shown when Monitor mode is re-entered. This only applies to the current session of the application and not between sessions of the application.
Logic Inversion Color Codes
Certain function blocks (such as Discrete Input/Output and logic blocks) have an Invert feature that, when selected, inverts the state of the block's input or output. These blocks have special logic inversion indicators when viewed in monitor mode.
The examples below use the color scheme
RED = OFF GREEN = ON.
To select the opposite color scheme
RED = ON GREEN = OFF, go to Monitor menu, then Set Logic State Colors.
Logic Blocks Inversion Indicators
RED = OFF GREEN = ON
Digital Input Blocks Inversion Indicators
ON
or Inverted ON
OFF
or Inverted OFF
220
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25 November 2019
Digital Output Blocks Inversion Indicators
ON
or Inverted ON
OFF
or Inverted OFF
On-Line Monitoring Logic Flow
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
221
November 2019
This page has been intentionally left blank
On-Line Monitoring Logic Flow
222
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Overview
Overview
28. Watch Summary Window
Overview
The Watch Summary window is a dockable (movable), re-sizable window that lets you view the current values of groups of related data, such as I/O and Signal Tags, from the controller.
Opening the Window
The Watch Summary window is represented by the icon and can be accessed in 2 ways as described below. For each method, the system must already be in Monitor Mode for the option to be available.
Monitor Menu 1. Select Monitor from the main application menu. 2. Select Watch Summary... to launch the Watch Summary window.
Monitor Mode Toolbar
1. Click on the button in the Monitor Mode Toolbar from the main application toolbar.
Using the Window
The Watch Summary window will have a slightly different appearance depending on the revision of software and the type of controller, however, the general layout is as shown below:
· Tab control to select from different groups of data · Pull-down selectors at the top to further filter items within the group · Table to display information and current values of the selected items
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
223
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Overview
The number of different data groups available through the tabs at the bottom of the window will depend on the revision of software running in the controller. The possible selections are listed below (click on any of the links to view an example of the selected data for that tab):
· User-Defined (Customized list of Signals, Page Connectors and/or Variables) · Signals (Analog, Digital) · Page Connectors (Analog, Digital) · Variables (Analog, Digital) · Inputs / Outputs (AI, AO, DI, DO) · Display Groups (Not available in revision 6.0 and higher)
The number of pull-down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type. For SIL-compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the data items within the group to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on; Process, Safety or All (both Process and Safety worksheets).
For all controller types there will be a pull-down selector which allows the data items within the group to be further filtered based on a sub-type, such as analog versus digital, or input versus output. The list of available sub-types is determined by the data group selected through the tab control.
Information about each item in the filtered list is displayed in the table in the middle of the window. The amount of information displayed will vary based on the selected tab, but will always include a current value from the controller. The rows of data may be sorted by clicking in the header for most of the configuration information columns. Subsequent clicking within a column header will toggle between ascending and descending sort orders. (See also Sort Feature)
For SIL-compliant controller types, the rows of data will be colored coded. Items located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background, whereas items located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background.
Docking and Undocking the Window
Double clicking in the Title Bar area of the Watch Summary Window will toggle its docked state. If the window is docked, double clicking in the title bar area will undock the window. If the window is undocked
· Double-clicking in the title bar area will dock the window at it last docked position · Dragging the window to the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the main viewing area of the
application will dock the window at that location
[Press and hold the CTRL key down to prevent Docking when moving the window]
Hot Links
You can click on any I/O function block or Signal on the Controller Worksheet or any I/O function block, Signal, or Variable in the Watch Window and that item will be located on the Function Block Diagram.
As you move the mouse over a HOT LINK, the text changes to Underlined Blue and the cursor
changes to a hand . (See also Find Feature)
224
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Find Feature
Writes or Forces
By clicking on the item in the Value column, you may write a value such as for a Variable or force a value for an analog input or digital input. For I/O, a Forced column will indicate that the I/O point is forced.
Find Feature
You can click on any I/O function block or Signal on the Controller Worksheet or any I/O function block, Signal, or Variable in the Watch Window and that item will be located on the Function Block Diagram. As you move the mouse over a HOT LINK, the text changes to Underlined Blue and
the cursor changes to a Hand. You can also find within the Watch Summary window itself any tag, descriptor, signal number, variable number, as well as rack number, module number, channel number, or block on the Inputs / Outputs tab. For example, to find a tag in the Watch Summary window, click anywhere in the Tag Name column and start typing the characters of the tag you want to find. The tag matching the characters you type will scroll into view. To find a tag name and prevent the tag hot link from re-positioning the Function Block Diagram, right-click the tag name instead of left-clicking it.
Sort Function
The Sort function in the Watch Summary lets you sort the tag list by: Signal # Variable # Tag Name Descriptor Block At the top of the Watch Window, click on the Column title. The list will be sorted accordingly. Clicking the column title the first time sorts the list in ascending (alphabetical) order. Clicking the column title a second time sorts the list in descending (reverse alphabetical) order, and so forth.
Watch Summary - User Defined
On the User-Defined tab of the Watch Summary Window you can view a list of tags that you want to monitor. You can add the following to the list:
· Signals · Page Connectors · Variables
The Watch Summary window doesn't have to be visible in order to add items to the list of UserDefined tags to display, nor do the drop-down selectors on the User-Defined tab have to match what you'll be adding.
For example, you can add a signal to the User-Defined tab of the Watch Summary window even if the window is not visible or the User-Defined tab's "Show" drop-down selector is set to All Variables. As long as you are in monitor mode, you can add items at any time.
Note that there is no limit to the number of items that you can add to the list, but the list is not saved between sessions of the software.
To add Signals, Page Connectors or Variables to the user-defined watch list:
1. Navigate to the function block worksheet that contains the item. 2. Right-click on the item to display the context menu. 3. Select Add to Watch Summary from the context menu
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
225
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Watch Summary - User Defined
(See the Watch Window Summary for instructions on how to view the Watch Summary Window.)
The number of pull-down selectors at the top of the User-Defined tab of the Watch Summary window will depend on the controller type. For SIL-compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the signals to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on:
· All (both Process and Safety worksheets) · Process · Safety
For all controller types there will be a pull-down selector which allows the type of user-defined tags to be selected:
· All · All Signals · All Page Connectors · All Variables
(Note that in this case "All" refers to the list of user-defined items and not to the full configuration.)
For each item in the selection list, its Tag Name, Descriptor and Value are displayed in the table, as shown below.
For SIL-compliant controller types, the rows of data will be colored coded. Items located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background, whereas items located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background.
You can change the value of any item that can be forced by entering a new value in the Value column.
You can re-order the items in the list by selecting a single row or range of rows in the list and dragging the row(s) to another position in the list. You can also delete selected items in the list.
To select the first row in a range:
· Positioning the cursor over the gray cell at the beginning of the row. · Wait for the cursor to change to an arrow. · Click on the gray cell.
To select the last row in a range:
· Positioning the cursor over the gray cell at the beginning of the row. · Wait for the cursor to change to an arrow. · Hold down the Shift key and click on the gray cell.
226
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Watch Summary - Signals
To reposition the selected row(s):
· Position the cursor over any gray cell in the selected rows. · Drag and drop the rows to their new position. · A red line will appear as you drag the rows to show you where the row that was clicked will
be dropped when you release the mouse button.
To delete the selected row(s) press the Delete key.
Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I/O on the Function Block Diagram.
Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column.
See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window.
Watch Summary - Signals
On the User-Defined tab of the Watch Summary Window you can view a list of tags that you want to monitor. You can add the following to the list:
· Signals · Page Connectors · Variables
The Watch Summary window doesn't have to be visible in order to add items to the list of UserDefined tags to display, nor do the drop-down selectors on the User-Defined tab have to match what you'll be adding.
For example, you can add a signal to the User-Defined tab of the Watch Summary window even if the window is not visible or the User-Defined tab's "Show" drop-down selector is set to All Variables. As long as you are in monitor mode, you can add items at any time.
Note that there is no limit to the number of items that you can add to the list, but the list is not saved between sessions of the software.
To add Signals, Page Connectors or Variables to the user-defined watch list:
1. Navigate to the function block worksheet that contains the item. 2. Right-click on the item to display the context menu. 3. Select Add to Watch Summary from the context menu
(See the Watch Window Summary for instructions on how to view the Watch Summary Window.)
The number of pull-down selectors at the top of the User-Defined tab of the Watch Summary window will depend on the controller type. For SIL-compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the signals to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on:
· All (both Process and Safety worksheets) · Process · Safety
For all controller types there will be a pull-down selector which allows the type of user-defined tags to be selected:
· All · All Signals · All Page Connectors · All Variables
(Note that in this case "All" refers to the list of user-defined items and not to the full configuration.)
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
227
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Watch Summary - Signals
For each item in the selection list, its Tag Name, Descriptor and Value are displayed in the table, as shown below.
Watch Summary - Page Connectors
The number of pull-down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type. For SIL-compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the page connectors to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on:
· All (both Process and Safety worksheets) · Process · Safety
For all controller types there will be a pull-down selector which allows the type of page connectors to be selected:
· All Page Connectors · Analog Page Connectors · Digital Page Connectors
For each page connector in the selection list, its Tag Name and Value are displayed in the table, as shown below.
For SIL-compliant controller types, the rows of data will be colored coded. Page connectors located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background, whereas page connectors located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background. You cannot change the value of a page connector as they are Read Only.
Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I/O on the Function Block Diagram. Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column. See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window.
228
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Watch Summary - Variables
Watch Summary - Variables
The number of pull-down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type. For SIL-compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the variables to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on:
· All (both Process and Safety worksheets) · Process · Safety
For all controller types there will be a pull-down selector which allows the type of variable to be selected:
· All Variables · Analog Variables · Digital Variables
For each variable in the selection list, its Number, Tag Name, Descriptor and Value are displayed in the table, as shown below.
For SIL-compliant controller types, the rows of data will be colored coded. Variables located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background, whereas variables located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background.
You can change a variable by clicking on a variable value and entering a new value for an analog variable or selecting the appropriate user-configured OFF or ON label from a drop-down menu for a Digital variable.
Note: the new value entered is not written to the controller until you move off of the current cell either by tabbing out of the cell using the Shift+Tab keys or clicking on another cell using the mouse. If the value you want to change also shows engineering units, as in "100.0 LBS", for example, you just need to change the number portion; you don't need to delete the engineering units or type it in again.
Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I/O on the Function Block Diagram.
Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column.
See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
229
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Watch Summary - Inputs/Outputs
Watch Summary - Inputs/Outputs
The number of pull-down selectors at the top of the display will depend on the controller type. For SIL-compliant controllers there will be a leading selector which allows the I/O points to be filtered based on the type of function block worksheet they are located on:
· All (both Process and Safety worksheets) · Process · Safety
For all controller types there will be a pull-down selector which allows the type of I/O point to be selected:
· Analog Inputs · Analog Outputs · Digital Inputs · Digital Outputs
For each Input/Output in the selection list, its Rack, Module, Channel Number, Block Name, Tag Name, Descriptor, Value, and Status are displayed in the table, as shown below.
NOTE: Only "assigned" inputs and outputs are shown in this window. Inputs and outputs whose rack, module, and channel that are all zero are not shown in this window. These unassigned inputs and outputs are shown on the controller worksheet, however.
For SIL-compliant controller types, the rows of data will be colored coded. I/O blocks located on a Safety worksheet will be displayed with a yellow background, whereas I/O blocks located on a Process worksheet will be displayed on a white background.
You can Force an I/O by clicking on a value and entering a new value for an analog input or selecting the appropriate user-configured OFF or ON label from a drop-down menu for a digital input or output. A checked box and the word FORCED will appear in the Status column indicating that the I/O is forced. [Click off the value cell to see the box]
To Remove a Force, double-click to deselect the checked box.
Notes: · Analog outputs cannot be forced. · Safety I/O points cannot be forced while the controller is in Run mode.
230
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Watch Summary Window Watch Summary - Display Groups · Time Proportioning outputs and Three position Step outputs cannot be monitored since the live value is maintained only on the D.O. module itself. The text "n/a" (for "not available) is shown as the value for these outputs. Use the Find Feature to locate a specific I/O on the Function Block Diagram. Use the Sort Function to sort the table rows by a specific column. See the Watch Window Summary for more details on this window.
Watch Summary - Display Groups
This tab will only appear for Controller Revision Rev 4.4 and below. Watch Summary - Display Groups lets the user monitor the same points configured on the Operator Interface displays. Select a Display Group (Show Menu) then a Group Number (Group Menu) from the drop-down menus at the top of the dialog box. The window will monitor the Display Group selected. Note that new values can be written to the variables shown in this window.
Use the "Find Feature " to Find a specific tag on the Function Block Diagram. Use the "Sort Function " to sort the tag list by a specific column.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
231
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics
29. Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics
Introduction The Designer provides live monitoring of Controller diagnostics. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation and displays the controller status and diagnostics.
1. Select "Controller Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu, from the Monitor toolbar.
. (This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet") 2. The Controller Diagnostics (C30/C50/C70) or Diagnostic Overview (C70R/C75) window will appear. See below. 3. The "Controller Diagnostic Status Indications" explains the parameters and their values. 4. Click on "X" to exit box. C30/C50/C70:
232
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
C70R /C75:
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
233
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications
Controller Diagnostics Status Indications
For C30/C50/C70, the "Controller Diagnostics" window appears. For C70R/C75, the "Diagnostics Overview" window appears. C30/C50/C70 Controller Diagnostics parameters
Parameter
Value
System Diagnostics Good
Forced Output
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Controller is in RUN mode.
Executes the run mode. Outputs are updated.
None
A block has an output None that is forced.
Remove force on block output.
Invalid Config.
Switch Fault
Invalid Change Of Mode
A configuration that exceeds the loop capacity of the controller was downloaded or an invalid configuration exists.
An empty database is created.
A failure is detected in the switch reading.
All control blocks stop running
All I/O scanning ceases. This forces the modules into failsafe.
Controller mode is
Controller will not go to
changed to RUN-Locked RUN-Locked mode.
while there are forces on
safety sheets.
Safety Configuration mismatch
Controller mode is
Controller will not go to
changed to RUN-Locked RUN-Locked mode.
when safety
configuration is changed
at run-time
Download a valid configuration.
Replace CPU.
To clear the diagnostic: 1. Change mode back to RUN mode OR 2. Clear all safety forces using HCD through Monitor>Forced Blocks OR 3. Force a cold-start To clear the diagnostic: 1. Change mode back to RUN mode OR 2. Force a cold-start
CPU Diagnostics
Good Watchdog
N/A
N/A
N/A
Watchdog reset resulting Associated rack monitor 1.
from system timeout
block's RACK OK pin is 2. turned off.
ASYS block's HW OK pin is 3.
turned off.
4.
Force a cold start.
Upgrade control file software.
Replace CPU board.
Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.
234
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Parameter
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications
Value Prefetch Abort
Address Error Undefine Error Data Abort Software Interrupt Error
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
CPU failed when attempting to fetch an instruction from the prefetch register.
1. Controller performs a 1. Force a cold start.
restart 2. Associated rack
2. Isolate system from noise and force a cold start.
monitor block's RACK 3. Replace CPU board OK pin is turned off.
3. ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
The reserved exception Same as above occurred for an unknown reason.
Same as above
Bad Instruction Detected Same as above
Same as above
CPU failed when attempting to access data.
Same as above
Same as above
Software Interrupt occurred which is not supported by the software.
Same as above
Same as above
Memory Diagnostics
Good 5 Day Low Battery Warning Low Battery
Flash Error
N/A
N/A
N/A
Estimated battery life is less than 5 days.
1. Associated rack monitor Replace battery. block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
2. ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
Battery voltage is low.
1. Associated rack
Replace battery.
monitor block's RACK
OK pin is turned off.
2. ASYS block's LOW
BATTERY pin is
turned on.
3. ASYS block's HW OK
pin is turned off.
Flash failed to burn
1. Associated rack
1. Force a cold start.
monitor block's RACK 2. Replace CPU board. OK pin is turned off.
2. ASYS block's HW
OK pin is turned
off.
Real Time Clock Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
235
November 2019
Parameter Diagnostics
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Not Programmed
RTC not programmed 1. Time and date is set to Program RTC. 00:00:00, January 1, 1970.
2. Associated rack monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
Bad Data
Bad date and time
Same as above
1. Program RTC. 2. Cycle power. 3. Replace CPU. 4. Replace boards in rack. 5. Replace rack
Programming Failure RTC failed to program Same as above
Same as above
Read Failure
Unable to read RTC Same as above
Same as above
Rack I/O Diagnostics
Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Module Error
One of the module diagnostics in the associated rack is set to WRONG MODULE, MODULE NO COMM (if the communications is failing due to the module not installed), BAD MODULE, or BAD CHANNEL.
Refer to related Module diagnostic.
Access the I/O Module diagnostics screen.
Hi Temp
One of the module
Refer to HI CJ
diagnostics in the
TEMPERATURE in
associated rack is set to Module diagnostics
HI CJ TEMPERATURE.
Access the I/O Module diagnostics screen
Rack Backplane Fail
The Main CPU/Scanner All associated module
·
is unable to successfully diagnostics are set to
communicate to any MODULE NO COMM.
modules that are in its
·
SPI backplane.
Refer to MODULE NO
COMM diagnostic for further
details.
· · · ·
Remove modules and check for bent pins on connectors.
Reinsert modules one at a time and note which module the diagnostic reoccurs, and replace that module.
Cycle power to the rack.
Replace the power supply.
Replace the rack.
Replace the CPU board.
236
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Parameter
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications
Value Rack Comm Fail
Rack SW incompatibility
Possible Cause
Controller Action
The Main CPU is unable Same as above to successfully communicate to an expansion rack that is in its configuration.
Please note that there are NO expansion racks permitted on the ControlEdge HC900C30 controller.
The Main CPU determined that its software is not compatible with the scanner module.
All associated module diagnostics are set to MODULE NO COMM.
Refer to MODULE NO COMM diagnostic for further details.
User Action
1. Verify that the expansion rack should be in the configuration
2. Verify that the jumpers on the scanner are setup for the correct rack address.
3. Check that expansion rack is on.
4. Check the expansion rack's status LED for diagnostic information.
5. Check that cable is connected to expansion rack.
6. If a hub is used, check that all cables are properly connected to the hub, proper crossover cables are used, and that hub is powered.
7. Cycle power to the rack. 8. Cycle power to the hub. 9. Replace the expansion
rack's power supply.
10. Replace the expansion rack.
11. Replace the expansion rack's scanner board.
1. Upgrade the scanner software either by replacing the module or doing a code-download.
2. Update Main CPU software either by replacing the module or doing a code download.
Comm Port Diagnostics
Good Warning
Failed
N/A
N/A
N/A
One of the comm port's is reporting an application error
Refer to related Comm port diagnostic
Access the Comm port diagnostics screen
One of the Comm port's Refer to related Comm port Same as above is reporting a physical or diagnostic data link failure
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
237
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications
C70R/C75 Diagnostic Overview parameters
Parameter
Value
Possible Cause
System Diagnostics Good
Controller is in RUN mode.
Controller Action
Executes the run mode. Outputs are updated.
User Action None
CPU Diagnostic
Good Rack `n'
Multiple Racks
Lead CPU Reserve CPU Serial Port S1 or S2 Network E1 or E2 Scanner Link
Redundancy Link
System is functional
None
None
Rack `n' is reporting a diagnostic
Diagnostic may cause a failover
Diagnostic may prevent a failover
Refer to the Rack Diagnostics for more details
More than one Rack is reporting a diagnostic
Diagnostic may cause a failover
Diagnostic may prevent a failover
Refer to the Rack Diagnostics for more details
The Lead CPU is reporting a diagnostic
None
Refer to the Lead CPU Diagnostics for more details
The Reserve CPU is reporting a diagnostic
None
Refer to the Reserve CPU Diagnostic for more details
There is a diagnostic on None the Lead CPU Serial Port (S1 or S2)
Refer to the Serial Port S1 or Serial Port S2 Diagnostic Screen for more details
There is a diagnostic on None the Lead CPU Network Port E1 or E2
Refer to the Network Port Diagnostic Screen for more details
Lead CPU is reporting a None diagnostic on the Scanner Link
Refer to the Lead CPU Diagnostic and the Scanner Link Diagnostic screens for more details
Lead CPU is reporting a diagnostic on the Redundancy Link. There is a problem with the communications between the Lead and Reserve CPUs.
None
Refer to the Lead and Reserve CPU Diagnostic screens for more details.
Check the Redundancy Link Diagnostic screen for more details
Memory Diagnostic See CPU Diagnostic for possible values
Real-Time Clock Diagnostic
See CPU Diagnostic for possible values
Communication Port Diagnostics
See CPU Diagnostic for possible values
238
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Parameter
Rack IO Diagnostics
Value
Possible Cause
See CPU Diagnostic for possible values
Diagnostics Controller Diagnostics Status Indications
Controller Action
User Action
Rack Comm Diagnostic
See CPU Diagnostic for possible values
Power Supply Diagnostic
See CPU Diagnostic for possible values
Reserve Available On Off
There is a Reserve CPU Available for failover
1. No Reserve CPU is System will not be able to 1.
available
perform a failover
2. Reserve CPU may
2.
be powered off
3. Reserve CPU is
powered on but
synchronizing with
3.
the Lead CPU
4. There may be other
physical problems
with the Reserve
CPU
Check that Reserve CPU is powered ON
If powered ON, check the Reserve status LED on the Reserve CPU and the RSM Module
Check Reserve CPU Diagnostics for additional details
Redundancy Link Diagnostics
Good Data Link Failure
Hardware Failure
1. No Reserve CPU is System will not be able to
available
perform a failover
2. Reserve CPU may be
powered off
3. Reserve CPU is
powered on but
synchronizing with
the Lead CPU
4. There may be other
physical problems
with the Reserve
CPU
There may be physical System will not be able to problems with the Lead perform a failover CPU
1. Check that Reserve CPU is powered ON
2. If powered ON, check the Reserve status LED on the Reserve CPU and the RSM Module
3. Check Reserve CPU Diagnostics for additional details
Replace the Lead CPU
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
239
November 2019
Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics
Rack Diagnostics
Introduction
The Designer provides live monitoring Rack diagnostics. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select the "Rack Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu or from the Monitor Toolbar.
(This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet"
2. The "Rack Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will appear.
3. Select a Rack from the "Monitoring Rack" drop-down menu on the dialog box. The information for the selected rack will appear on the dialog box.
4. The summary window will provide Controller status and diagnostic information for the selected Rack: Rack in Configuration - ON or Off High CJ Temp status - On or Off Revision Level of the Rack - Read Only Number of Slots - Read Only Rack Diagnostics - The status of the selected rack. Refer to "Controller Diagnostics Status Indications" for diagnostic messages. Not all diagnostics appear for expansion racks. Power Supply Diagnostics C70R/C75 only. Status of the rack's power supply/supplies. See Rack Diagnostics: Power Supply. Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics (except C30 CPU) - The status of the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics. Refer to "Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Status Indicators". Read the diagnostics for a particular rack. I/O Module Diagnostics - Status of the Modules shown in the list: Physical Type Configured as (type) Error Status. Model Number & Rev Level (scroll horizontally to view)
For status of individual I/O channels, see Function Block Monitor Window.
5. Click on upper right X to exit box.
240
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
C30/C50/C70:
Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
241
November 2019
C70R/C75:
Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics
242
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Rack Diagnostics: Power Supply
Rack Diagnostics: Power Supply
The Power Supply diagnostics provide status of the parameters shown in the list.
Parameter/ Message
Power Supply Status
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Unknown
No rack communication.
If under power I/O will switch to failsafe values Loss of Comms
If not powered (unpowered outputs) Loss of AC mains Bad power supply Failed scanner2
Redundant P/S is not present
Single power supply configuration
Redundant Power Backplane not detected
Status reported Rack continues to function properly
Status reported Rack continues to function properly
Power Supply PS-1 Failed (PS-1 LED is OFF)
No AC Mains on PS-1
Failed Power Supply Failed Redundant Power Backplane detection circuit
Diagnostic reported.
Rack continues to function properly.
Status posted.
(PS-1 LED is ON)
Failed rack backplane status signal
Failed Scanner2 status input
Power Supply PS-2 Failed (PS-2 LED is OFF)
No AC Main on PS2
Failed Power
Diagnostic reported.
Rack continues to function properly.
Status posted.
Determine & correct cause of communication failure
Restore rack operation Restore AC main power, reset breaker Replace Power supply Replace scanner2
No action required if single power supply rack.
If dual power supplies installed Replace Redundant Power Backplane Replace rack backplane Replace Scanner2.
Restore AC main power, reset breaker.
Replace Power Supply
Requires unit shutdown - Replace Redundant Power Backplane
Requires unit shutdown - Replace rack backplane.
Requires unit shutdown - Replace Scanner2.
Restore AC main power, reset breaker.
Replace Power
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
243
November 2019
Parameter/ Message
Power Supply Diagnostic
Diagnostics I/O Module Diagnostics Status Indications
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
Supply
Failed Redundant Power Backplane detection circuit
(PS-2 LED is ON)
Failed rack backplane status signal
Failed Scanner2 status input
Both Power
NA
Supplies are
Good
See Power Supply Status for possible values
None
User Action
Supply
Requires unit shutdown - Replace Redundant Power Backplane
Requires unit shutdown - Replace rack backplane.
Requires unit shutdown - Replace Scanner2
None
I/O Module Diagnostics Status Indications
In the Rack Diagnostics window, the subsection I/O Module Diagnostics displays the Error Status for each module in the rack. The following table lists the possible Error Statuses.
Error Status
Good
Hi CJ Temperature
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
N/A
Possible causes of this diagnostic are:
One of the two CJs on the module is indicating a temperature reading greater than 70 degrees C.
Both cold-junction sensors are failing to convert.
The CJs are converting properly, but their differential is greater than 10 degrees C.
N/A
Associated AI blocks that are configured as T/Cs set their fail pin on, their warn pin off, and their output pin to the failsafe value.
Associated AI blocks that are configured as T/Cs set their IO status to "CJ High Temperature" for reason 1 or "CJ Failure" for possible causes 2 and 3.
Associated rack monitor block's module fail pin is turned on.
Associated rack monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
Associated rack monitor block's HITEMP pin is turned on.
ASYS block's HITEMP pin is turned on.
ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
N/A
Improve ventilation to rack Replace AI module
244
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics I/O Module Diagnostics Status Indications
Error Status Wrong Module
#Module No Comm
Possible Cause
Controller Action
The module does not agree with the module required for the control scenario
Main CPU is unable to communicate to the module for one of the following reasons: Module is not installed The module cannot communicate with the controller CPU or the expansion rack CPU because of a backplane problem. Module is on an expansion rack and the expansion rack communications are failing
Associated blocks set their fail pin on, their warn pin off, and their output pin to the failsafe value.
Associated blocks set their IO status to "Channel No Comm".
Associated rack monitor block's module fail pin is turned on.
Associated rack monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
See Wrong Module.
Bad Module
Module is bad.
N/A
Module LED flashes
to indicate the
problem.
User Action
Verify configuration Replace module with the correct one.
Action is based on the IODIAG indication. If IODIAG is not MODULE ERROR, then follow the prescribed action defined for that diagnostic.
For MODULE ERROR, do the following: Verify configuration Install module. Check the communication cables that connect the expansion rack(s) to the Main Rack. Replace the controller or expansion rack backplane. See ControlEdge HC900 Controller Manual 51-52-25107, I/O Module Indicators. A table describes the LED flashes and what they mean.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
245
November 2019
Diagnostics I/O Channel/Sensor Status
Error Status
Bad Channel
Possible Cause
Controller Action
One or more channels in the module is bad.
The I/O rack's Scanner status LED and the Controller rack's status LED (not the module or channel LED) flash 6 times.
User Action
To determine which channel(s) are bad, monitor the function blocks corresponding to the channels in this module. See Function Block Monitor Window Check each I/O function block's "Channel/Sensor Status ". 2) To determine the cause, see ControlEdge HC900 Controller Manual 51-52-25107, I/O Module Indicators, Bad I/O Channel Diagnostics. A table describes the channel statuses and what they mean.
I/O Channel/Sensor Status
When monitoring blocks of the type in the table below, the Channel/Sensor Status is displayed. Statuses vary in severity; the more serious will trigger an error message/indicator elsewhere, such as a I/O Module Diagnostic Error or a flashing LED on the I/O rack.
Here is an alphabetical list of possible statuses for each I/O channel type.
Channel/Sensor
Channel type
Status
AI AO DI DO TPO TPSC PI PO FI QUAD
Possible Cause
User Action
Good
Normal operation
Bad Channel
There are two possible causes for Check terminal
this error:
connections.
1. If the channel is an Analog
Replace module.
Output: There is no physical output
device connected to this channel,
or the output device is showing an
"open" connection.
2. If the channel is a Pulse Output: The channel is failing to output the correct value.
A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.
Burnout Failure
The sensor T/C, RTD, or mV source -- is failing burnout checks. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.
Check terminal block connections
Replace source element
Replace module.
CJ Failure
Two conditions can create this failure.
Improve ventilation to rack.
1. Both cold-junction sensors are Replace AI module. failing to convert.
2. The CJs are converting properly, but their differential is greater than
246
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics I/O Channel/Sensor Status
Channel/Sensor
Channel type
Status
AI AO DI DO TPO TPSC PI PO FI QUAD
Possible Cause
10 degrees C.
In either case a HI CJ TEMP I/O module diagnostic is posted.
User Action
CJ High
Temperature
One of the CJs is indicating a temperature reading above 70 degrees C. A HI CJ TEMP I/O module diagnostic is posted.
Improve ventilation to rack.
Replace AI module.
CJ Warning
One of the cold-junction sensors is failing to convert. The temperature compensation for the thermocouple readings could have a slight error because only the good CJ is being used in the temperature calculation.
Clamp High
The AO block's input is greater than the block's configured high range value.
Clamp Low
The AO block's input is less than the block's configured low range value.
Disabled
AI channel is programmatically disabled
Failed to convert
When attempting to take a reading, Check the signal
the analog-to-digital (ADC) fails. level being applied to
This can occur if the incoming
the terminals.
signal is either too large or too small. It also could result if the
Replace module.
ADC circuit is failing. If the problem
is the ADC circuit, most likely other
channels will have the same
failure. A BAD CHANNEL I/O
module diagnostic is posted.
Forced
The point has been manually forced to its present value, probably via a PC host.
No Channel Available
There is no hardware on the I/O module to support this channel. For example, the customer configured Channel #15 for a given module, but there is an 8-channel module installed in the rack. A BAD CHANNEL I/O module diagnostic is posted.
No Comm
The Main CPU is unable to communicate to the channel. Possible reasons are module missing, wrong module installed, SPI backplane is failing, expansion rack is missing.
Over current
A Digital Output module detected
an excessive amount of current on
its output terminals. Note that this
message will only appear for the
32-channel DO module. A BAD
CHANNEL module diagnostic is
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
247
November 2019
Diagnostics I/O Channel/Sensor Status
Channel/Sensor
Channel type
Status
AI AO DI DO TPO TPSC PI PO FI QUAD
Possible Cause
posted.
User Action
Over range
The signal at the terminals is more Check the signal
than 10% over the range of the level being applied to
sensor.
the terminals.
Replace module.
Sensor & Range
type not available
The AI module installed in the rack does not support the range or sensor type configured for this channel. For example, this channel's AI function block is configured as a thermocouple, but there is a high-level AI module installed in the rack.
T/C Failing
When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured resistance indicates that the T/C's resistance is to a point where the burnout failure will result.
T/C Warning
When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured resistance is higher than normal.
Under range
The signal at the terminals is less than 10% below the range of the sensor.
Check the signal level being applied to the terminals.
Replace module.
Wrong Firmware Rev
The firmware in the AI module is not compatible with the firmware in the controller or scanner CPU, or
AI module does not support slidewire as an input type.
248
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Controller Ports Diagnostics
Accessing Port Diagnostics Overview
The Designer provides live monitoring of Controller Ports diagnostics. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu or from the Monitor toolbar. There is a sub-menu from which you can choose the type of port you want to monitor:
Toolbar
Menu
Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics
Serial Port S2 OI Port Diagnostics
Network Port Diagnostics Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics (except C30 CPU) Host Connections Diagnostics Peer-to-Peer Connections Diagnostics The specific monitoring dialog box for that selection will open.
Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Serial Port S1 Configuration Port (default RS232). The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu then select "Serial Port S1" from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar.
2. The "Serial Port S1 Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will appear. It shows Port Status, Diagnostics, Statistics and parameters for the Serial Port S1 Configuration Port. (This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet")
3. The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. 4. Click on "X" to exit box.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
249
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Refer to the Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics Status Indicators for status indications, possible cause, and actions to correct the problem.
250
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Serial Port S1 Configuration Port Diagnostics Status Indicators
The "Serial Port S1 Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list.
Parameter
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Serial Port S1
Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Port Diagnostics
Data Link Failure
A large number of messages are resulting in data link errors.
1.Rack 1 monitor block's COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.
2.Rack 1 monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
3.ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
4.If configured as a Modbus master:
ASYS and FSYS blocks' Modbus Master Fail pins are turned on.
Slave and read blocks associated with the slaves experiencing the failure have their read pins frozen to the last value read.
Slave blocks associated with the slaves experiencing the failure have their BAD COMM and NO SCAN pins turned on.
IN SCAN STATUS is set to NO for all slaves experiencing the failure.
COMM STATUS is set to BAD for all slaves experiencing the failure.
The slaves with the data link errors have a nonzero data link error count.
The slaves experiencing the failure are moved to the background scan rate.
1.Check baud rate
2.Check connectors
3.Check cable polarity
4.Isolate cabling from electrical interference
5.If RS232 to RS485 converter is used, check its power, switch/jumper settings, and polarity.
6.If configured as a Modbus master, use the slave status screens to determine which slaves are experiencing the problem. For those slaves check:
· power · connections · address · baud rate · parity · number of stop bits · for electrical interference · grounding · termination resistor (if at end of link)
7. The diagnostic is cleared by clearing the port's statistics.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
251
November 2019
Parameter
Value HW Failure
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Possible Cause
The DUART is failing to operate properly.
Controller Action
User Action
1.Rack 1 monitor block's COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.
2.Rack 1 monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
3.ASYS and FSYS blocks' HW OK pins are turned off.
4.If configured as a Modbus master:
i. ASYS and FSYS blocks' Modbus Master Fail pins are turned on.
Replace CPU module
ii. All Modbus slave and Modbus read blocks have their read pins frozen to the last value read.
iii. All slave blocks have their BAD COMM and NO SCAN pins turned on.
iv. IN SCAN STATUS is set to NO for all slaves.
v. COMM STATUS is set to BAD for all slaves in the function block diagram.
vi. Statistical data for all slaves is frozen.
vii. All slaves in the function block diagram are scanned at the background scan rate.
252
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Serial Port S2 Port Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the S2 Port. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu then select "Serial Port S2" from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar.
2. The "Serial Port S2 Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will appear. It shows Port Status, Diagnostics, Statistics and parameters for the Serial S2 Port (default RS485 for 559/1042 Operator Interface). (This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet").
3. The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. 4. Click on "X" to exit box. Refer to the Serial Port S2 Port Status Indicators for status indications, possible cause, and actions to correct the problem.
Serial Port S2 Port Status Indicators
The "Serial Port S2 Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list.
Parameter
Serial Port S2 Diagnostics
Value Good
Possible Cause N/A
Controller Action N/A
User Action N/A
Application Error
At least 1 response 1. Rack 1 monitor block's
to a host resulted in
COMPORT DIAG is
an exception code
set to WARNING.
or NAK.
2. Rack 1 monitor block's
RACK OK pin is
turned off.
3. ASYS block's HW OK
pin is turned off.
At host, determine which message is causing the exception code and fix.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
253
November 2019
Parameter
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Value Data Link Failure
Possible Cause
A large number of messages are resulting in data link errors.
Controller Action
1. Rack 1 monitor block's COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.
2. Rack 1 monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
4. If configured as a Modbus Master port, associated slave blocks have their read pins frozen to the last value read.
User Action
1. Check baud rate 2. Check
connectors
3. Check cable polarity
4. Isolate cabling from electrical interference
5. If RS232 to RS485 converter used, check its power, switch/jumper settings, and polarity.
HW Failure
The DUART is failing to operate properly.
Same as above
Replace CPU module
Network Port Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Ethernet Network Port. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu then select "Network Port" from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar.
(This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet" 2. The "Network Port Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will appear. It shows Port Status,
Diagnostics, Statistics and parameters for the Ethernet Network Port. 3. The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. 4. Click on "X" to exit box.
Refer to "Network Port Diagnostics Status Indicators" for status indications, possible cause, and actions to correct the problem.
254
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Network Port Diagnostic Status Indicators The "Network Port Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list.
Parameter
Network Port Diagnostics
Value Good
Possible Cause N/A
Controller Action N/A
User Action N/A
Network Setup Error
No IP Address
Hardware Failure
Controller/network names determined on network are illegal
DHCP and IP address are not configured
1. Rack 1 monitor block's COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.
2. Rack 1 monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
Same as above
Ethernet port tests failed during powerup.
Same as above
Correct the setup problem.
1.If a DHCP server is present, download a configuration that uses DHCP.
2.Enter an IP address Replace CPU Module
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
255
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Expansion I/O (except C30 CPU) Comm subsystem. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu then select "Expansion I/O Comm" from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar.
(This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet")
2. The "Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will appear. It shows Port Status, Diagnostics, Statistics and parameters for the I/O Expansion I/O Comm subsystem.
3. The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. 4. Click on "X" to exit box. Refer to "Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators" for status indications, possible cause, and actions to correct the problem.
Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators The "Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. (except C30 CPU)
256
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Parameter Value
Rack Comm Diagnostics
Good
Data Link Failure
Hardware Failure
Port A/B Cable Mismatch
Protocol Mismatch
Possible Cause Controller Action
User Action
N/A
N/A
N/A
The communications 1. Related rack monitor block's
1. Use the OI to determine which
to a particular rack is
RACK OK pin is turned off.
rack is experiencing the DLL
resulting in a lot of 2. Depending on the nature of the
errors. Verify that the
DLL errors.
DLL errors, the associated rack monitor block's module
expansion rack should be in the configuration
diagnostics, and pins could be 2. Verify that the jumpers on the
affected.
scanner are setup for the
correct rack address.
3. If a hub is used, check that all cables are properly connected
to the hub, proper crossover
cables are used, and that hub
is powered.
4. Cycle power to the rack.
5. Cycle power to the hub.
6. Replace the ControlEdge
HC900-C50 expansion rack's
power supply.
7. Replace the ControlEdge HC900-C50 expansion rack.
8. Replace the ControlEdge
HC900-C50 expansion rack's
scanner board.
9. Replace the main CPU.
The power-up test of 1. the expansion rack Ethernet controller 2. failed.
3.
4. 5.
All rack monitor block XIO PORT Replace main-CPU module DIAG are set to HWFAIL.
All rack monitor block RACK OK pins are turned off.
All modules in the configuration have their diagnostic set to MOD_NOCOMM, their rack monitor module fail pin is turned on., and the rack monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
The statuses for the AO and AI channels that are affected are set to BAD_CHANNEL.
C70R/C75 only. The Controller continues to run but is not
I/O cables from CPUA able to access the I/O on the
and CPUB are
associated rack
connected to the
wrong ports on the I/O
scanner CPU
Swap the cables so that I/O A is connected to I/O on CPUA and I/O B is connected to I/O on CPUB
The firmware version in the controller CPU is not compatible with the firmware version in the I/O scanner
Controller continues to run but is not able to access the I/O on the associated rack
Upgrade the firmware in the CPU and/or scanner to be compatible versions
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
257
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Host Connections Diagnostics The Designer provides live monitoring of the Host Connections. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu then select "Host Connections" from the list provided or from the Monitor toolbar.
(This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet") 2. The "Host Connections Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will appear. 3. The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. 4. Click on "X" to exit box. Refer to "Host Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators" for status indications, possible cause, and actions to correct the problem.
258
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Host Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators The "Network Host Connections Diagnostic Summary" dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list.
Parameter
Network Host Connections Diagnostics
Value Good Application Error
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
N/A
At least 1 response to a host resulted in an exception code
N/A
1.Rack 1 monitor block's COMPORT DIAG is set to WARNING.
2.Rack 1 monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
3.ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
N/A
At host, determine which message is causing the exception code and fix.
Peer-to-Peer Connections Diagnostics
The Designer provides live monitoring of the Peer-to-Peer Connections. The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
1. Select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" from the "Monitor" drop-down menu then select "Peerto-Peer Connections" from the list provided.
2. (This window can be launched from the "Utilities Worksheet") Select "Controller Diagnostics" icon then select "Controller Ports Diagnostics" then "Peer-to-Peer" Connections.
3. The "Peer-to-Peer Connections" dialog box will appear.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
259
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
4. The summary will provide status of the parameters shown in the list. 5. Click on "X" to exit box. Refer to "Peer -to-Peer Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators" for status indications, possible cause, and actions to correct the problem.
260
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Controller Ports Diagnostics
Peer-to-Peer Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators
The "Peer-to-Peer connections" dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the list.
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Application The peer connection could not be
N/A
Error
established due to an internal program
problem.
1. Reset the controller to restart the UDP/IP protocol stack and reset buffer allocations.
2. Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the problem exists.
Setup Error The peer device indicated that one or more data item is not valid.
The error will occur when an incompatibility exists between peer devices with regard to variable or signal assignments.
This error should not occur when exchanging data between ControlEdge HC900 controllers.
Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the status occurs.
Peer Fail
The assigned peer could not be located N/A on the network.
1. Check the controller name and network name of the peer device to assure that they match that specific PDE block.
2. Check that the IP addresses of the peer devices are all within the range of the IP mask.
3. Check that the peer devices have the same IP subnet mask. See Network parameters for IP mask setting.
Port Fail
The peer data exchange IO subsystem N/A could not be started due to internal resource problem.
1. Reset the controller to restart the Ethernet IO hardware and reassign processor IO mapping.
2. Contact Honeywell Technical Assistance if the problem exists.
Not Started The assigned peer IO connection has N/A not yet been attempted. Normal state during startup and during configuration mode. This status should automatically change to GOOD after both peer controllers are in the RUN mode.
1. If this status persists during run time, check that the peer device is properly connected and that the control name and network name is correct.
2. Check that the IP masks of all peer devices to assure that all IP addresses are within the same subnet.
3. Check that all external network components such as switches and routers allow passing of UDP packets on port 502.
4. Check that the peer device is powered on and is in RUN mode.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
261
November 2019
Diagnostics Modbus Master (Serial) Port Diagnostics
Parameter
Peer-to-Peer Connections Diagnostics
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Network Setup Error
Controller/network names determined on network are illegal
Rack 1 monitor block's COMPORT DIAG is set to FAILED.
Rack 1 monitor block's RACK OK pin is turned off.
SYSTEM MONITOR block's HW OK pin is turned off.
Correct the setup problem.
No IP Address
IP address is not configured
See Network Setup Error
Enter an IP address.
Hardware Failure Ethernet port tests failed during power-up.
Replace CPU module
Modbus Master (Serial) Port Diagnostics
Displays the status of the Modbus Master port, if so configured.
262
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Modbus Master (Serial) Port Diagnostics
Access
Enter Monitor mode and select Modbus master port diagnostics from the Monitor menu or through the Utilities tab/Controller Diagnostics icon.
Port S1 S2
The controller's S1 port is the Modbus Master port. The controller's S2 port is the Modbus Master port.
No Master Port
The ControlEdge HC900 configuration contains Modbus slave blocks, but neither the S1 or the S2 port is configured as a Modbus Master. Use Set Controller Serial Ports on the Utilities tab to set up a Modbus Master port.
Master port status The master port S1 or S2 is shown along with its status.
Modbus Master Port Status No Slave Blocks Program Mode
ELN Slave Scanning
Meaning
There is no MBS (Modbus Slave) Block in the configuration
Controller is in Program Unlocked Mode; Modbus Slave Communications is disabled; return to Run to communicate to Slave Devices
Controller is in Program Locked Mode; Port switches to Serial ELN Protocol while in this mode.
Port is configured as a Modbus Master. Controller is in RUN or OFFLINE mode and is scanning the slave devices.
Protocol Shows the protocol for the port. If Modbus RTU Advanced, you can click on View Advanced Setup.
Cycle time (S) This is the computed cycle time of the Modbus Master link. This time is computed by the ControlEdge HC900 controller.
Execution time (S) This is the actual execution time of the Modbus Master link as measured by the ControlEdge HC900 Controller.
Peak time (S) This is peak execution time of the Modbus Master link, as measured by the ControlEdge HC900 controller.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
263
November 2019
Diagnostics Modbus Master (Serial) Port Diagnostics
Overruns This parameter counts the number of times that the actual execution time of the Modbus Master link exceeded the computed Cycle Time. Overruns can occur in the following situations: · The baud rate configured for this serial port is incorrect. · There is a physical problem on the serial communications link (e.g., a bad connection, a faulty or disconnected communications cable). · The Slave Reply Timeout value is too small (this applies to Modbus RTU Master Advanced protocol only). If overruns continue to accumulate you may need to increase this value. · Changing the serial port setup parameters. There may be a momentary overrun when the new parameters are saved to the controller. Any persistent overrun condition should be investigated and corrected. Note that occasional overruns may occur during normal operation of the system if the scanning of the Modbus Master link is delayed by a higher priority activity. The Overruns counter can be reset to zero by selecting Clear Statistics on the Serial Port S1 or S2 Diagnostics display.
Slave status Under Modbus Slave Devices click on any slave name (left) to view its details (right). Some details show the configuration of the Modbus Slave function block. The slave's Status (left) is the same as under Details, Comm quality (right).
Slave status/Comm Quality NONE BAD
GOOD
Meaning
Slave communications are disabled.
Errors are occurring in the communications. Possible causes to check for: Physical link might be bad Slave device might be off No slave device found at the selected Modbus Address Slave device set to the wrong baud rate.
Slave communications are normal
Port scanning
To enable/disable port scanning for a slave device: 1. Click a Modbus slave device in the slave device window. Slave details will appear at left. 2. Click on the Enable/Disable button at the bottom right to enable/disable the port scanning of that slave device.
264
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Diagnostics Modbus Initiator (TCP) Port Diagnostics
Modbus Initiator (TCP) Port Diagnostics
Displays the status of the Modbus/TCP Initiator port, if so configured.
Access
Enter Monitor mode and select Modbus/TCP Initiator Port Diagnostics from the Monitor menu or through the Utilities tab/Controller Diagnostics icon.
Modbus/TCP Initiator port status
Status No Slave Blocks
Scanning
Meaning
There are no TCPS (Modbus/TCP Slave) Blocks in the configuration
Controller is in RUN or OFFLINE mode and is scanning the Modbus/TCP slave devices.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
265
November 2019
Diagnostics Modbus Initiator (TCP) Port Diagnostics
Slave status Under Modbus Slave Devices click on any slave name (left) to view its details (right). Some details show the configuration of the Modbus/TCP Slave function block. The slave's Status (left) is the same as under Details, Comm quality (right).
Slave status/Comm Quality NONE BAD
GOOD
Meaning
Slave communications are disabled.
Errors are occurring in the communications. Possible causes to check for:
· Physical link might be bad · Slave device might be off · No slave device found at the selected Modbus IP
Address · Slave device set to the wrong baud rate.
Slave communications are normal
Port scanning
To enable/disable port scanning for a slave device: 1. Click a Modbus slave device in the slave device window. Slave details will appear at left. 2. Click on the Enable/Disable button at the bottom right to enable/disable the port scanning of that slave device.
266
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Reports Print Report
30. Reports Print Report
To Print the report: 1 Select "Print Report" from the File menu.
If you select
from the Custom Modbus Map toolbar, it will print the currently displayed
partition.
Print Report lets you print a report for various functions.
2 Click on the Icon on the toolbar and select a report from the drop-down menu that appears. The "Print" dialog box will open to let you print a specific report. You can also print a report from "Print Report Preview" from the File menu.
Report Categories
The Print Report function provides access to the greatest number of reports. For software revisions prior to 6.0, all 5 main report categories are available. For revision 6.0 and later the Display worksheet is no longer supported, so the Displays report category option is not available. For SIL compliant controller types, additional sub-menus allow for filtering of some reports based on Process or Safety worksheets. For more information see Reports Overview.
Controller Reports
Clicking on the Controller button provides a drop-down menu which allows the selection of 2 different reports, as shown below. Note that for SIL compliant controller types only; there is an additional sub-menu for the I/O Configuration report.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
267
November 2019
Reports Print Report
Report
Email I/O Configuration
Description
Shows how E-mail notification is configured.
Shows configuration of all I/O on all racks. This report is similar to the data shown on the Controller worksheet. It may also be printed by clicking on the Print button in the Controller Configuration Toolbar.
SIL Filtering
No
Yes
Function Block Diagram Reports
Clicking on the FBDs button provides a drop-down menu which allows the selection of reports or report sub-categories related to the items contained on the function block diagrams of the configuration. The available report options for configurations with a Fixed Modbus Address Map are shown in the first figure below. The available report options for configurations with a Custom Modbus Address Map are shown in the second figure below.
268
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Reports Print Report
Report All FBD Worksheets FBD Worksheets
Description
Not a traditional report. Prints out the graphical representation of all Function Block Diagrams in the configuration.
Not a traditional report. Prints out the graphical representation of a single Function Block Diagrams from the configuration.
Hovering over this menu option will display a submenu(s) which allows selection of the desired function block diagram worksheet.
SIL Filtering Yes
Yes
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
269
November 2019
Block Parameters
Detailed Function Block Report Summary Function Block Report User-Defined Signals and Variables Signal Tags Variables Signal Tags and Variables
Modbus Partition
Where Used File Statistics
Reports Print Report
Shows a detailed report of each function block's
Yes
parameters.
[Modbus Register Map] (appears if using fixed map)
Shows the starting Modbus address of each function
Yes
block, as well as the Modbus addresses of all its parameters. Click here for details.
Shows the starting Modbus address of each function
Yes
block. Click here for details. (also available if using custom map)
Shows the user-defined Modbus addresses of signals
Yes
and variables.
Shows the system-defined Modbus addresses of all
Yes
signal tags.
Shows the system-defined Modbus addresses of all
Yes
variables.
Shows the system-defined Modbus addresses of all
Yes
signal tags and variables.
[Modbus Partition] (appears if using custom map)
Shows the Modbus addresses and contents of the
No
selected partition.
Hovering over this menu option will display a submenu(s) which allows selection of the desired partition.
The report generated by this method is equivalent to the report printed when the same Modbus address partition is selected in the Custom Modbus Map worksheet and the Print button on the worksheet's toolbar is clicked.
Shows location (worksheet and page) of every item in
Yes
the function block diagram.
Shows useful file statistics. Schema # is a database
No
revision code used by the controller, OI and the software
to ensure compatibility
270
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Reports Print Report
Display Reports
Clicking on the Displays button provides a drop-down menu which allows the selection of 4 reports related to displays, as shown below. As noted above, this category is not available starting with revision 6.0.
Report
General Settings
Help Screens
Assigned Display Keys
Data Storage Settings
Description
Shows Operator Interface settings (security, startup display, filenames).
Shows Operator Interface help screens.
Shows Operator Interface displays and contents for each display button.
Shows data storage settings (trend group data points, batch enable, etc.)
SIL Filtering No
No No
No
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
271
November 2019
Reports Print Report
Recipe Reports
Clicking on the Recipes button provides a drop-down menu which allows the selection of 4 reports related to recipes, as shown below.
Report
Select a Recipe (Variables)
Select a Set Point Profile
Select a Set Point Schedule
Select a Sequence
Description Shows contents of the selected recipe (variables, descriptions). Shows contents of the selected Setpoint Profile. Shows contents of the selected Setpoint Schedule.
Shows contents of the selected Sequence.
SIL Filtering No
No No
No
Selecting any of the 4 report options noted above brings up a selection dialog similar to the one below that allows one of the available Variables, Set Point Profile, Set Point Schedule or Set Point Sequences to be selected from a pool for printing. Clicking on the Print button completes the report printing.
272
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Reports Print Report
Alarms & Events Reports
Clicking on the Alarms & Events button provides a drop-down menu which allows the selection of 2 reports related to displays, as shown below.
Report
Description
Alarm Groups Events
Shows contents of each Operator Interface alarm group display.
Shows all configured events and their triggers.
SIL Filtering Yes
Yes
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
273
November 2019
See Also Reports Overview Print Report Preview Export Report
Reports Print Report Preview
Print Report Preview
Report Categories
The Print Report Preview function provides a means of previewing reports before they are printed. As such, the reports available for previewing is essentially the same as those available in the Print Report function. The one notable exception is that the option to preview the printing of all Function Block Diagrams at once is not supported.
Navigation
A toolbar at the top of the Print Report Preview window lets you navigate through the pages of the report:
The functions from left to right are:
Print
Prints the active report without going to "Print Report" in the file menu
Previous Page Selects the previous page on the report for display
Next Page Selects the next page on the report for display
Two Pages Shows two report pages at once
Zoom Out Makes the report larger on the screen
Zoom In
Makes the report smaller on the screen
Close
Closes the Print Report Preview
See Also
Reports Overview Print Report Export Report
274
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Export Report
Reports Export Report
Select "Export Report" from the File menu or select
from the Custom Modbus Map toolbar.
Export Report lets you export some reports as files in comma delimited (.csv) or tab delimited (.txt) format. The files contain the same data as shown in the printed report, just formatted differently. Exported reports can then be imported by other applications such as third party operator interface configurations.
Not all printable reports can be exported; choices are limited.
Click on the Icon on the toolbar and select a report from the drop-down menu that appears. Name the report and save it as .csv or .txt.
To change the default export file type, see Export Delimiter.
Exported Files have the following format for their Header sections.
Header RevisionID:
File Name: Controller Name: Title: Author: Created Date: Modified Date:
Example 0115.0030.0002.0002.0003
ControlEdge HC900-C50 Rev 2.1x : jjpconfig1 C50_R2.1.cde JOE Joe's Furnace Control Joe 5/20/2005 13:09 5/30/2005 14:05
Description AAAA.BBBB.CCCC.DDDD.EEEE Where
AAAA = Export ID: 0103 = IO Configuration Information Report 0106 = Variable and Signal Tag Information Report 0115 = Modbus Address Detailed Report 0116 = User Defined Modbus Registers Report 0117 = Signal Tag Report 0118 = Variable Report 0119 = Modbus Address Summary Report 0120 = All Function Block Modbus Addresses 5000 = Modbus Partition Registers Report 5500 = All Modbus Registers Report
BBBB = Database Schema Number
CCCC = Product type: 2 = HC950 3 = HC930 4 = HC970R 5 = HC970
DDDD = Platform type: 2 = ControlEdge HC900 series controllers
EEEE = Feature Set: Schema database minor revisions Device Type Device Revision: Configuration Filename
Controller name assigned within the configuration
Optional title or description for the configuration Optional author or creator of the configuration Date when configuration file was first created Date when configuration file was last modified and saved.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
275
November 2019
Report Title:
Modbus Address Detailed Report
Reports Export Report
Report title: IO Configuration Information Report Variable and Signal Tag Information Report Modbus Address Detailed Report User Defined Modbus Registers Report Signal Tag Report Variable Report Modbus Address Summary Report All Function Block Modbus Addresses Modbus Partition Registers Report Partition Name All Modbus Registers Report
276
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Modbus Map Overview
31. Modbus Register Addresses
Modbus Map Overview
Overview Modbus addressing is available in revision 2.0 and later. In your controller's configuration certain parameters are each automatically assigned a Modbus address. These include certain types of function blocks (such as loops and set point programmers), signals and variables, among other items. Through their addresses these parameters can be accessed or displayed remotely, such as by a third-party operator interface. Collectively, these Modbus addresses and parameters are known as the Modbus map. You can use a predefined fixed map where common parameters are mapped out automatically at fixed addresses, or you can create a custom map for configurations rev. 4.0 or higher. Click here for details on fixed vs. custom map.
Configure Modbus Map Method
Overview Let's you select your preferred Modbus mapping method: fixed or custom.
Access 1. Edit menu. 2. Configure Modbus Map Method
Caution: If you change from custom map to fixed map you will lose all custom addresses, partitions, and quantities not found in the fixed map (>32 loops, >8 SP Programmers, etc.). If you accidentally switch from custom to fixed you can use the Undo feature on the main toolbar.
Fixed or custom map
There are two kinds of Modbus maps available: fixed or custom. Basically, the fixed and custom maps both can contain the same types of items but the custom map has more flexibility with those items' quantities, addresses and data types. The maps have these characteristics.
Fixed map
Custom map
The items that can be in the fixed map are limited to certain types of function blocks and other configuration data.
The items that can be in the custom map are limited to certain types of function blocks and other configuration data, same as fixed map.
Items are automatically assigned to the fixed map.
At the moment you switch from fixed to custom map mode, any items in your configuration maintain their addresses from the fixed map. However, once you are in custom map mode, if you add more items to your configuration they are not automatically added to the custom map, you must add them manually.
Each item type is grouped in a fixed address range of the map. For example, the address range designated for Loops is restricted to Loops only, it cannot contain Setpoint Programmers.
You can create partitions with custom names and address ranges. Partitions can contain any item types, you can mix and match items if needed.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
277
November 2019
Fixed map
Quantities of each item type are at a fixed maximum (such as 32 loops, 8 programmers). Good for smaller configurations or pre-4.0 configurations. If your configuration exceeds these maximums a message reminds you to consider switching to the custom map.
Modbus Register Addresses Configure Modbus Map Method
Custom map
Quantities are limited only by the amount of free space in the map or partition. Use custom map when you need to access data from more than 32 loops, for example.
Every parameter of a function block is automatically added to the map. You don't need to specify which of the block's parameters are mapped, they're all there. For example, all of a PID block's 40-plus parameters are added to the map.
Let's you pick and choose which block parameters to add. For example, a PID block contains over 40 parameters. The fixed map adds them all; the custom map lets you add only the ones you need to access, thus freeing up more addresses for other parameters.
You can create templates to apply to any or all function blocks of a type. For example, you can select 5 of a PID block's parameters then save them to a PID template. You can load that template into other PID blocks so they each address the same 5 parameters.
You can reorder items within a group, such as switching Loop 1 with Loop 10. You can assign signals and variables to a user-defined area of the map.
You can reorder items. More generally you can put any parameter at any address or at multiple addresses or partitions.
The fixed map has a fixed range (45057-46056) for assigning configured signal tags and variables to another data type, such as integer 16.
The custom map lets you assign any data type to any address (float 32, integer 16, etc.). A default data type is applied but can be changed.
The fixed map contains several gaps of unused (and unusable) addresses.
Since you can put any parameter at any address you can eliminate gaps of unused addresses, thus increasing the map's capacity.
The fixed map is the default map for all configurations. Unless and until you switch to the custom map, the fixed map is in use. Items are automatically added to the map when you access the map, up to the quantity limits (such as 32 loops, 8 programmers). The only items that are not automatically added are user-defined signals and variables.
Uses the fixed map as a starting point*. Any edits to the fixed map (such as reordered items within a group or user-defined signals and variables) are carried over when you switch to the custom map. The custom map's default partitions are based on the fixed map's groups.
Conversely, if you switch from custom map to fixed map, any customized partitions or addresses are lost.
*You can revert to this starting point at any time by using the Replace feature in the custom map.
278
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Modbus addressability of principal function blocks
Modbus addressability of principal function blocks
Function Block AGA8-Detail AGA8-Gross Alternator XYR5000 Base Station XYR5000 Transmitter XYR6000 Transmitter Calendar Event Device Control Hand Off Auto Four Selector Switch Push Button Auto Manual Bias Carbon Loop On Off Loop PID Loop Three Pos. Step Cont. Set Point Programmer Ramp Set Point Scheduler Sequencer Stage Position Proportional Output Peer-Peer Modbus Slave Modbus/TCP Slave XYR6000 Gateway
Category/Filter AGAs AGAs Alternators Communications Communications Communications Counters/Timers Device Controls Hand Off Autos Logic Logic Loops Loops Loops Loops Loops Programmers Ramps Schedulers Sequencers Stages NA NA NA NA NA
Available in fixed map?
No No Yes No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No
Available in custom map?
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
279
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Fixed Modbus Map
Fixed Modbus Map
Overview Certain items in your configuration are automatically assigned Modbus addresses in the fixed Modbus map. These items include signal tags, variables and principal function blocks like loops and setpoint programmers. (See page 279.) As each item is added to your configuration it is assigned to the first (lowest) available Modbus address within the range reserved for that item type. If you delete an item from your configuration it is removed from that Modbus address and that address becomes available for another item. Also available is a range of 1000 addresses (45057 for assigning user-defined signal tags and variables to any address or multiple addresses. Within these 1000 addresses the data type of each signal tag or variable can be changed, for example, from float 32 to integer 16.
Access To access the fixed Modbus register map to add or edit an address, select the main menu Edit item, Edit Fixed Modbus Register Map, or right-click on a configured signal, variable, or function block.
The following tabs are presented.
User Defined Signals and Variables Tab Procedure for editing signal or variable addresses.
1. Select the type of signal or variable you want to choose from.
2. Highlight the desired signal/variable.
3. Select an address range you want to add to. There are 20 ranges of 50 addresses each for a total of 1000 addresses. Then click on the address you will assign the signal/variable to.
4. Click Add to insert the signal/variable.
280
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25 November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Fixed Modbus Map
5. Click on the Data Type area of the signal/variable and select a data type. 32-bit data types require 2 adjacent addresses.
6. You can assign a signal/variable to multiple addresses. Just repeat the preceding steps.
7. To clear a single address, select it and click Delete. To clear all signal/variable addresses, select Clear All Registers. This does not clear the item's default address, it only clears the addresses assigned here.
8. To view all addresses of an item, display its Properties. Signal Tag Properties Variable Properties
Function Blocks Tab
Procedure for editing function block addresses.
1. Use Filter to list all configured function blocks of a certain type. Types whose Modbus address can be changed are:
·
Loops (PID, On-Off, Carbon Potential, 3 Position Step, Auto-Manual Bias)
·
Alternator
·
Hand/Off/Auto Switch
·
Sequencer
·
Setpoint Programmer
·
Setpoint Scheduler
·
Stage
·
Device Control
·
Ramp
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
281
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Fixed Modbus Map
2. Addresses containing that type of function block are shown in numerical order. For example, with the Loop blocks filter selected, Loop 1 starts at 0x0040/00065, Loop 2 starts at 0x0140/00321, etc. Whichever loop is in the first slot is known as Loop 1, as far as the Modbus map is concerned. That is, loop order in the map is independent of execution order or block number. More generally, any function block's order in the Modbus map is independent of its execution order or block number.
3. To move a function block to another address, click on its address to select it, release, then click and drag it to the top of the new address, then drop it. A colored line appears while you're dragging the function block.
4. If you drop it in an address that's occupied by another function block, the two function blocks will swap addresses.
5. Unlike signals and variables, only one range of addresses is allowed per function block.
6. To view the starting address of any function block, display its Properties by right-clicking on the function block in the configuration diagram under the Controller tab.
If your configuration contains more items than are allowed in the fixed map (such as >32 loops) a message informs you of this. Consider switching to the custom map, which allows for greater quantities and access to more parameters.
Further Information
For details on Modbus parameters, see the ControlEdge HC900 Communications User Guide, document number 51-52-25-111.
282
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map
Custom Modbus Map
Access To access the custom Modbus register map to add or edit an address, click on the Modbus Map tab
as custom.
at the bottom of the display. This tab is visible only after you configure your map type
Overview The custom Modbus map is applicable to the array of Modbus registers classified as "holding registers" or "4xxxxx" registers using decimal addressing where "xxxxx" equals the Modbus address ranging from 1-65535 decimal (0-FFFE hex).
Use the custom map to assign any addressable parameter (see page 279) to any address, along with its data type (float 32, integer 16, etc.). You can edit or create partitions of any size to help organize addresses.
Default partitions and addresses are based on the fixed map. This is only a default starting point; you can edit the custom map extensively or even erase it entirely and start from scratch.
To add an item to a map: 1. Select a partition whose addresses you want to display or edit.
2. Assign items to the map in two ways: drag an item from the Configuration tab into an address, or click on an address under the Item heading and choose an item to add.
3. Select/edit item's parameters.
Working with partitions You can view or edit addresses in defined partitions only. Addresses in undefined partitions are not available until you create a new partition with those addresses. Partitions need not be empty to be edited. If you need more addresses in a partition you can combine it with adjacent partitions, or resize it using space from an adjacent undefined partition. See Edit Partitions.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
283
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map
Functions Refer to the following table for descriptions of the numbered items in the custom map. Functions are numbered in the order you will probably use them.
Function
1
Select a partition
2
Currently displayed partition
3
Show Register Address as
4
Item Filter
5
Item
Description
You must select a partition whose contents you want to display or edit. The map takes a few seconds to build the contents. Default partitions are based on the fixed map and can be edited or resized. See Edit Partitions.
Name of the current partition. See Select a partition.
Select whether to display addresses in hexadecimal or decimal.
Select the type of item (block, signal tag, etc.) whose parameters you want to assign to the map. Items of this type will then be listed as choices under the Item column. For example, if you select Loops then all your configuration's loop blocks will be listed under the Item column when you click there.
Click on any address under the Item column. All items of
284
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function
6
Parameter Name
7
Description
8
Data Type
Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map
Description
the Item Filter type will be listed. (If no items of the filter type are in your configuration the list will be empty.) Click the item you want to add to the address.
If you are adding a function block it will display a checklist of parameters from which to choose. Click here for details.
If you are adding system parameters you must add them by clicking an address; they can't be dragged from the Configuration tab.
If the item is a function block this is the parameter name. Click on this field to see a list of that item's other parameters from which to choose, if reassignment is desired.
If the item is a signal tag or variable this is the tag name. Click to see a list of other signal tags or variables from which to choose.
ATTENTION: when you assign a different parameter here, the Data Type does not automatically change, you must manually change to the correct Data Type for the parameter.
Read only. Description of signal tag or variable.
Choices:
Unsigned 16
Signed 16 Unsigned 32 (requires 2 registers)
Signed 32 (requires 2 registers) Float 32 (requires 2 registers)
If 2 registers are required, the higher register is grayed out and not assignable.
Note: For signals and variables, when changing data type from float 32 to integer 16, keep in mind the decimal point location. For example, 1000.1 translates to 10001.
Note: For function blocks, when changing data type from float 32 to integer 16, the value is rounded. For example, 1000.1 translates to 1000 and 1000.5 translates to 1001.
9
Decimals
10 R/W
11 Configuration Tab
Read only. Decimal places of signal tag or variable.
Type of access to the parameter. Read Write Read/Write
This tab shows all configured items. Click and drag an item from here to an address under the map's Item column. Not all items can be assigned to an address. Dragging a function block will display its checklist of parameters from which to choose. Click here for details.
12 Register
Click on a register(s) then right click for the menu.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
285
November 2019
Function 13 Edit Partitions
14 Horizontal Scroll 15 Vertical Scroll 16 Replace map with fixed
Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map
Description Clear Contents deletes the contents of the selected registers without affecting other registers. Insert Registers Inserts blank registers before the selected registers and shifts registers down by the same amount. Will not work if partition's last registers are occupied. Delete Registers deletes the contents of the selected registers and shifts subsequent registers up by the same amount. Cut cuts contents of registers Copy copies contents of registers Paste pastes from the last cut or copy
A register must be in a defined partition in order to be populated with data, you can't assign data to an undefined partition. Default partitions are based on the fixed map. An undefined partition starts where the fixed Modbus map ends. Partitions can be edited in the following ways. To rename a partition, click on the Description and enter a new name. To edit one or more partitions, click on one or more partition # then right-click to access these functions: Clear - deletes the contents of the selected partitions but keeps the partition names and addresses. Delete - deletes the contents of the selected partitions as well as the partition names and addresses, leaving behind an undefined partition which does not appear in any exports or reports. Split - divides the selected partition into two contiguous partitions of any size and names you specify. Does not delete contents of the partition's registers. You can split undefined partitions. Combine - merges selected partitions into one partition of any name. Does not delete the contents of the partition's registers. You can combine undefined partitions. Resize - changes the starting and ending address of the selected partition. New - Creates a new partition within an undefined partition. To erase the entire map and start from scratch, select all partitions and select Delete, then select all undefined partitions and select Combine.
Use to scroll to offscreen areas of the map.
Let's you scroll through the partition.
Replaces the entire custom map with all your
286
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Function Modbus map data
17 Toolbar
Modbus Register Addresses Custom Modbus Map
Description configuration's loops, programmers, etc. at their preassigned addresses and partitions, up to the fixed map's quantity limits (e.g., 32 Loops, 8 SP Programmers, etc.). Beyond these quantity limits items will not be added to the map unless you add them manually. Since you are still in custom map mode, you can edit the map after doing the replacement.
ATTENTION: Do not select Replace unless you are willing to overwrite your entire custom map's registers and partitions. Consider backing up your custom map first, either by saving a backup of your configuration or by Exporting a Modbus report. Or you can click on the Undo button in the main toolbar.
Prints a Partition Report.
Exports a Partition Report.
Lock/unlock Worksheet
Further information
For details on Modbus parameters, see the ControlEdge HC900 Communications User Guide, document number 51-52-25-111.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
287
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Adding function block parameters to custom map
Adding function block parameters to custom map
Two methods to add parameters to the map Method 1: In the Configuration tab in the Worksheet Toolbox window, click and drag a function block over to a starting address register in the custom map.
Method 2: In the custom map, select an Item Filter, then click on a starting address in the Item column. Note: If adding system register parameters you must use this method.
288
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Adding function block parameters to custom map
In both methods the following box appears listing all available parameters for the block type selected.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
289
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Adding function block parameters to custom map
Function blocks that can be added to the custom map.
Functions Use this window to select block parameters to add to your custom map. The available block parameters for the selected block will be listed. Select the parameters you'd like to add by using Select All, Clear All, or by checking and unchecking individual parameters. Click Add to Map to add the checked parameters to the map. The uppermost checked parameter will be added to the Block Start Register, and the remaining checked parameters will contiguously fill in the remaining registers until the Block End Register is reached. Unchecked parameters will not leave gaps in registers, in most cases. If the current partition range is not big enough to hold all the parameters you must select fewer parameters or edit the partition to make it larger. You can use templates to apply the same list of parameters to each function block of that type. This saves you the effort of creating the same checklist for each block and ensures the same parameters are checked. Templates are saved as separate files with .ptf extension. Each block type is limited to templates created for that block type only. You can't apply a PID block's template to a Setpoint Programmer block, for example.
290
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Modbus Register Addresses Adding system parameters to custom map
Example of how to use templates 1. Add a PID loop to the map. We'll refer to this as PID 1. 2. Check PID 1's desired parameters to be addressed. 3. Click Save Template to save this checked list to a template file (extension .ptf). Use a descriptive filename that describes the type of block, for future reference. For example, PID1.ptf. 4. As you add other PID loops to the map you can Load Template PID1 into them, which applies the same checklist of parameters. 5. You can also Save Template As Default for that block type, which saves you from loading a template into each block. For example, if you want all your PID blocks to have the same parameters checked as the template PID1, save PID1 as the default. When you add subsequent PID blocks to the map they will automatically have those same parameters checked.
Adding system parameters to custom map
Overview If adding system register parameters to the custom map you must click on an address to add them. They cannot be dragged from the Configuration tab.
Procedure 1. Select Item Filter "System Register." 2. Click on an address under Item. 3. Select a system parameter. 4. If adding time parameters you must add all time parameters to the map, one at a time. Time parameters must be written to as a group, therefore you must add all* of them to the map.
*The Day-of-week parameter is optional and can be left out.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
291
November 2019
Redundancy Redundancy System Status Indicators
32. Redundancy
C70R/C75 controllers/networks have their own diagnostics that are accessed under Utilities Worksheet Overview Monitor Menu
Redundancy diagnostics are grouped as follows. Redundancy System Redundancy Link Lead CPU Reserve CPU Scanner 2 Link
Redundancy System Status Indicators
The Redundancy System Diagnostics dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list.
Parameter
Redundancy Status
Value Available
No RSM module detected
RSM switch is bad
I/O comm error on reserve
Possible Cause Normal operation
Controller Action N/A
User Action N/A
Switch on RSM is set between two positions. RSM Module is not inserted RSM Module has failed
RSM Switch is indicating an invalid position
Reserve CPU is unable to communicate with one or more of the I/O racks.
The controller will continue to operate with a missing RSM. Automatic failover is still possible if required.
The controller will continue to operate with a bad RSM. Automatic failover is still possible if required.
The lead controller will continue to control the process. Failover to the reserve is still possible if a subsequent failure renders the current lead less capable than the reserve.
Make sure switch is in desired position Install RSM module Replace RSM
Replace RSM
Verify all cabling between the reserve CPU and the scanners. Replace any Ethernet switches between the reserve CPU and the I/O rack(s). Replace the reserve CPU Replace the scanner CPU Contact Honeywell service
292
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Redundancy Diagnostics
Redundancy Redundancy Link Status Indicators
Database Not Synchronized
Hardware failure on the reserve CPU
Hardware failure on the lead CPU
Hardware failure on the CPU rack backplane
The lead controller will continue to control the process, but failover is not possible.
Invalid Configuration Firmware Version Mismatch
Good
Neither CPU has a valid configuration database
The reserve controller does not have the same version of controller firmware installed
An empty database is created.
The lead controller will continue to control the process, but failover is not possible.
Replace the reserve CPU
Replace the lead CPU
Replace the CPU rack backplane
Contact Honeywell service
Download the desired configuration file and perform a cold start.
Upgrade the CPU firmware so both the lead and reserve have the same version.
Database Not Synchronized
Hardware failure on the reserve CPU
Hardware failure on the lead CPU
Hardware failure on the CPU rack backplane
The lead controller will continue to control the process, but failover is not possible.
Invalid Configuration
Firmware Version Mismatch
Neither CPU has a valid configuration database
The reserve controller does not have the same version of controller firmware installed
An empty database is created.
The lead controller will continue to control the process, but failover is not possible.
Replace the reserve CPU
Replace the lead CPU
Replace the CPU rack backplane
Contact Honeywell service
Download the desired configuration file and perform a cold start.
Upgrade the CPU firmware so both the lead and reserve have the same version.
Redundancy Link Status Indicators
The Redundancy Link Diagnostics dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list.
Parameter
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Redundancy Link Good
Lead and Reserve
N/A
N/A
Port Status
CPUs working ok
Reserve not present
Reserve CPU module N/A is not plugged in.
Install Reserve CPU
Reserve Bad Comm
Reserve CPU module is plugged in but not communicating.
Reserve or Lead CPU module could be bad.
Backplane could be bad.
Replace faulty CPU. Replace rack.
Hardware failure
Bad Lead module
N/A
Bad backplane
Replace faulty CPU. Replace rack.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
293
November 2019
Redundancy Lead CPU Status Indicators
Parameter
Value
Redundancy Link Port Diagnostics
Good Data Link Failure
Hardware Failure
Possible Cause
Controller Action
N/A
N/A
Reserve CPU module is not plugged in.
Reserve CPU module is plugged in but not communicating.
The lead CPU will continue to control the process but failover is not possible.
Bad Redundancy link hardware detected on the lead CPU
The lead CPU will continue to control the process but failover is not possible.
User Action N/A Replace faulty CPU Replace rack
Replace faulty CPU
Lead CPU Status Indicators
The Lead Diagnostics Overview dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list. These parameters are also shown for the Reserve Diagnostics Overview.
Parameter
Status
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
CPU Diagnostics Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Watchdog
Watchdog reset resulting from software failure
ASYS block's HW OK pin 1. Force a cold start.
is turned off.
2. Upgrade control file
software.
3. Replace CPU board.
4. Contact Honeywell Personnel.
Prefetch Abort
CPU failed when 1. Controller performs a
attempting to fetch an restart
instruction from the 2. ASYS block's HW OK
prefetch register.
pin is turned off.
1. Force a cold start.
2. Isolate system from noise and force a cold start.
3. Replace CPU board
Address Error
The reserved
Same as above
exception occurred for
an unknown reason.
Same as above
Undefine Error
Bad Instruction Detected
Same as above
Same as above
Data Abort
CPU failed when
Same as above
attempting to access
data.
Same as above
Software Interrupt Error
Software Interrupt Same as above occurred which is not supported by the software.
Same as above
294
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Redundancy Lead CPU Status Indicators
Parameter
Memory Diagnostics
Real-time Clock Diagnostics
Status
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Watchdog
Watchdog reset resulting from software failure
ASYS block's HW OK pin 1. Force a cold start.
is turned off.
2. Upgrade control file
software.
3. Replace CPU board.
4. Contact Honeywell Personnel.
Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
5 Day Low Battery Estimated battery life ASYS block's HW OK pin Replace battery.
Warning
is less than 5 days. is turned off.
Low Battery
Battery voltage is low. 1. ASYS block's LOW BATTERY pin is turned on.
2. ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
Replace battery.
Flash Error
Flash failed to burn
ASYS block's HW OK pin is 1. Force a cold start.
turned off.
2. Replace CPU board.
Good
N/A
N/A
N/A
Not Programmed
Bad Data
Programming Failure Read Failure
RTC not programmed 1.Time and date is set to 00:00:00, January 1, 1970.
2.ASYS block's HW OK pin is turned off.
Program RTC.
Bad date and time Same as above
1. Program RTC. 2. Cycle power. 3. Replace CPU. 4. Replace boards in
rack. 5. Replace rack
RTC failed to program Same as above
Same as above
Unable to read RTC Same as above
Same as above
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
295
November 2019
Redundancy Lead CPU Status Indicators
Port S1/S2 Diagnostic
Lead Port E1/E2: Network Port Diagnostics Rack Comm Diagnostic
Scanner2 Rack n Network Status
Scanner2 Rack n Network Diagnostics
Good Data Link Error
N/A
N/A
A large number of messages are resulting in data link errors.
SYSTEM MONITOR block's HW OK pin is turned off.
Hardware Failure The UART is failing to operate properly.
Good
N/A
N/A
Hardware Failure
Good Data Link Failure Hardware Failure Port A/B Cable Mismatch Protocol Mismatch
No Comm
Ethernet port tests failed during power-up.
See Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators
See Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators
See Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators
See Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators
See Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostics Status Indicators
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
Same as above
Marginal - Port I/O A
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
Marginal - Port I/O B
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
Good - Port I/O A
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
Good - Port I/O B
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
Not in Configuration See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
Good
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
N/A
1. Check baud rate. 2. Check connectors. 3. Check cable polarity. 4. Isolate cable from electrical interference. 5. If RS232-to-RS485 converter used, check its power, switch/jumper settings, and polarity. Replace the controller CPU module. N/A
Replace CPU module
296
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Data Link Failure
Hardware Failure
Port A/B Cable Mismatch Protocol Mismatch
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
See Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators .
Redundancy Reserve CPU Status Indicators
CPU Slot Position CPU A CPU B CPU is missing
CPU A is the Lead/Reserve.
CPU B is the Lead/Reserve.
Reserve CPU is not installed or not powered.
CPU rack backplane failure.
N/A
N/A
The lead CPU will continue to control the process but failover is not possible.
Power Supply Type
Unknown 24VDC Low Wattage High Wattage
CPU cannot identify the Power Supply Type
CPU identified a 24VD DC power supply
CPU identified a Low wattage power supply
CPU identified a High wattage power supply
None None None None
Reserve CPU Status Indicators
Contains same information as for the Lead CPU Status Indicators.
N/A
N/A
1.Install reserve CPU. 2.Apply power to reserve
CPU. 3.Replace CPU rack
backplane. 4.Call Honeywell service. None
None
None
None
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
297
November 2019
Redundancy Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators
Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators
The Redundancy Scanner 2 Link Diagnostics dialog box will provide status of the parameters shown in the following list.
Parameter
Value
Possible Cause
Controller Action
User Action
Scanner-2 Network Status
No Comm
C70R/C75 is communicating to none of the Scanner 2s that are in the configuration.
or
C70R/C75 may be communicating to a Scanner 2 that is not in the configuration
If scanners are in the configuration, see Expansion Rack Link Diagnostics below.
See Expansion Rack Link Diagnostic below.
Marginal - Port I/O A
C70R/C75 is experiencing marginal communications on the respective Scanner 2 link to one or more Scanner 2s in the configuration
and/or
C70R/C75 is communicating to some of the Scanner 2s in the configuration but not all
If a scanner 2 in the configuration is not communicating, then a communication diagnostic Is posted for that rack. Refer to the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
Refer to the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
Marginal - Port I/O B
C70R/C75 is experiencing marginal communications on the respective Scanner 2 link to one or more Scanner 2s in the configuration
and/or
C70R/C75 is communicating to some of the Scanner 2s in the configuration but not all
Same as above
Same as above
Good - Port I/O A
C70R/C75 is experiencing good communications on the respective Scanner 2 link. Scanner 2s not in the configuration have no effect on the status
Lead CPU is operating normally using the I/O Port A to communicate with the Scanner Racks
none
Good - Port I/O B
C70R/C75 is experiencing good communications on the respective Scanner 2 link.
Lead CPU is operating normally using the I/O Port B to communicate with the Scanner Racks
none
298
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Redundancy Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators
Parameter
Expansion Rack Link Diagnostics
Value
Possible Cause
Scanner 2s not in the configuration have no effect on the status
Not in Configuration No Scanner 2s in the configuration
Good
Controller Action
N/A N/A
Data Link Failure Hardware Failure
The ratio of the number of data link errors and the number of good messages exceeds a certain threshold
See the "Rack Comm Diagnostics" parameter in the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
The expansion I/O port's hardware is indicating a failure
See the "Rack Comm Diagnostics" parameter in the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
Port A/B Cable Mismatch
At least one Scanner 2 has its A and B ports swapped with the Lead and Reserve
See the "Rack Comm Diagnostics" parameter in the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
User Action
N/A
N/A
See the "Rack Comm Diagnostics" parameter in the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
See the "Rack Comm Diagnostics" parameter in the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
See the "Rack Comm Diagnostics" parameter in the Expansion I/O Comm Diagnostic Summary dialog box
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
299
November 2019
Version Control Scanner 2 Link Status Indicators
33. Version Control
Overview The Version Control System also known as Version Control System provides capabilities to save changes made to the cde and non cde files over time and creates repositories to manage different versions. Additionally, the tool enables you to compare the differences between two cde file versions and generate a detailed report. The following list provides the main purpose of this feature:
· Allows the user to maintain history of every version. · Repository backups can be shared with other users. · Changes in the older versions can be recovered and analyzed. · Tracks the changes made to the files and directories (in certain cases) over a period of time. · Allows to recover older versions of the data. · Allows to examine the history of how the data changed. · Compares two versions belonging to same cde file to determine the differences between them. Note: Version control is not supported in mandarin HCD and in mandarin OS Shortcut: ALT+C
Basically, two separate folders, that is working folder and repository folder must be created to save the working files and check in to the repository folder. A working folder is the local working copy of a particular version which is present in the repository folder. It is just another local directory which contains files and folders which will be added to the repository as required. The working folder shall contain the configuration files and the same is checked into the repository folder. A repository is a central storage system that preserves the files and directories in hierarchical representation. The repository folder is a collection of all version controlled files. There can be multiple working folders associated to a repository folder. These folders must be created on the local computer.
300
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Version Control General Guidelines
General Guidelines
The following guidelines must be followed while working on the Version Control System feature.
· Do not create the repository or the working folder on the desktop. · Do not create the repository folder within the working folder and vice a versa. · Do not delete the repository folder or the working folder as they cannot be recovered. · Do not rename the files present in these folders · Do not change the extensions of the files present in these folders. · Do not rename or delete the files from the working folders. · Do not delete the ".svn" folder from the working folders. · Multiple users are not allowed to work on the repository at the same time. · Check-in the working files frequently. · Before deleting, ensure to check in or modify the modified file as the files will be deleted
permanently.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
301
November 2019
Version Control Manage Repository
Manage Repository
Repository not only stores configuration files, but also maintains a history of the changes made in the configuration files. Firstly you must create a repository or use an existing repository to perform the check-in operations. This step includes creating a new repository and working folder path or using an existing repository working folder path. Whenever an existing path is used the new configuration files are added to the existing repositories. There is a provision to create new working folders and associate them to the existing repository folder. This means that multiple working folders can be mapped to a repository, however, vice a versa is not possible. IMPORTANT:
· Repository and working folder must be created only on the local machine. Do not create any folder in network share/remote machine.
· Do not delete the repository folder as they cannot be restored. Read the instructions provided in the General Guidelines section before creating the repository.
To create a new repository
The Version Control settings dialog helps to create new repository. In general, most of the times this operation is done only once.
1. On the Version Control menu, click Version Control Settings.
2. Select Enable Version Control.
NOTE: > Selecting this check box starts the version control operations immediately. > On clearing the Enable Version Control check box stops the version control operations immediately and closes the Version Control Explorer window, if open. However, other open windows are not affected. 3. Select Create Repository and click Next. NOTE: Click Back to go to the previous screen. 4. Click the browse button and select repository location. Click Next. 5. Click the browse button and select working folder location. 6. Click Finish. The repository and working folders are created. To backup and restore repository 1. Zip the repository folder and share this file on the intended computer. 2. Unzip the file. 3. On the Version Control menu, click Version Control Settings.
302
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Version Control Manage Repository
4. Select Use Existing Repository. 5. Click Next. 6. Click the browse button and select the unzipped file. Click Next. 7. Click Finish. The files are restored. To use an existing repository 1. On the Version Control menu, click Version Control Settings.
2. Select Use Existing Repository. 3. Click Next. 4. Click the browse button and select the existing repository location. Click Next. 5. Click the browse button and select the working folder location. 6. Click Finish. The existing repository and working folders are updated.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
303
November 2019
Version Control Checkin operations
Checkin operations
Checkin is a process of storing changes from working folder to repository folder. Before performing this operation, the configuration files must be saved to the working folder path and subsequently perform the checkin operation. The checked in files can be verified in the Version Control Explorer. The new changes done to the files in the working folder are updated in the repository folder only after performing the check-in operation. To checkin the configuration files
1. After creating the control logic save the configuration file in the working folder path. See Saving A Configuration File.
2. On the Version Control menu, click Checkin To Version Control. 3. Type a comment to provide a log message to record the reason for the changes and click Ok.
This log message becomes a part of the history repository. The file is checked in to the repository folder. NOTE: It is recommended to check-in the working files frequently. To checkin a folder The files present in a folder can be checked in simultaneously. NOTE: The CRC value is not generated in this case.
1. Copy the folders to the working folder path. The folders will appear in the Version Control Explorer window.
2. On the Version Control menu, click Version Control Explorer. 3. Right-click on the folder that contains the files and click Checkin. 4. Type a comment to provide a log message to record the reason for the changes and click Ok.
This log message becomes a part of the history repository. The file is checked in to the repository folder.
NOTE: Double-click the folder to view the files present inside the folder. Click button located at top right corner to return to the previous folder.
304
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Version Control Version Control Explorer
Version Control Explorer
The Version Control Explorer window displays the folder structure and status of the files in the working folder. To launch version control explorer
1. On the Version Control menu, click Version Control Explorer.
NOTE:
· Deleting a particular version is not supported.
· Adding folders or non cde files is possible only via the Version Control Explorer after manually copying the file or folder to the working folder.
Menu options
· Name: Displays the name of all files available in the working folder along with their file extensions. Displays the file with latest revision. NOTE: To get the latest revision, click Refresh or right-click on file and click Get Latest Version.
· Status: Displays the status of each file:
· Loaded: Indicates that the file present in the working folder and repository are same and is version controlled.
· Modified: Indicates that the file is modified recently.
· Private: Indicates that the working folder contains a file which is not version controlled. This status is applied to all files that are directly saved to the working folder. For example, files with cde, xlsx, txt, doc, and so on
· Last Modified: Displays the last modified date.
· Version: Displays the latest version number of the file.
· Checkin: Allows to check in the files with any format to the repository. For example, files with cde, xlsx, txt, doc, and so on. NOTE: You cannot checkin a file whose status is Loaded.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
305
November 2019
Version Control Version Control Explorer
· History: Displays the history of every version associated with the selected file. See Version History for more information. NOTE: You cannot view the history of a file whose status is Private as the file is not checked in.
· Refresh: Updates the window with the latest documents from the working folder along with its status.
· Delete: Deletes the selected file permanently. NOTE: Before deleting, ensure to check in or modify the modified file as the files will be deleted permanently.
Creating a new working folder
To create a new working folder 1. On the Version Control menu, click Version Control Explorer. 2. Right-click on Repository and then click Set Working Folder. 3. Click the browse button and select a working folder. 4. Click OK. The files present in the working folder will be displayed in the Version Control Explorer window.
Recovering files deleted from the working folder Whenever the files are deleted from the working folder the same can be retrieved by getting the latest version from the repository. NOTE: You cannot recover the files deleted from the repository. To recover the deleted files
1. On the Version Control menu, click Version Control Explorer. 2. Right-click Repository and then click Get Latest Version. The latest files are retrieved from
the repository. Right mouse click options
1. Right-click on the file in the Version Control menu to see the additional options.
· Check-in: Checks in the selected file to the repository.
· Delete: Deletes the selected file permanently. NOTE: Before deleting, ensure to check in or modify the modified file as the files will be deleted permanently.
· Get Latest Version: Retrieves the latest files from the repository.
· Show Version History: Displays the various versions associated with the selected file.
· Compare With Previous Version: Compares the selected file with immediate previous version.
306
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Version Control Version History
· Revert: Reverts the modified file to the immediate previous version. This is enabled only if the selected file is in modified state. NOTE: After performing the revert operation on a file in modified state, the latest changes will not be updated if the file is open. User must close and open the file again to see the latest changes.
· Refresh: Updates the window with the latest documents from the working folder along with its status.
· Open: Opens the file separately in the respective format.
Version History
Displays the history of every version associated with the selected file.
· Select: Check boxes are provided to select the configuration files.
· Version: Displays the various versions associated with the file.
· Modified by: Displays the identity of the person responsible for the modification. This is the Windows user account.
· Modified on: Displays the date when the file was modified.
· Comment: Displays the comments provided during each check in. This generates a CRC code which is a unique checksum tagged to a version. This helps to match the configuration file running in the controller with the available version. NOTE: The files saved in a folder does not generate CRC value as they are checked in together.
· Compare: Compares two revisions associated to the same controller. You can compare two files at one time.
· Save as: Saves the configuration file to a folder that you want. You can save only one version at a time.
· Report: Exports the data from this window to a Microsoft Excel or a text file.
· Close: Closes this window.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
307
November 2019
Compare Functionality Compare Settings
34. Compare Functionality
The tool provides a powerful compare functionality feature which can perform the following tasks: · Compares the differences between two revisions of the cde file. · Compares differences between a configuration file with another configuration file from an online ControlEdge HC900 controller. · Compares the differences between two separate configuration files saved in a location.
IMPORTANT: Configuration files must belong to controllers of same type and version.
The following list provides the items which do not support the comparison functionality: · Configuration files which are in protected state cannot be compared. To remove the protection, see How to Add Worksheet Protection. · Controller name and the IP information are not compared. · Recipe, Set Point Profile, Set Point Schedule, Sequencer, Data Storage, and backup files are not compared. · Information related to alarm group configuration and event list configuration are not compared. · Parameters present in the following function blocks are not compared: o Alarm Group - Selected Tag, Group Title Parameters o XYR 6000 Transmitter - All parameters o Trend Point - List of Points, Trend Points o Sequencer - Event Signal
Compare Settings
The compare functionality provides option for applying filter to the compared reports. The Diff Filters helps to exclude location, order, and text information from difference summary report and comparison report. Similarly, the UI Filters helps to view the cde files separately or view the compared data. To use the filters:
1. Open the Version Control menu bar, go to Compare > Compare Settings. The Compare Settings window appears.
2. Select the check boxes to separate out the items. · Location: Excludes the position information of the items. · Order: Excludes the execution order of the logic. · Text information: Excludes the text items.
308
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25 November 2019
Compare Functionality Compare Two Revisions
3. Click OK to apply the filters. NOTE: The Diff Fitters will take effect only after reopening the files, whereas the UI Filters will take effect immediately.
Compare Two Revisions
This feature allows you to know the difference between two revisions of the same configuration file. IMPORTANT: The configuration files must be saved before performing the compare operation. To compare two revisions
1. Open the Version Control Explorer window. See Version Control Explorer for more information.
2. Click on a cde file which you want to compare with its previous versions. 3. Click History. The Version History window appears. See Version History for more
information. 4. Select any two versions that you want to compare and click Compare.
The tool compares the selected files and provides the differences in graphical and tabular representations. Additionally, you are allowed to generate reports. See Report Summary for more information.
Compare with Controller
This helps to compare the differences between a configuration file with another configuration file from an online ControlEdge HC900 controller. IMPORTANT: The configuration files must be saved before performing the compare operation. To compare with controller
1. Open a cde file that you want to compare. 2. Click Version Control Explorer > Compare > Compare With Controller window. The
Upload File window appears. 3. Provide the network details on which the online controller is connected. 4. Click Start.
NOTE: The controller name and the IP information are not compared. The tool compares the selected files and provides the differences in graphical and tabular representations. Additionally, you are allowed to generate reports. See Report Summary for more information.
Compare with File Selection
This helps to compare differences between two separate configuration files saved in a location. IMPORTANT: The configuration files must be saved before performing the compare operation. To compare with file selection option:
1. Open a cde file that you want to compare. 2. Click Version Control Explorer > Compare > Compare With File Selection. window. 3. Select a file and click Open. The tool compares the selected files and provides the differences in graphical and tabular representations. Additionally, you are allowed to generate reports. See Report Summary for more information.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
309
November 2019
Compare Functionality Report Summary
Report Summary
The report provides details of compared data between two files or versions. The data is classified and presented under different categories such as Controller, Process, Safety, and Difference Summary. The compared report can be exported to Microsoft Excel file and used for future references.
· Controller: Shows the comparison of controller properties such as controller name, and e-mail notifications, and priorities. It also indicates if the property is modified or unchanged.
· Process or Safety: Shows the comparison between control logics present all sheets of the cde files. The changes are highlighted in red, green, or cyan color to represent the following:
· Red: Indicates that the highlighted object is deleted. · Green: Indicates that the highlighted object is newly added. · Cyan: Indicates that the highlighted object was modified.
Double-click on the function block to view the parameter level differences of each block. This shows the parameters that are newly added, modified, and unchanged.
310
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Compare Functionality Report Summary
· Difference Summary: Provides a detailed summary of each item in different tabs.
· Worksheet Differences: Provides worksheet level the differences in each sheet. The Worksheet Index column provides hot links which directs you to the worksheets and shows the differences graphically.
· Function Block Differences: Provides the list of function blocks that have under gone changes. Indicates if they are newly added or deleted from the worksheets. The Block Name column provides hot links which directs you to the worksheet associated to the selected function block and highlights the block.
· Other Item Differences: Provides the list of changes made to other items such as variables, text items, write nodes, connectors, and so on. The Item Type column provides hot links which directs you to the other items on the corresponding worksheet and highlights the item.
· Modbus Map Differences: Provides the differences in item type, parameter name, and data type of the Modbus register map association.
Use the buttons on the tool bar to perform the following tasks:
Button
Action
Click to print the active worksheet. It opens the "Print" dialog box for printing.
Allows you find an Item on the worksheets. Opens the "Find Item" dialog box. See How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet
You can "zoom in" or "zoom out" to return items to normal size. Zoom levels of 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, and 150%.
Let's you place a grid in the Function Block Diagram. This can aid in the placement of items on the diagram.
You can navigate to the immediate previous or next difference. Also, navigate to the first or last difference item.
Exports the compared data to Microsoft Excel Sheet. The original value and the modified value is separated by '>' symbol.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
311
November 2019
Button
Action
Compare Functionality Report Summary
312
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Index
A
Accessing Port Diagnostics
249
Adding a Numeric Constant
131
Adding a Variable
127
Adding function block parameters to custom
map
288
Adding system parameters to custom map 291
Alarm Details
72, 106
Alarm Group Configuration
105
Alarm/Event Storage Configuration
90
Auto Calibration Procedure
172
Auto Save Functionality
141
B
Backup Controller Information
159
Batch File Management
181
Before you Start
123
Boundary Item
139
C
Calibrate AI Channel
169
Calibrate AO Channel
170
Calibrate CJ Temp
170
Calibrate Modules
169
Calibrate Position Proportional Output
171
Changing the Default Annotation Attributes. 142
Closing a Menu
18
Communications Statistics
57
Compare Functionality
308
Configuration File
33, 145
Saving
33, 145
Configuration Functions
183
Configuration Overview
177
Configuration Port Diagnostics
249
Configuration Port Diagnostics Status Indicators
251
Configure Modbus Map Method
277
Configure Modbus/Peer Write Access
163
Configuring Display Tag Groups
68
Connecting the PC to the Controller
8
Connecting/Disconnecting Blocks
125
Connectors
218
Context Sensitive Help
142
Control strategy
123
Controller Configuration Overview
61
Controller Configuration Toolbar
62
Controller Diagnostics
232
Controller Diagnostics Status Indications 234
Controller Idenfication
153
Controller Port Diagnostics
251
Controller to PC Connection Settings
55
Controller Utility Functions
147
Controller Worksheet Overview
61
Converting a UMC800 Database
36
Create/edit Data Storage File
86
Create/edit Recipe-Variables-File
185
Create/edit Schedule file
192
Create/edit Sequence File
197
Create/edit Setpoint Profile File
188
Custom Modbus Map
283
D
Data Storage Configuration
85
Data Storage Configuration Access
85
Data Storage Conventions
79
Data Storage Enable Conditions
82
Data Storage File
86
Data Storage Overview
79
Data Storage Utility
158
Default Annotation Attributes
142
Changing
142
Diagnostics 168, 232, 234, 240, 244, 249, 251,
253, 254, 255, 256, 258, 259, 266, 267
configuration port
249, 251
controller
232, 234
expansion I/O comm
256
host connections
258, 259
I/O module
244
Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics 265
Modbus Master Serial Port Diagnostics 262
network port
254, 255
peer to peer
266, 267
port
249
rack
240
RS485 OI port
253
Display Buttons Configuration
66
Display Tag groups
68
Displaying Function Block Pin Value
219
Download Setpoint Profiles
184
using recipe to download
184
Downloading a File to the Controller
41
Drag and Drop
142
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
313
November 2019
E
Edit Menu
21
Edit Schedule Segments
197
Edit Setpoint Schedule
197
E-Mail Notification
63, 74, 114
Enter Monitor Mode
206
Event Details
74, 113
Event List Configuration
73, 107
Execution Order
107
Expansion Port Diagnostics
256
Expansion Port Diagnostics Status Indicators
256
Export Delimiter
21
Export Report
275
F
Fast Logic Indicator
122
Fast Scan Indicator
122
FB Worksheet Overview
91
FBD Configuration Toolbar
92
FBD Worksheet Properties
102
how to change
102
File Browser Window
11
File Menu
19
File Protection
50
File Read Protection
50
Find Feature
225
Finding a Tag Name
225
Finding an Item on the FBD Worksheet
225
Fixed Modbus Map
277, 280
Forced Blocks Window
213
Forcing/Unforcing an Output
211
Function block
119, 121, 143, 219
accessing details
143
how to display pin value
219
inputs and outputs
119
Types
121
Function Block
124
adding, moving, deleting
124
Function Block Address
143
Function Block Definition
119
Function Block Diagram Configuration Toolbar
92
Function Block Diagram Rules
145
Function Block Diagrams
145
Function Block Identification
119
Function Block Monitor Window
210
Function Block Parameters
143
Function Block Usage Guidelines
122
Function blocks
125
connect/disconnect
125
G
General Hybrid Control Designer Window
Terminology
10
General Steps to Build a Control Strategy 123
General Terminology
10
General Windows Terminology
10
H
Hand Calibration Procedure
174
Hardware and Software requirements
5
Help Menu
26
Host Connections Diagnostics
258
Host Connections Diagnostics Status Indicators
259
How Do I Start Monitoring
208
How Do I Stop Monitoring
216
How to Add a New FBD Worksheet
93
How to Add a New Worksheet
93
How to Add Worksheet Protection
46, 103
How to Change A FBD Worksheet Properties
102
How to Change the Worksheet Order
102
How to Delete a FBD Worksheet
102
How to Find an Item on the FBD Worksheet 99
How to Manage PC Comm Ports and
Connections
51
How to Navigate Between FBD Worksheets 93
Hybrid Control Designer Main Menus
18
I
I/O Module Diagnostics Status Indications 244
K
Keyboard Navigation
31, 95
L
Library Functionality
115
Logic Inversion Color Codes
220
314
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
M
Main Menu
18
Main Menus
18
Main Toolbar Functions
27
Manually Write Database to Flash
162
Menu
17, 18
Closing
18
Selecting
18
Menu Conventions
17
Message Display Configuration
78
Modbus Address
280
Adding function block parameters to custom
map
288
Adding system parameters to custom map 291
choosing fixed or custom map
277
Custom Modbus Map
283
Fixed Modbus Map
280
Modbus Map Overview
277
Modbus Initiator TCP Port Diagnostics
265
Modbus Master Serial Port
Diagnostics
262
Monitor menu
24
Monitor Mode
206
indicator
206
Monitor Toolbar
206
Monitor Update Rate
206
Monitoring
203, 208, 216
how to start
208
how to stop
216
N
Navigational Tools
29
Network Port Diagnostic Status Indicators 255
Network Port Diagnostics
254
Numeric Constant
131
Adding
131
O
O/I File Names for Disk Storage
77
Operator Interface Displays
66
Operator Interface Settings
75
Operator Panel Configuration Toolbar Test 65
Operator Panel Worksheet Overview
65
Output
211
Forcing/Unforcing
211
Overview
216
Logic Flow
216
Overview On Line Monitoring
203
P
Page Connectors
137, 218
Password Configuration
166
Paste Special
21, 118
PC Comm ports and connection
51
how to manage
51
PC Network Port Set Up For Controller Access
51
PC Serial Com Port Setup
53
PC to Controller Connection Settings
55
Peer-to-Peer Connections Diagnostics 266, 267
Peer-to-Peer Connections Diagnostics Status
Indicators
266, 267
Pin Value
219
PlaceNameModbus,PlaceNameInitiator,PlaceNa
meTCP,PlaceType,Port,Diagnostics
265
PlaceNameModbus,PlaceNameMaster,PlaceNa
meSerial,PlaceTypePortDiagnostics
262
Point Log Storage Configuration
88
Position Proportional Output Calibration 171
PPO Block Auto Calibration
172
PPO Block Calibration
171
PPO Block Hand Calibration
174
PPO Block Semi-Auto Calibration
173
Print Report
267
Print Report Preview
274
R
Rack Module and Channel Assignments
5
Rack Diagnostics
240
Rack Diagnostics Power Supply
243
Recipe
187
Setup/Edit
187
Recipe Configuration Overview
183
Recipe Overview
181
Recipe Pool
186
Recipe Properties
187
Recipes Menu
25, 182
Recipe-Variables
183
configuration overview
183
Recipe-Variables- File
185
Recipe-Variables-Overview
183
Remote Loopback Test
56
Report
267, 274, 275
Export
275
Preview
274
Print
267
Resolve Dangling Soft Wires
97
Restore Controller Information
160
Restore Factory Calibration
171
Right Mouse Click
29
RS485 OI Port Diagnostics
253
RS485 OI Port status Indicators
253
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
315
November 2019
S
Saving A Configuration File Saving A Function Block Diagram Select the Number to Call Selecting a Menu Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure Sequence
setup/edit Sequence File Sequence Pool Sequence Properties Sequencer Configuration Overview Serial ports
set controller serial ports Set Controller IP Address Set Controller Mode Set Controller Network Parameters Set Controller Time Set Instrument Time Set Serial Port Setpoint Profile
properties Setpoint Profile Pool Setpoint Profile Properties Setpoint Program
configuration What is Setpoint Schedule setup/edit Setpoint Schedule File Setpoint Schedule Overview Setpoint Schedule Pool Setpoint Schedule Properties SETPT Setup/Edit a Recipe Setup/Edit Sequence Signal Signal Tags Software Overview Sort Function Start Up Display Configuration Starting the Application Status Bar system parameters
33, 145 33, 145
57 18 173 199 199 197 199 201 180 149 149 152 152 152 155 155 149 188, 190 190 189 190 177 177 177 197 197 192 179 197 197 143 187 199 134 134, 218
1 225
77 7
17 283, 291
T
Telephone and Email Contacts templates Terms and Definitions Traceback Window Trend Storage Configuration Types of Blocks
v 288 175 15, 96
86 121
U
UMC800 Database
36
Converting
36
Unforcing an Output
211
Unlock the Worksheet
64, 78, 114
User Assigned Tag Names
143
User Interface Overview
9
Using Recipes to Download Setpoint Profiles184
Utilities Worksheet Overview
147
V
Variables
127
Adding
127
Version Control
300
View Menu
23
Visual Indicators for Monitor Mode
206
W
Watch Summary - Display Groups
231
Watch Summary - Inputs/Outputs
230
Watch Summary - Page Connectors
228
Watch Summary - Signals
227
Watch Summary - User Defined
225
Watch Summary - Variables
229
Watch Summary Window
16
Watch Window
15, 96
What is Sequence Control?
180
Window Menu
26
Wire Nodes
133
Worksheet
46, 59, 64, 78, 93, 103, 114
How to add protection
46, 103
how to navigate
93
unlock
64, 78, 114
What is
59
Worksheet Category Tabs
60
Worksheet Overview
65, 91, 147
Worksheet Toolbox Window
12
Write Protect a File
50
316
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
Revision 25
November 2019
Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one of the offices below.
ASIA PACIFIC
Honeywell Process Solutions, (TAC) hfs-tacsupport@honeywell.com
Australia Honeywell Limited Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255 FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481 Toll Free 1300-36-39-36 Toll Free Fax: 1300-36-04-70
China PRC - Shanghai Honeywell China Inc. Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568 Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826
Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd. Phone: +(65) 6580 3278 Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone: +(822) 799 6114 Fax: +(822) 792 9015
EMEA
Honeywell Process Solutions, Phone: + 80012026455 or +44 (0)1344 656000
Email: (Sales) FP-Sales-Apps@Honeywell.com or (TAC) hfs-tac-support@honeywell.com
AMERICA'S
Honeywell Process Solutions, Phone: (TAC) 1-800-423-9883 or 215/641-3610 (Sales) 1-800-343-0228
Email: (Sales) FP-Sales-Apps@Honeywell.com or (TAC) hfs-tac-support@honeywell.com
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Revision 25
ControlEdge HC900 Control Designer User Guide
317
November 2019
For more information To learn more about ControlEdge HC900 Controller, visit www.honeywellprocess.com Or contact your Honeywell Account Manager
Process Solutions Honeywell 1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S Houston, TX 77042
Honeywell Control Systems Ltd Honeywell House, Skimped Hill Lane Bracknell, England, RG12 1EB
Shanghai City Centre, 100 Jungi Road Shanghai, China 20061
www.honeywellprocess.com
51-52-25-110 Rev.25 November 2019 2019 Honeywell International Inc.
tryan Adobe PDF Library 15.0